Transcription

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) ALL FIBER POLARIZATION CONTROLLER Features No intrinsic loss No backreflection Compact size Easy to use Wavelength insensitive Low cost Applications Singlemode to Polarization Maintaining (PM) fiber launching Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) measurements Launching into Polarization sensitive devices Fiber lasers Fiber interferometers Product Description Polarization controllers allow one to convert any input polarization to any desired output polarization. The device combines the compact size and ease of use of standard bulk optics systems with low costs, low losses, and low backreflections. The controller works by applying pressure with an adjustable clamp. The pressure on the fiber causes a birefringence within the fiber core, causing the fiber to act as a fractional wave plate. Varying the pressure varies the delay between the fast and slow polarization components. The clamp is rotatable, allowing one to change the direction in which the stress is applied. This allows any output polarization to be achieved. The process is simple and quick. Output polarizations exceeding 30dB can be routinely achieved in seconds. The fiber polarization controller works with singlemode fiber of any wavelength. The controller does not work with multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fiber. For multimode and PM fiber OZ Optics still offers their standard series of polarization rotators and analyzers (refer to the Polarization Rotators/Controllers/ Analyzers data sheet). All fiber polarization controllers are offered in three versions. The in-line polarization controller can be inserted onto a customer s own singlemode fiber. It can be used with any wavelength singlemode fiber. The in-line version is designed to work with only 250 micron and 400 micron jacketed fibers. Second, a pigtailed version is also offered. This version is available with any size of cable or fiber, and with your choice of connectors. Finally, a connector receptacle style controller is available, using a short section of fiber terminated with female receptacles. For further information contact OZ Optics. In-Line Polarization Controller With Fiber Receptacle Style Polarization Controller In-Line Polarization Controller Without Fiber DTS0001 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 17-Nov-04 1

10 Ordering Example For Standard Parts A university scientist is building a fiber interferometer and needs to manipulate the polarization of the light travelling through the fiber. He is using standard singlemode fiber for telecommunications wavelengths, and is using a 1480 nm source. To minimize reflections in his system he is using FC connectors with an APC finish. Based on this, a receptacle style controller will work in his application. Bar Code Part Number Description 6324 HFPC /1500-S-9/125-3A3A All Fiber Polarization Controller for 1300/1500 nm with 9/125 singlemode fiber and FC/APC receptacles on both ends. Questionnaire 1. Which of the following options best describes your needs? a) I want to install and remove my own fiber. b) I want a specific fiber permanently installed. c) I want receptacles on either side to plug devices into. 2. What wavelengths are you using? 3. For pigtail style models, what should be the fiber length and cable type? 4. For both pigtail and receptacle styles, what type of connector are you using? 5. What is the intensity of the light travelling through the fiber? Ordering Information For Custom Parts Pigtail Version: PFPC-11-W-S-a/b-XY-JD-L Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber. See Table 1 of the Standard Tables for other standard fiber sizes Receptacle Version: HFPC-11-W-S-a/b-XY Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7 Fiber jacket type: 1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3=3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other jacket sizes Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other connectors Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber. See Table 1 of the Standard Tables for other standard fiber sizes Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra FC NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other connectors Ordering Example For Custom Parts A fiber laser manufacturer wants to put a polarization controller in his system. His laser will operate at 1053 nm, so he needs singlemode fiber for that wavelength. He needs 10 meters of fiber installed in the device, five meters per side. For strength and safety, he is using 3 mm OD cabling. He wants FC/APC connectors on both ends. Part Number PFPC S-6/125-3A3A-3-5 Description All Fiber Polarization Controller with 5 meter long 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cabled 980 nm 6/125 singlemode fiber pigtails with FC/APC connectors on both ends. 3

11 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: High output power from 13 dbm (20mW) to 27 dbm (500mW) Wide spectral bandwidth Covers C-band, L-band, or both High stability Multi-output option-up to 4 ports Un-polarized output light Optional RS232 or USB interface High performance-to-cost ratio Optional built-in attenuator and optical power monitor Custom design flexibility ASE BROADBAND LIGHT SOURCE Preliminary Applications: Optical component testing Telecom system compliance testing EDFA gain spectrum measurements Optical fiber sensors and sensing systems WDM by spectral slicing Biomedical imaging Coherent communication systems Erbium-doped Fiber ASE Broadband Light Source Product Description: An ASE (Amplified Spontaneous Emission) broadband low coherence light source is an ideal instrument for optical component spectral measurement and system compliance testing in manufacturing and R&D environments. The new generation of ASE sources have no high frequency ripples, which makes them very useful for sensor interrogation applications. Sources are available to cover the C-band, L-band, or both the C & L bands together. These are available with either a flattened spectral output for demanding applications, or a non-flattened response for less demanding or cost-sensitive applications. A range of output powers are available. The output light is accessed via a female fiber connector receptacle on the front panel. A variety of standard connector types are available. Custom connectors can also be accommodated. Built-in splitters can also be provided to give multiple outputs without the cost of purchasing multiple sources. The basic version of the source has a simple ON/OFF operation. A built-in attenuator is available as an option, for users who need to be able to vary the output power. A built-in microprocessor can be included for applications that require the source or optional attenuator to operate under computer control. Either RS-232 or USB interfaces are offered. DTS0106 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 22-Mar-05 1

12 Questionnaire 1. What is the required power level? 2. What range of wavelengths do you need? 3. Would you like more than one optical output? If yes, how many? 4. Do you need to be able to control the optical power? 5. Do you need to have the source controlled by a computer? If yes, with what control interface? 6. Do you need a flattened spectral response? 7. What is your preferred connector interface? 8. What sort of package style do you prefer? Description ASE Broadband Source Part Number ASE-N-PP-B-S-F-X-O-I N PP B S Number of Output Ports. Specify 1, 2 or 4. The specified output power is divided equally amongst the output ports. Output Power in dbm: Example specify 13 for 13 dbm, 27 for 27 dbm. Power should be within the range of 13 to 27 dbm. Wavelength band: C = C band L = L band D= C & L bands Package style: 1 = Bench top 2 = Rack mountable 3 = OEM module 4 = Gain Block - No electronics provided, user must provide pump drivers 9 = Custom I O X Control interface: R = RS232 U = USB X = Not Applicable - ie. gain block version or basic version Options A = Built-in attenuator with microprocessor control B = Basic version M = Microprocessor controlled Receptacle style: 3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC MU = MU F Flatness: N = Non-flattened F = Flattened 3

13 Features: 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) PRELIMINARY Sensitivity to -70 db Built-in RS-232 communications port Wide range of available wavelengths Built-in source Dual wavelength source available Rugged and compact design High resolution Optional insertion loss measurement capability BACKREFLECTION METER Applications: Backreflection measurement of components Insertion loss measurement End-to-end loss measurement Quality control New Product development Component or system troubleshooting Network installation Fiber Optic Backreflection Meter Product Description: The OZ Optics Limited BM-100 and BM-200 Backreflection Meters measure the total accumulated optical return loss that is reflected back through a device or fiber under test. The measured reflections are caused by Rayleigh scattering, sudden changes in the refractive index within the device under test (DUT), or from connector ends. The Backreflection Meter is configured with an FC/APC connector on the output port, to minimize unwanted reflections. The meter has either one or two built-in laser diodes for return loss measurement at specific wavelengths. An optional detector can be added to the unit for insertion loss measurements. Reference patchcords for calibration are available. Adaptor patchcords are also available, to allow the meter to be used with devices having different connectors. The BM-100 and BM-200 Backreflection Meters can be operated remotely via the built-in RS-232 interface. An optional GPIB to RS-232 converter is also available. A universal AC/DC power supply, with a North American-standard power cord, is included with all units. Other types of power cords can be purchased separately. DTS0002 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 11/14/02 1

14 Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: A European fiber optic manufacturer must measure the backreflection and the insertion loss of singlemode and polarization-maintaining jumpers, at 1550 nm and at 1310 nm. The manufacturer needs to order the following parts: Bar Code Part Number Description BM-200-3A-1310/1550-9/125-S-IL Singlemode Fiber Optic Backreflection Meter, with dual 1310 and 1550 nm built-in sources and insertion loss measurement capability SMJ-3A1-1300/1550-9/ Reference patchcord, FC/APC to flat-polished ferrule, 9/125 micron singlemode 1300/1550 nm fiber, 3 mm OD PVC jacket, 1 m long SMJ-3A3U-1300/1550-9/ Hybrid patchcord, FC/APC to FC/UPC, 9/125 micron singlemode 1300/1550 nm fiber, 3 mm OD PVC jacket, 2 m long POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord. Ordering Information For Custom Parts: Although we strongly recommend the purchase of our standard products, OZ Optics also welcomes the opportunity to provide customdesigned products to meet your application requirements. There can be a difference in the pricing for a custom-designed device or part compared to our standard parts list. Please consider the following points when reviewing your quotation: Additional time is required to prepare a comprehensive quotation. Lead times are usually longer than normal. Non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges and lot charges may apply. A five piece minimum order is necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so you can make a well-informed decision. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is your application? 2. What wavelengths do you plan to use? 3. What connector receptacle type do you need? 4. What fiber type are you using? 5. What is the minimum backreflection you want to measure? 6. Do you want to measure insertion losses? 7. Do you want a single wavelength or dual wavelength source? Backreflection Meter: BM-A-X-W-a/b - F - BL(-IL) A =Source type: 100: Single wavelength source 200: Dual wavelength source X = Connector Code : 3= Standard, Super, Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC SC=SC SCA=Angled SC 8= AT&T-ST IL = Add -IL to the end of the part number for insertion loss measurement capability. BL = Backreflection range. If not specified, then a range of 70dB is assumed for singlemode fiber and 30dB for multimode fiber. F = Fiber type S: Singlemode M: Multimode W = Wavelength in nm: 850, 980, 1310,1480,1550,1625 or W 1 /W 2 for dual source, in nm: 1310/1550, 1550/1625, 1480/1550 a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in µm 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber. Notes: 1. For the multimode backreflection meter, the minimum measureable backreflection is 30 db. Multimode backreflection meters are configured with LED sources. 2. For singlemode backreflection meters, the minimum measureable backreflection measurement is 70 db, with angled FC/PC connectors, at wavelengths of 1310 nm, or higher. 3

15 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) BARE FIBER ADAPTER Bare fiber preparation Bare fiber adapters provide a simple and effective way to use unterminated fibers with commercial receptacles. Simply strip and cleave your fiber and insert into the bare fiber adapter. Broken fibers are easily removed with piano wire, allowing hundreds of insertions. They are recommended for power meter hook-ups, temporary system repairs or wherever a quick fiber connection is required. Standard adapters accommodate 81 micron, 125 micron or 140 micron cladding fibers with a typical insertion loss of less than 1dB. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Note: When using alcohol and acetone, carefully follow all safety, health and disposal information given on the container label, and on any material safety data sheets. 1. If you are using the bare fiber adapter with uncabled fiber, proceed to step 2. If you are using cabled fibers, strip at least 3 inches of the cable's outer jacket and cut away the exposed strength members (usually Kevlar fibers near the stripped edge). ORDERING INFORMATION: Part Number BARE-03-b BARE-08-b Description Bare fiber adapter for FC connectors. Bare fiber adapter for ST connectors 2. Strip a sufficient amount of the buffer to allow for fiber cleaving. The length of buffer stripped from the fiber will depend on the type of cleaving tool used. (Usually 1" to 2" is adequate.) 3. Cleave the fiber, leaving approximately 1/2" to 5/8" of exposed fiber. (See the illustration above). 4. Clean the exposed cladding with acetone and/or isopropyl alcohol (reagent grade). 5. Depress the spring-loaded buffer clamping mechanism and insert the cleaved fiber into the acceptance hole. Push the fiber through until the cleaved fiber end is flush with the ceramic ferrule end face. At this point release the buffer clamping mechanism, to hold the fiber in place. Inspect the end face with an eye loop and if necessary, adjust the fiber until it is flush. 6. Clean the surface of the ceramic ferrule with a lint-free, alcohol dampened cloth and blow dry with compressed air. 7. The fiber is now ready for use. Insert the adapter into the optical test equipment's coupler. Where: b is the ferrule hole size, in microns Standard sizes are 81 microns, 127 microns and 144 microns. Hole size tolerance is +1/-0 microns Contact OZ Optics for bare fiber adapters for other adapter types, and other hole diameters. ORDERING EXAMPLE: An FC style bare fiber adapter is needed for use with 127 micron cladded fibers. OZ Optics part number: BARE /99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.

16 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) BEAM SPLITTERS/COMBINERS Features High power handling High extinction ratio Highly modular and flexible design Wide wavelength range Bi-directional Broadband performance Custom designs welcomed Mode independent behavior in multimode fiber applications. Applications EDFA amplifier Raman amplifier combiner Polarization mode dispersion compensation Polarization extinction ratio measurements Fiber optic sensors Coherent communication systems Return loss measurement Product Description Fiber optic beam splitters are used to divide light from one fiber into two or more fibers. Light from an input fiber is first collimated, then sent through a beam splitting optic to divide it into two. The resultant output beams are then focused back into the output fibers. Both 1XN and 2XN splitters can be constructed in this fashion with both low return losses and low insertion losses. This design is extremely flexible, allowing one to use different fiber types on different ports, and different beam splitter optics inside. Splitters can also be made with either fibers permanently attached to each port (pigtail style) or with receptacles on each port that one can plug your fiber into (receptacle style). We can also build source to fiber couplers with built-in beamsplitters for either laser or laser diode sources. Contact OZ for details. Please note that we strongly recommend using pigtail style devices whenever possible. Mechanical tolerances on connectors and receptacles mean receptacle style devices suffer from higher losses and poorer polarization extinction ratios than pigtail style devices. This is especially true for singlemode and polarization maintaining fiber devices. If size is a concern, we recommend that you consider our miniature line of splitters. Please refer to our data sheet titled Miniature Inline Polarization Maintaining Splitters/Taps/Combiners. The two most common types of splitters offered are polarizing beam splitters and polarization maintaining beam splitters. Their operating principles are as follows: Polarization Maintaining Splitters: These splitters use a partially reflecting mirror to transmit a portion of the light from the input fiber to the main output fiber, and reflect the remainder of the light to the second output fiber. All ports made using polarization maintaining fiber are Pigtail Style One-by-two Splitter Pigtail Style Two-by-two Splitter Laser To Fiber Coupler With Built-in Beam Splitter Laser Diode Polarization Beam Combiner DTS0095 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 03-Mar-05 1

17 aligned so that polarized light aligned parallel to the stress rods on the input fiber emerges from the output fibers in the same manner, maintaining the polarization state to a high degree. Polarization maintaining splitters use a multi-layer coating to split the light by a specific ratio regardless of the incoming polarization. Because of the nature of these coatings, their behavior will vary somewhat with respect to wavelength, and so are recommended for an operating wavelength range of about ±10nm. Broadband beam splitters are offered, but with greater variation in the split ratio with respect to input polarization. Splitters that only split off a small portion of the input light are commonly known as taps. These splitters are often used for power monitoring applications. The small signal, typically between one and ten percent, is sent to a monitoring photodiode, while the majority of the signal goes on to the main destination. For a very low cost alternative configuration, combining the functions of a tap and monitor photodiode in a single unit, we invite you to review our Inline Optical Taps and Monitors data sheet. Polarizing Splitters: Polarizing Beam Splitters split incoming light into two orthogonal states. They can also be used to combine the light from two fibers into a single output fiber. When used as a beam combiner, each input signal will transmit along a different output polarization axis. It is important when using these splitters with polarization maintaining fiber that one understands how the polarization axes are aligned on each port. Figure 1 one shows the standard configuration. With this configuration, the following behavior will be observed: 1) Light launched along the slow axis of input port T will be transmitted along the slow axis of output port 1 2) Light launched along the fast axis of input port T will be transmitted along the slow axis of output port 2 3) Light launched along the slow axis of input port R will be transmitted along the fast axis of output port 1 4) Light launched along the fast axis of input port R will be transmitted along the fast axis of output port 2 This configuration can be changed based on a customer s requirements. Please note that with polarizing splitters there are two considerations: The ability of the splitter to prevent polarized light intended for port 1 from reaching port 2 or vice versa (polarization crosstalk), and the output polarization extinction ratio of the light emerging from polarization maintaining fibers attached to each port. The crosstalk level will always be equal to or greater than the polarization extinction ratio. For example, a splitter can be produced with a high cross talk ratio, but if the output fibers have mediocre performance, then the output polarization extinction ratio would be low. Please be sure to specify both of these values if your system has special requirements. Input Port R PORT R Two 4-40 Tapped holes, 0.50 inches apart, 0.34 inches deep (On the bottom) 0.39 (TYP) Input Port T Output Port 1 PORT T 0.87 PORT 1 Output Port 2 PORT Figure 1: Standard orientation of polarization maintaining fibers on polarizing beamsplitters Figure 2: Dimensions of standard two-by-two splitter 2

18 Description Pigtail Style One-by-two Splitter Pigtail Style Two-by-two Splitter Part Number FOBS-12P-111-a/b-ABC-W-S/R-LB-XYZ-JD-L FOBS-22P-1111-a/b-ADBC-W-S/R-LB-XTYZ-JD-L a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm singlemode fiber. 8/125 for 1550 nm PM fiber 7/125 for 1300 nm PM fiber See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes A,D, = Fiber Types on each port B,C (Input T, Input R, Output 1 and Output 2) M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) S/R = Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 50/50 Standard Use PBS for polarizing splitters L = JD = LB = Fiber length, in meters Fiber jacket type 0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable X,T, = Connector codes for each port Y,Z 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC LC = LC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors Backreflection level: 30, 40, 50, or 60 db 50, 60 db are standard for 1300 nm to 1550 nm only 40 db standard for other wavelengths 30 db is standard for multimode Note: Add -ER=25 or -ER=30 to the end of the part number for products with output polarization greater than 25 db and 30 db, respectively. Description Receptacle Style One-by-two Splitter Receptacle Style Two-by-two Splitter Part Number FOBS-12-XYZ-ABC-W-S/R FOBS-22-XTYZ-ADBC-W-S/R X,T, = Connector codes for each port Y,Z 3 = FC, Super FC/PC and Ultra FC/PC 3AF = Angled Flat NTT-FC SC = SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors S/R = Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 50/50 Standard Use PBS for polarizing splitters W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) A,D, = Fiber Types on each port B,C (Input T, Input R, Output 1and Output 2) M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining 5

19 Description Pigtail Style Laser Diode to Fiber Splitter Pigtail Style Laser to Fiber Splitter Part Number LDBS-12P-a/b-AB-W-S/R-LB-XY-JD-L-C ULBS-12P-a/b-AB-W-S/R-f-LH-LB-XY-JD-L a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm singlemode fiber. 8/125 for 1550 nm PM fiber 7/125 for 1300 nm PM fiber See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes A,B = Fiber Types on each port (Output 1, Output 2) M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) S/R = Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 50/50 Standard Use PBS for polarizing splitters f = Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 for Non-Contact couplers with receptacles in the Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes LH = Laser Head Adapter 1 for 1-32TPI Male Threaded Adapter 2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1 square 11 for Post Mount Adapter See Table 8 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors C = Coupling Efficiency 1 : 30 = 30% 45 = 45% 75 = 75% L = JD = LB = Fiber length, in meters Fiber jacket type 0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable X,Y = Connector codes for each port 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC LC = LC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors Backreflection level: 30, 40, 50, or 60 db 50, 60 db are standard for 1300 nm to 1550 nm only 40 db standard for other wavelengths 30 db is standard for multimode 1 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diode being used, not all coupling efficiencies are available for every laser diode for every fiber type. Description Receptacle Style Laser Diode to Fiber Splitter Receptacle Style Laser to Fiber Splitter Part Number LDBS-1XY-AB-W-S/R-C ULBS-1XY-AB-W-S/R-f-LH X,Y = Connector codes for each port 3 = FC, Super FC/PC and Ultra FC/PC 3AF = Angled Flat NTT-FC SC = SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors A,B = Fiber Types on each port (Output 1, Output 2) M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) S/R = Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 50/50 Standard Use PBS for polarizing splitters C = Coupling Efficiency 1 : 30 = 30% 45 = 45% 75 = 75% LH = Laser Head Adapter 1 for 1-32TPI Male Threaded Adapter 2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1 square 11 for Post Mount Adapter See Table 8 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors f = Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 for Non-Contact couplers with receptacles in the Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes 1 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diode being used, not all coupling efficiencies are available for every laser diode for every fiber type. 6

20 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) COLLIMATORS AND FOCUSERS RECEPTACLE STYLE FEATURES: High power handling Rugged and compact design Low insertion loss Wide wavelength range Wide range of beam diameters GRIN, aspheric, achromatic, plano-convex, and biconvex lenses available Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining fiber versions Diffraction limited optics LOW COST! PRELIMINARY APPLICATIONS: Fiber optic device packaging, including WDM s Splitters, and integrated optics Source to fiber coupling Fiber to detector coupling SPECIFICATIONS: Available Wavelengths: 180nm nm Polarization Extinction ratios: 20, 25, or 30dB Beam Diameters: 0.2 to 22mm Spot size: As small as <5 microns Wavefront distortion: λ/4 to λ/10 Insertion Loss: 0.6 db for 60mm separation 0.3 db for 10mm separation PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: OZ Optics offers a complete line of fiber collimators and focusers with low backreflection, designed to collimate or focus light exiting a fiber to a desired beam diameter or spot size. By utilizing diffraction limited lenses, spot sizes of a few microns can be achieved. These devices can be used with laser diodes, photodiodes, acousto-optic modulators and other fiber optic devices. Collimators and focusers can be used as matched pairs to couple light in and out of optical devices. This makes them ideal for fiber packaging of devices. For collimators, the collimated beam diameter (BD) and full divergence angle (DA) depends upon the focal length of the lens (f), the core diameter (a), and the fiber numerical aperture (NA). The collimated beam characteristics are given by: BD(mm) = 2 x f(mm) x NA DA(mrad) = a(µm) / f(mm) Collimators/Focusers With 20mm and 33mm Flanges 12mm OD Collimator/Focuser When using the above formulae, please exercise caution. Different definitions for the numerical aperture are used by fiber manufacturers. For instance, definitions based on 50 percent, 13.5 percent (1/e 2 ), 5 percent, and 1 percent intensity levels are all used. OZ Optics standard tables list the definitions used for each fiber type, as well as conversion factors to convert values to 1/e 2 values. OZ Optics uses 1/e 2 definitions for its calculations of the beam diameter wherever possible. 11mm OD Collimator/Focuser DTS0094 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 1

21 For fiber focusers, the exact calculation of the spot diameter (SD), magnification factor (M), and working distance (WD) is more difficult and depends on the properties of the lenses being used. As a first approximation, one can calculate the desired focuser characteristics using the geometric optics lens formulae: FIBER COLLIMATOR FIBER LENS DA/2 FIBER FOCUSER FIBER LENS i i o = M f = - o SD = M a WD =~ i Where o, i are the object and image distances respectively. Use the above formulae to determine what focal lens you require. Standard focal lengths and lenses are listed in the Standard Tables data sheet. Specifications: a f NA BD = 2 f NA DA = a/f DA/2 BD Figure 2: Operating Principle a o 1/i + 1/o = 1/f M = -i/o, SD = M a Note: The following specifications are typical values, and may vary, depending on the exact model selected. Contact OZ for detailed specifications for your exact model. Temperature Range: Operating: -15 C to 55 C with 0.2dB deviation in loss. Storage: -45 C to +75 C with less than 0.05dB residual loss. Vibration and Shock Test: Vibration tests were performed, consisting of a 0.05 inch peak to peak displacement, sweeping from 10 to 55 Hz over 15 minutes dwell at worst resonance of 55 Hz (.02g). Each device was tested for twenty-five minutes per axis for a total of 75 minutes of vibration. Tests were conducted in each of the three major axes of the test unit. Shock tests consisting on 100g, 11 msec duration half-sine shocks, three times on each face for a total of 18 shocks, were also performed. Coupling loss deviation was 0.05dB with no hysteresis. Power Handling: GRIN lenses: Up to 1 Watt. Aspheric lenses:up to 10 Watts Achromat lenses: 5 to 10 Watts Plano- and Bi-convex lenses: Up to 100 Watts Available Wavelengths: GRIN lenses: nm Aspheric lenses: nm Achromat lenses: 400/700nm and nm Plano- and Bi-convex lenses: nm Polarization Extinction Ratios: Dimensions: Typically >30dB for Aspheric lenses, >20dB for others. The dimensions given below are representative of typical products manufactured by OZ Optics. Actual dimensions will depend on the actual model ordered. In particular, the lengths of focusers may vary considerably from the lengths of a collimator for a given lens. The choice of receptacle will also affect the overall length. However, unless noted otherwise the dimensions for the clear holes, tapped holes and outer diameters of the flanges are accurate, and do not vary within product families regardless of which specific model collimator or focuser is purchased. The lens codes for which each version is designed for is listed below each drawing. Use the lens code to find the dimensions for your assembly. i SD Three 0-80 tapped holes 120 apart on a 1.125" diameter bolt circle 2AS 3.9AS 2.7AS 3.5AC 6AC 6.2AS 10AC 5BQ 10BQ 25AC Hole Pattern HPUCO-23 Dimensions Note: All units are in inches Three Ø0.096 thru holes 120 apart on a 1.125" diameter bolt circle ø0.791 ø0.590 ø Three 0-80 tapped holes 120 apart on a 1.125" diameter bolt circle AC 4.5AC 6AC 2AS 2.7AS Hole Pattern 3.5AC 2AS 11AS 4.5AC 2.7AS 13.9AS 6AC 3.9AS 18AC 10AC 6.2AS 5BQ 16AC 8AS HPUCO-33 Dimensions HPUCO-83 Dimensions 2

22 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionairre For Custom Parts 1. Do you require a fiber optic collimator, or a fiber optic focuser instead? 2a. For fiber collimator users only: What is the desired collimated beam diameter (in mm)? What is the desired collimated divergence angle (mrad)? 2b. For fiber focuser users only: What is the desired spot diameter (in microns)? What is the desired working distance (in mm)? 3. What is your operating wavelength range, in nanometers? 4. Will you be using singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining fibers? 5. What type of connector is on your fiber? 6. What is the output power through your fiber? 7. What is the desired flange size? 33mm, 20mm, 12mm, 11mm, or something else? Description Non-Contact Receptacle Style Collimator: Part Number HPUCO-AX-W-F-f A = Collimator Size 2 for 33mm OD flange 3 for 20mm OD flange 8 for 12mm diameter by 50mm long housing T for 11mm diameter housing X = Connector code: 3 = FC (Compatible with Flat, Super PC and Ultra PC finishes 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 3AF = Angled Flat FC 8 = AT & T-ST SC = SC See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors. f = Lens focal length and type: See Tables 9 to 12 of the standard tables data sheet for a list of available lenses and the collimator housings they fit. F = Fiber Type: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining W = Wavelength in nm: (Example: Specify 633 for 633nm) For achromat lenses at visible wavelengths specify 400/700 Description Non-Contact Receptacle Style Focuser: Part Number HPUFO-AX-W-F-M-WD-f A = Collimator Size 2 for 33mm OD flange 3 for 20mm OD flange 8 for 12mm diameter by 50mm long housing T for 11mm diameter housing X = Connector code: 3 = FC (Compatible with Flat, Super PC and Ultra PC finishes 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 3AF = Angled Flat FC 8 = AT & T-ST SC = SC See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors. f = Lens focal length and type: See Tables 9 to 12 of the standard tables data sheet for a list of available lenses and the collimator housings they fit. WD = Working Distance, in mm M = Magnification Factor F = Fiber Type: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining W = Wavelength in nm: (Example: Specify 633 for 633nm) For achromat lenses at visible wavelengths specify 400/700 5

23 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) COLLIMATORS AND FOCUSERS PIGTAIL STYLE FEATURES: High power handling Rugged and compact design Low insertion loss Low backreflection Wide wavelength range Wide range of beam diameters GRIN, aspheric, achromatic, plano-convex, and biconvex lenses available Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining Fiber versions Diffraction limited optics LOW COST! PRELIMINARY APPLICATIONS: Fiber optic device packaging, including WDM s Splitters, and integrated optics Source to fiber coupling Fiber to detector coupling SPECIFICATIONS: Wavelength: 180nm nm Backreflection: -35, -40, -50, and -60dB Polarization Extinction ratios: 20, 25, or 30dB Beam Diameters: 0.2 to 22mm Spot size: As small as <5 microns Wavefront distortion: λ/4 to λ/10 Insertion Loss: 0.6 db for 60mm separation 0.3 db for 10mm separation PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: OZ Optics offers a complete line of fiber collimators and focusers with low backreflection, designed to collimate or focus light exiting a fiber to a desired beam diameter or spot size. By utilizing diffraction limited lenses, spot sizes of a few microns can be achieved. These devices can be used with laser diodes, photodiodes, acousto-optic modulators and other fiber optic devices. Collimators and focusers can be used as matched pairs to couple light in and out of optical devices. This makes them ideal for fiber packaging of devices. For collimators, the collimated beam diameter (BD) and full divergence angle (DA) depends upon the focal length of the lens (f), the core diameter (a), and the fiber numerical aperture (NA).The collimated beam characteristics are given by: BD(mm) = 2 x f(mm) x NA DA(mrad) = a(µm) / f(mm) 2.5mm, 4mm, and 8mm OD Collimators/Focusers 1.6mm OD Collimator/Focuser When using the above formulae, please exercise caution. Different definitions for the numerical aperture are used by fiber manufacturers. For instance, definitions based on 50 percent, 13.5 percent (1/e 2 ), 5 percent, and 1 percent intensity levels are all used. Oz Optics standard tables list the definitions used for each fiber type, as well as conversion factors to convert values to 1/e 2 values. Oz Optics uses 1/e 2 definitions for its calculations of the beam diameter wherever possible. 12mm OD Collimator/Focuser DTS0060 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 1

24 Lens 2.39/2.44mm 18.5mm Strain Relief Tubing (Optional) Fiber: 250 micron acrylate coating, or 900 micron hytrel jacket FIBER COLLIMATOR FIBER FOCUSER 0.5mm 11.7mm 5.0mm Heat Shrink Tubing (Optional) FIBER LENS DA/2 FIBER LENS STANDARD VERSION Lens 10.4mm Epoxy bead Fiber: 250 micron acrylate coating, or 900 micron hytrel jacket a NA BD a SD 2.39/2.44mm f DA/2 o i 0.5mm 9.00mm Ferrule SHORT VERSION Figure 1: Miniature pigtail style collimators dimensions BD = 2 f NA DA = a/f Figure 2: Operating Principle 1/i + 1/o = 1/f M = -i/o, SD = M a For fiber focusers, the exact calculation of the spot diameter (SD), magnification factor (M), and working distance (WD) is more difficult and depends on the properties of the lenses being used. As a first approximation, one can calculate the desired focuser characteristics using the geometric optics lens formulae: i i o = M f = - o SD = M a WD =~ i Where o, i are the object and image distances respectively. Use the above formulae to determine what focal lens you require. Standard focal lengths and lenses are listed in the Standard Tables data sheet. TEST RESULTS: The following tests were conducted on a pigtail style collimator pair attached to a fixture providing a separation of 60mm. The pair was adjusted for maximum coupling efficiency. Temperature Range: Operating: -15 C to 55 C with 0.2dB deviation in loss. Storage: -45 C to +75 C with less than 0.05dB residual loss. Humidity Test: 97% humidity for 48 hours with 0.2dB deviation and less than 0.05dB residual loss (with the gap between the collimating lenses sealed against the environment). Vibration and Shock Test:Vibration tests were performed, consisting of a 0.05 inch peak to peak displacement, sweeping from 10 to 55 Hz over 15 minutes dwell at worst resonance of 55 Hz (.02g). Each device was tested for twenty-five minutes per axis for a total of 75 minutes of vibration. Tests were conducted in each of the three major axes of the test unit. Shock tests consisting on 100g, 11 msec duration half-sine shocks, three times on each face for a total of 18 shocks, were also performed. Coupling loss deviation was 0.05dB with no hysteresis. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What wavelength of light will you be transmitting through the fiber? 2. Do you need multimode, singlemode, or polarization maintaining fiber? 3. What fiber core/cladding size do you prefer? 4. If you need a collimator, what size collimated beam do you need? 5. If you need a focuser, what spot size and working distance do you need? 6. What is the maximum diameter collimator housing that you can use? 7. Do you prefer GRIN lenses, aspheric lenses achromat lenses, or plano convex / biconvex lenses? 8. How low a return loss do you require? 9. How long should the patchcord be, in meters? 10. Do you need a connector on the other end of the fiber? If so, what type? 11. What type of cabling do you need? 2

25 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Description Pigtail Style Collimator: Part Number LPC-0A-W-a/b-F-BD-f-BL-X-JD-L A = Collimator Size 1 for 4.0mm OD, no flange 2 for 33mm OD removable flange 1 3 for 20mm OD removable flange 1 4 for 8.0mm OD no flange 5 for 2.5mm OD, standard length 6 for 2.5mm OD, short length 2 7 for 1.6mm OD, no flange 8 for 12mm OD x 50mm long W = Wavelength in nm: (Example: Specify 633 for 633nm) a/b = Fiber core and cladding diameters, in microns: (Example: 9/125) See tables 1 to 5 of the standard tables data sheet for standard fiber sizes. F = Fiber Type: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining BD = Beam Diameter, in mm f = Lens focal length and type: See Tables 9 to 12 of the standard tables data sheet for a list of available lenses and the collimator housings they fit. Pigtail Style Focuser: A = Collimator Size 1 for 4.0mm OD, no flange 2 for 33mm OD removable flange 1 3 for 20mm OD removable flange 1 4 for 8.0mm OD no flange 5 for 2.5mm OD, standard length 6 for 2.5mm OD, short length 2 7 for 1.6mm OD, no flange 8 for 12mm OD x 50mm long W = Wavelength in nm: (Example: Specify 633 for 633nm) a/b = Fiber core and cladding diameters, in microns: (Example: 9/125) See tables 1 to 5 of the standard tables data sheet for standard fiber sizes. F = Fiber Type: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining M = Magnification Factor WD = Working Distance, in mm LPF-0A-W-a/b-F-M-WD-f-BL-X-JD-L L = Fiber length, in meters JD = Jacket Diameter 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD PVC loose tube with Kevlar 3A = 3mm OD armored 3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel armored 5A = 5mm OD armored 5AS = 5mm OD stainless steel armored See table 7 of the standard tables for drawings X = Connector code: X = No connector 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT & T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC/PC LCA = Angled LC See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors. BL = Backreflection level: 25 or 35dB for multimode assemblies 25, 40, 50, or 60dB for singlemode or polarization maintaining assemblies. 60dB versions are available for 1300nm and 1550nm wavelengths only L = Fiber length, in meters JD = Jacket Diameter 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD PVC loose tube with Kevlar 3A = 3mm OD armored 3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel armored 5A = 5mm OD armored 5AS = 5mm OD stainless steel armored See table 7 of the standard tables for drawings X = Connector code: X = No connector 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT & T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC/PC LCA = Angled LC See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors. f = Lens focal length and type: BL = Backreflection level: See Tables 9 to 12 of the standard tables data 25 or 35dB for multimode assemblies sheet for a list of available lenses and the 25, 40, 50, or 60dB for singlemode or collimator housings they fit. polarization maintaining assemblies. 1 Smaller diameter removable flanges (11.5mm to 15mm diameters) are available on request. 60dB versions are available for 1300nm and nm wavelengths only 2 2.5mm and 1.6mm OD short length collimators are available with 0.25mm, or 0.9mm OD jacketed fibers only.

26 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) CONNECTORS, PATCHCORDS, BULKHEAD RECEPTACLES & SLEEVE THRU ADAPTORS Patchcords can be terminated with NTT-FC, SC, AT&T-ST, LC, and SMA connectors, as well as other connector types. FC connectors are highly recommended for both singlemode and multimode use. They offer the highest precision and repeatability. SMA connectors are used mainly for very large core fibers and High Power applications. OZ Optics produces high quality fiber optic patchcords using a variety of commercially available connectors and fibers. These patchcords offer low insertion losses, and excellent repeatability. Patchcords can be manufactured to any specified length. An array of cable materials are available, including unjacketed fiber, 0.9mm outside diameter (O.D) loose tube buffer, 3mm O.D kevlar reinforced PVC jacketing, 3mm armored cabling, and 5.0mm heavy duty armored cabling. OZ Optics offers a variety of multimode (MM) fiber types, including telecommunication standard Graded Index (GI) fibers (50/125, 62.5/125 and 100/140 fiber sizes), and step index (SI) fused silica core fibers for high power applications (10 to 1000 micron core sizes). Multimode fibers are designed to operate well over a wide wavelength range. Their transmission range depends on the dopants used. There are low OH- fibers, which are optimized to either transmit well from 380nm to over 1600nm (IRVIS type), or high OH- fibers that transmit well from 280nm to 900nm (UVVIS type). Fibers that work at wavelengths below 280nm and above 1600nm are available on request. Singlemode (SM) fibers are available for a variety of wavelengths, ranging from 320nm to 1550nm as well as standard telecommunication fibers. They typically have a 99% numerical aperture (NA) of about Higher NA singlemode fibers are available for certain special applications. When ordering singlemode fibers please specify the wavelength it will be used for. Singlemode fiber designed for 1300nm will not be singlemode at 633nm. Singlemode fiber designed for 488nm will work at 633nm with only slightly higher losses, but at 700nm the losses are too high. FC connectors with Super PC and angle polished (APC) endfaces are available to minimize back-reflection. Typical backreflection levels are 45dB for Super PC connectors, and 60dB for APC connectors. FC connectors for SM fibers with ferrule hole sizes of 79, 80, 81, 82, and 83 microns are available to accommodate small cladding size fibers. FC compatible connectors are also the connector of choice for polarization maintaining fibers. Extinction ratios of 30dB are achievable. See the data sheet entitled Polarization Maintaining Connectors and Patchcords for more information. Bulkhead sleeve-thru adapters are also available. These devices allow you to connect two patchcords together, or to convert a male connector to a female receptacle. Flanged bulkhead female receptacles are also available for attaching angled or flat connectors to other optical devices. OZ Optics can also provide you with a variety of male connectors, housings, and ferrules, to perform your own terminations. A termination kit is available for this purpose. It contains all the tools necessary to make your own terminations in the field. If you only want a way to make a quick, temporary connection, then a bare fiber adapter can be used. NOTE: Multimode does not mean a bundle of fibers. Singlemode does not mean a single strand of fiber. A large assortment of fiber types are available from stock. OZ Optics also offers custom cabling services for customer provided fibers. Please read our Standard Tables data sheet for available fiber types. 09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specification without prior notice.

27 ORDERING INFORMATION Part Number Description MMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L Multimode fiber optic patchcord. QMMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L High power fused silica multimode fiber optic patchcord. SMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L Singlemode fiber optic patchcord. QSMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L High power fused silica singlemode fiber optic patchcord. PMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-A Polarization maintaining fiber optic patchcord. QPMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-A High power fused silica polarization maintaining fiber optic patchcord. SMPC-03 FC style sleeve-thru adapters with 2.14mm wide keyway. PMPC-03 Polarization maintaining FC style sleeve-thru adapters with 2.06mm keyway. BULK-0X-F Sleeve-thru connector adapters. HPLC-NTT/FC-SM (or PM) Flanged bulkhead FC receptacle. Write SM for singlemode and multimode applications, PM for polarization maintaining applications. HPLC-NTT/FC-PM-SL3.7 Flanged bulkhead receptacle for Angled NTT-FC/PC connectors HPLC-ATT/ST-SM Flanged bulkhead ST receptacle. HPLC-25-SMA/M Flanged bulkhead SMA receptacle without stopper. HPLC-SMA/M Flanged bulkhead SMA receptacle with stopper. PMPC-2X-b-JD FC compatible PM connector, with 2mm pin (Use X=3 for FC, 3S for Super FC). SMPC-2X-b-JD SM male connector, with 2mm pin (Use X=3 for FC, 3S for Super FC and 8 for ST). MMPC-2X-b-JD MM male connector, with 2mm pin (Use X=3 for FC, 5 for SMA 905 and 8 for ST). BARE-0X-b Bare fiber adapter (Use X=3 for FC, and 8 for ST). OFOC-01-X Connector termination kit. (Use X=3 for FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for ST, and SC for SC). HEAT-0X-V Fiber optic connector heater. V indicates the input AC line voltage (120V or 240V) HEGU-01-V Fiber optic heat gun. V indicates the input AC line voltage (120V or 240V) Where: X,Y are the input and output male connector types (1 for a 2mm diameter ferrule, 1A for an angled polished ferrule, 2 for Biconic, 3 for NTT-FC compatible, 3S for Super FC/PC, 3A for Angled PC, 5 for SMA 905, 6 for SMA 906, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC connectors, X for unterminated fiber ends), W is the operating wavelength of the SM or PM fiber, in nm. For MM fibers only, specify IRVIS for fiber with a 400nm to 1600nm operating range, or UVVIS for fiber with a 240nm to 900nm operating range. See the Standard Tables data sheet for available fibers. a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, in microns, respectively. Ferrule hole sizes for FC connectors are 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 124, 125, 126, and 127 microns, F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber); JD is the fiber jacket type (0.25 or 0.4 for unjacketed fiber, 0.9 for 0.9mm nylon jacketing or loose tubing, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube PVC cable, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A for 5mm OD armored cable.), L is the fiber length in meters, A is 1 for prealigned and locked PM connectors, 0 for unaligned PM connectors. Example 1: A customer requires a high power multimode fiber optic patchcord, with a 50 micron core size, and good transmission at 488nm. The patchcord must be 2 meters long, 3mm O.D armored cabled, and with angled FC style connectors on both ends. OZ Optics' part number: QMMJ-3A3A-IRVIS-50/125-3A-2. QMMJ-3A3A-UVVIS-50/125-3A-2 is also valid. Bulkhead SMA Receptacle Bulkhead SMA Receptacle with Stopper Bulkhead FC/PC Receptacle Bulkhead Angled FC/PC Receptacle

28 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) DELIVERY SYSTEM FOR FLOW VISUALIZATION FIBER OPTIC Flow visualization systems are useful tools for process automation and quality control in liquid and gas production and transport. A visible wavelength laser beam is coupled into an optical fiber, recollimated at the fiber output, and then sent through a lens, generating a line. The line of laser light is then shone through the flowing liquid under inspection. As the light passes through the moving fluid, it refracts and scatters. Any particulate matter present, or changes to the flow pattern within the fluid, causes fluctuations in the output beam pattern which are visually observed. OZ Optics offers complete delivery systems for flow visualization, consisting of a laser to fiber coupler, fiber optic patchcord, fiber optic collimator, and fiber optic line generator. The line generator uses a Powell lens. This lens offers the unique ability to take a collimated beam, and transform it into a line with a uniform output intensity along its entire length. This is a major improvement over standard line generators, that use simple cylindrical lens. With cylindrical lenses, the output intensity is highest at the centre of the beam, then gradually fades away to either side. With the Powell lens you get a sharply defined line from end to end. Fiber optic delivery systems are available for 488nm, 514nm, and 633nm wavelengths. Other wavelengths are available on request. The maximum power transmission possible depends upon the fiber size chosen - 4/125 fiber can handle 1 to 3 Watts, 10/125 fiber can handle 3 to 5 Watts, 25/125 fiber can handle 5 to 10 Watts, and 50/125 fiber can handle 10 to 20 Watts. For best repeatability and stability, FC connectors are recommended for the fiber couplers and collimators. Pigtail style couplers and collimators are also recommended. By choosing different focal lengths for the collimating and Powell lenses, different line widths and fan angles are possible. Standard line widths for singlemode fibers are 0.8mm and 1.2mm. Standard fan angles are 10, 30 and 45 degrees. Contact OZ Optics for further information on available line widths and fan angles. ORDERING INFORMATION: Part Number HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH FMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L FOLM-2X-W-F-f-FA START-0X-V-WR Description Laser to fiber coupler with a connector receptacle. Singlemode or multimode fiber optic patchcord. Fiber optic line generator. Alignment kit for singlemode laser to fiber couplers with receptacles (V refers to the video format. Specify NTSC for North American format, PAL for European PAL format). DTS0014 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 22-Feb-05

29 Where: X,Y are the connector receptacle types for connector style couplers and collimators. For fiber optic patchcords they refer to the male connectors on the fiber ends (3 for NTT-FC, 5 for SMA 905 connectors, etc. See table 1 below.), W is the operating wavelength in nm, a,b are the fiber core and cladding sizes, respectively, in microns. Available sizes include 4/125, 10/125, 25/125, 50/125, and 100/140, F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fibers, QS for fused silica core singlemode, QM for fused silica multimode, QP for fused silica polarization maintaining fibers. 10/125 fiber is considered to be singlemode fiber. It is constructed with a fused silica core.), f is the lens focal length, in mm, and type of lens being used. The following achromatic lenses are available: 3.5AC, 6AC, and 10AC, JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A for 5mm armored cable.), L is the fiber length in meters, LH is the laser head adapter number for the laser to fiber couplers (See table 2 below.), FA is the fan angle of the laser line from the line marker. Fan angles of 10, 30, or 45 are available. WR is wavelength range, IRVIS for nm, UVVIS for nm. When ordering the delivery system please specify the source laser beam characteristics (beam diameter, divergence angle, laser power, wavelength, and laser head adapter). OZ Optics provides a questionnaire to help you choose the best system for your application. Please complete it and fax it back before ordering. CONNECTOR TYPE CONNECTOR RECEPTACLE NUMBER (X) 2mm OD Ferrule 1 1.8mm OD Ferrule 1.8 AT&T Biconic 2 Universal Receptacle for connectors with 2.5mm OD ferrules 2.5U Standard NTT-FC/PC 3 Super NTT-FC/PC 3S Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3U Angled NTT-FC/PC 3A Angled NTT-FC/AFC 3AF NEC-D4 4 SMA905 5 SMA906 6 Diamond 3.5mm OD 7 AT&T-ST 8 Super AT&T-ST 8S Ultra AT&T-ST 8U Diamond HMS-10/HP 2.5mm OD 9 DIN Standard 2.5mm OD 0 SC SC Angled SC SCA Ultra SC SCU No Connector X ST is a registered trademark of AT&T. LASER HEAD ADAPTER ADAPTER NUMBER (LH) BAR CODE # 1"-32 TPI Male Threaded Adapter " Disk Adapter with 4 holes on corners of 1" square /4" - 32TPI Male Threaded Adapter /8" - 32TPI Male Threaded Adapter /2"-20 TPI Male Threaded Adapter for Amoco lasers /8"-24 TPI Male Threaded Adapter " O.D. Female Adapter for cylindrical lasers without any mounting holes " O.D. Female Adapter for cylindrical lasers without any mounting holes " O.D. Female Adapter for cylindrical lasers without any mounting holes " O.D. Female Adapter for cylindrical lasers without any mounting holes Post Mount with 1/4"-20 TPI hole mm O.D. Male Adapter for Spindler and Hoyer Optical Bench Polytec Laser Head Adapter Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 0.625" square for Lightwave Electronic lasers " O.D. Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1" square and 1"-32 TPI female thread in the middle /2"-40 TPI UNF-2A Male Threaded Adapter Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 27mm bolt circle Siemens Lasers /8"-24 TPI Female Laser Head Adapter for ILT lasers Disk Adapter with 3 holes on a 2.25" diameter bolt circle for Omnichrome lasers " Disk Adapter with 4 holes on a 35mm diameter bolt circle

30 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features Varies the delay between two polarization states Low loss Sub-picosecond resolution Wide wavelength range ±50 psec delay range Electronically controlled DIFFERENTIAL POLARIZATION DELAY LINES Applications PMD compensation in high speed communications networks PMD emulation TDM bit alignment Interferometric sensors Coherent telecommunications Differential Delay Line Product Description OZ Optics new differential delay line represents the next stage in controlling polarization mode dispersion in optical networks. The device splits the light within a fiber into orthogonal polarizations, and then actively varies the time that one polarization travels compared to the other polarization before combining the two polarizations together again. With this technique, one can introduce up to ±50 picoseconds of optical delay in a system. The resolution of the device is better than picoseconds, thus providing a high degree of control. The device is easily controlled by a computer via an RS-232 interface. Home and End position sensors allow easy monitoring of the device status and prevent any potential damage to the device. Figure 1: Differential Delay Line Dimensions (inches) DTS0005 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 04/02 1

31 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What delay range (in psec or mm) do you need? 2. What resolution (in psec or mm) do you need? 3. Do you need a readout of the position? 4. What interface do you prefer for device control? 5. What wavelength will you be using? 6. What is the worst acceptable return loss? 7. What kind of fiber connectors are you using? 8. What size of cable should be used? 9. How long should the fibers be? W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for1550nm) a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber LB = Backreflection level 40, 50 or 60dB (60dB is available for 1300 and 1550nm only) X,Y = Connector code: Specify input connector followed by output connector X = No connector 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC LCA = Angled LC MU = MU DDL W-a/b-S-LB-XY-JD-L -I I = Interface PC for base model with no microcontroller MC/RS232 for Intelligent RS232 Interface L: Fiber length in meters, on each side of the device. If they are different, specify the input and output fiber lengths separated by a comma. Example: To order 1 meter of the fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace the L with 1,7 JD = Fiber jacket type 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See the Standard Tables for other jacket sizes Ordering Examples for Custom Parts: A customer is building a PDL emulation system to test PDL effects at 1480nm using RS232 control. He needs singlemode fiber pigtails 1 meter long on each side, and does not need connectors. Because he is fusion splicing, he prefers uncabled fiber. Part Number DDL /125-S-60-XX-1-1-MC/RS232 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): Description Electrically Controlled Differential Delay Line for 1480nm, with 60dB return loss. Pigtails are 1 meter long 0.9mm OD tight buffered 9/125 SM fibers, no connectors. Controlled via an RS232 protocol. Q: Is the minimum delay zero picoseconds? A: Yes. The delay can be positive or negative (ie, one polarization either lagging or leading the other polarization). Q: Are the units calibrated? A: Yes. The zero PMD reading is referenced to within ±1psec. All measurements are made relative to this value, with better than psec resolution. Q: What limits the accuracy of the 0 psec point? A: Several issues. First, the zero point is determined with a PMD meter, which is limited in its accuracy. Second, the delay introduced by the device is also affected by how the fiber is coiled or bent during measurement and installation. 3

32 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) DIGITAL INLINE OPTICAL POWER MONITOR/METER Features: Low insertion loss Continuous fiber. No interruptions to optical path Display units are interchangeable Wide dynamic range High power handling Polarization maintaining (PM) fiber versions available Rugged and compact design Long battery life Automatic shut off RS-232 interface option available Analog output option available Applications: Optical power control devices Channel balancing for WDM systems Dynamic optical amplifier gain monitoring Power monitoring Network monitoring Real time in-line test and measurement Network installation Fiber optic sensor PRELIMINARY DATA SHEET Inline Optical Power Monitor/ Meter With Digital Display Product Description: Using a new, patent pending process, OZ Optics, as part of its new series of inline optical power monitors and tap couplers, now offers a digital inline optical power monitor (for more details about OEM optical power monitors, see the "Inline Optical Taps and Monitors" data sheet). Based on a groundbreaking new fabrication process, these all-fiber taps and monitors provide a way to easily measure the average signal intensity through an optical fiber via tapped light channeled into a built-in photodiode, without interrupting the traffic. The photodiode produces a signal proportional to the optical power traveling through the fiber with high directivity. The OPM-200 product integrates a novel inline optical tap with a low noise InGaAs detector in combination with a high dynamic range logarithmic amplifier. The built-in microcontroller processes and displays the power transmitted through the selected fiber channel on an LCD display. Inline Optical Power Monitor/Meter With Manually Variable Attenuator The optical tap modules and display units are independently calibrated, so any display unit can be plugged into any tap module and the measured power will be automatically calibrated. A low voltage circuitry design ensures a long lifetime for the built-in battery. The detector module can be calibrated for either a single wavelength or for a broad wavelength range. Optional, RS-232 and analog outputs are also available. The OPM-200 is ideal for network monitoring, out of specification alarms, and/or DWDM systems for real time monitoring and feedback. Our inline taps are highly directional and ideal for monitoring traffic traveling in one direction only. It may also be used for measuring return losses instead of transmitted power. In the same product family, OZ Optics now provides OEM single channel optical power monitors and multi-channel power monitors for DWDM system integration. Inline Optical Power Monitor/Meter: Detector Unit And Plug DTS0052 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 01/19/04 1

33 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: Although we strongly recommend the purchase of our standard products, OZ Optics also welcomes the opportunity to provide custom-designed products to meet your application requirements. There can be a difference in the pricing for a custom-designed device or part compared to our standard parts list. Please consider the following points when reviewing your quotation: Additional time is required to prepare a comprehensive quotation. Lead times are usually longer than normal. Non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges and lot charges may apply. A five part minimum order is necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so you can make a well-informed decision. Questionnaire for Custom Parts: 1. What is your operating wavelength range? 2. Do you need a single calibration wavelength or calibration across the entire wavelength range? 3. Do you need standard singlemode fiber or polarization maintaining fiber? 4. What is the expected optical power through the fiber, or what tap ratio do you need? 5. Do you need the ends of the fiber connectorized? What type of connector do you need? 6. How long should each end of the fiber be? 7. Do you need the fiber cabled? What cable size do you need? 8. Do you need a display? Do you need it with analog output? RS-232, or with both analog and RS-232? Description Kit: Detector Module With Display unit: Part Number OPM-200-W-a/b-F-XY-J -L(-C) W: Calibrated Wavelength in nm: 980, 1310, 1480, 1550 or 1620 for single wavelength calibration and 1290/1620 for broad spectral calibration a/b: Fiber core/cladding sizes, in µm: 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber. 6/125 for 980/1064nm SM fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PM Fiber F: Fiber type S: Singlemode P: Polarization maintaining fiber C: Communication interface: Leave empty for no interface A = Analog voltage interface S232 = RS-232 communication interface A/RS232= For both Analog and RS-232 L: Fiber Length in meters for each side J: Jacket size: 1= 1mm OD loose tube Jacket 3= 3mm OD PVC cable X,Y: Connector code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT- FC/PC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC 8 = AT&T-ST LC=LC MU=MU 4

34 Description Detector Module: Part Number OPM-200-W-a/b-F-XY-J -L-DET W: Calibrated Wavelength in nm: 980, 1310, 1480, 1550 or 1620 for single wavelength calibration and 1290/1620 for broad spectral calibration a/b: Fiber core/cladding sizes, in µm: 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber. 6/125 for 980/1064 nm SM fiber 8/125 for 1550 nm PM Fiber F: Fiber type S: Singlemode P: Polarization maintaining fiber Description Display unit: Part Number OPM-200(-C)(-PS) L: Fiber Length in meters for each side J:: Jacket size: 1= 1mm OD loose tube jacket 3= 3mm OD PVC cable X,Y: Connector code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT- FC/PC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC 8 = AT&T-ST LC=LC MU=MU C: Communication interface: Leave empty for no interface (standard) A = Analog voltage interface RS232 = RS-232 communication interface A/RS232= For both analog and RS-232 PS: Power supply plug (only required if a communication interface is ordered) NA = North America EU = Europe UK = United Kingdom Ordering Example For Custom Parts: A North American DWDM manufacturer wants to measure the IL at wavelengths across a broad spectral range through an RS-232 communication interface. The manufacturer needs to order the following parts: Bar Code Part Number Description OPM /1620-9/125-S-3U3U-3-1-DET Inline tap detector module calibrated from 1290 to 1620nm. The fiber is 1m long on each side, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 micron singlemode fiber with Ultra FC/PC connectors on both ends OPM-200-RS232-NA Optical Power Monitor display unit with RS232 interface. Battery and AC powered. RS-232 cable, 5V AC/DC North American power supply and right angle detector interface plug are included. Figure 2: Detector Unit Mechanical Dimension (inches) [mm] 5

35 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: Narrow linewidth Polarization insensitive Wide wavelength range Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining fiber versions High resolution Built in computer RS232 interface GPIB/RS232 converter available Applications: Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Tunable sources Spectral analysis Quality control and measurement Product development Fiber optic component manufacturing Automated testing Product Description: DIGITAL TUNABLE FILTERS Tunable filters consist of a collimating optical assembly, an adjustable narrow bandpass filter, and a focusing optical assembly to collect the light again. Tunable filters are available in three versions - a manually adjustable version, a motor driven version for OEM applications, and a digital version. Digital Tunable Filter The digital tunable filter is a hand held unit with a keypad, display, and computer interface. The device works on the principle that by adjusting the angle of incidence between the filter and the incident beam one controls the wavelength at which the filter transmits. The digital version is calibrated such that the user directly enters the wavelength to transmit via the keypad or remotely, through the computer interface. An RS232 interface with cable is standard with GPIB to RS232 converter offered as an optional accessory. GPIB/RS232 Converter Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width at Half Maximum (FWHM). The standard filter used in tunable filters has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. Other filter profiles are available. For instance, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the outof-band rejection level. For more information on custom filters please contact OZ Optics. OZ Optics tunable filters now utilize a new optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This new design reduces PDL to below 0.3dB, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. This feature makes it ideal for today's DWDM system applications. Tunable filters using singlemode, multimode and Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are offered.in general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. Figure 1: Digital Tunable Filter Layout DTS0006 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 06/02 1

36 SAMPLE TEST DATA FOR TUNABLE FILTERS Wavelength (nm) PDL (db) Figure 2: Typical Transmission Curve For 1.2nm C-Band Tunable Filters Standard Product Specifications: Power Supply: Computer Interface: Resolution: Tuning Range: Wavelength Range: Linewidth: (FWHM): Wavelength/Temperature Sensitivity PDL: Insertion Loss: Standard Wavelength Ranges: Power Handling: Response Time: Dimensions: Weight: Repeatability Universal 110/220 Volt AC/DC adapter. Removable North American power cord included. Other power cords available as accessories. RS232. External GPIB-RS232 adapters available. Typically less than 0.1nm 50nm (C-band), (L-band) and (S-band) standard. Other ranges available on request. 1.1 ±0.1nm standard. As narrow as 0.3nm is available as an option. Typically less than 0.002nm/ C Typically less than 0.3dB Typically less than 2.5dB for complete device over full tuning range. S, C and L bands: nm, nm and nm Up to 200mW for standard package. 50nm change in less than 1 sec. 1nm change in less than 0.1 sec. 5.9 x 3.2 x 1.8 inches (150 x 81 x 46mm) 1lb (450g) (not including protective boot) Typically better than 0.2nm 2

37 Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: A customer in Europe wants to use a broadband source as a tunable source in order to test the spectral characteristics of optical components at different wavelengths. Both the light source and components have FC/PC receptacles and the wavelength region of interest for the components is throughout the C-band. The broadband source is polarized randomly and therefore the tunable source required should be polarization insensitive. The customer would like to be able to adjust the wavelength at the workstation as well as remotely from a computer. He is using a GPIB control interface. The component required for this application is a polarization insensitive digital tunable filter. With this unit connected to the broadband light source and by directly entering the wavelength to transmit via the keypad or remotely, through the computer interface, the transmitted wavelength from the broadband source can be tuned from 1520 to 1570nm. Bar Code Part Number Description TF-100-3S3S-1520/1570-9/125-S Polarization insensitive digital tunable filter for nm 9/125 SM fiber with 40dB return loss, super FC/PC receptacles and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter GPIB-RS232 GPIB/RS232 Converter 4571 GPIB-CABLE-2 GPIB cable, 2m long 2737 POWER CORD-EUROPE Power Cord - European 4mm Round Pin Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What wavelength range are you interested in? 2. What linewidth do you require? 3. What type of transmission profile do you require? 4. What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, Multimode or PM? 5. Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source? 6. What return losses are acceptable in your system? 7. What connector type are you using? X,Y = Input & Output Connector codes: 3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC 8=AT&T-ST SC=SC SCA=Angled SC LC=LC LCA=Angled LCA W = Wavelength range in nanometers: Example: 1520/1570 a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns: 9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF 28 fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber TF-100-XY-W-a/b-F-LB-LW LW = Linewidth in nm: Standard filter is Fabry Perot. For a flat top profile filter, add the letter F to the end of the number. LB = Backreflection Level: 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or polarization maintaining fibers only (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength ranges only) 35dB for multimode fibers F = Fiber type: M=Multimode S=Singlemode P=Polarization Maintaining Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: Example 1: A customer in North America has a specialty polarized light source between the C and L bands and wants to use it as a tunable source while maintaining the extinction ratio. The source is used between 1550 and 1600nm and is pigtailed with a super FC/PC connector. A custom version of the digital tunable filter with a narrow linewidth made for PM fiber will meet this requirement custom filter. Part Number TF-100-3S3S-1550/1600-8/125-P Description Polarization maintaining digital tunable filter for nm 8/125 PM fiber with 40dB return loss, super FC/PC receptacles and a custom 0.3nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter. 4

38 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): Q: What is the filter linewidth? A: The standard filter is a 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter. This can be customized to suit the customer's requirements. Q: How do you define your linewidths? A: Standard filters are specified by their Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). This is the transmitted line width at -3dB from the peak transmission. For custom filters linewidths such as the passband at -0.3dB and -25dB can be specified. Q: What is the largest tuning range available? A: The standard tuning range is 50nm, however the filters can be made operational for a 100nm tuning range with some effects on the linewidth and insertion loss in the lower wavelength (high angle of incidence) region. Q: What is a Fabry Perot filter? Are there other types available? A: A Fabry Perot filter has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. By adjusting the spacer thickness one can adjust the pass bandwidth of the filter. Other shapes of filters are available. For example, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. For more information on what custom are filters available please contact OZ Optics. Q: Is the shape of the transmission curve affected by polarization? A: No, OZ Optics tunable filters utilize an optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This design reduces PDL to minimal levels, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. Q: How well does the filter block unwanted wavelengths? A: For standard single cavity filters the typical line width at -20dB is ~10nm. This type of filter is good for selecting specific channels in a DWDM system or cleaning up the ASE noise from a broadband source. The filter may transmit light at specific wavelengths significantly outside the operating wavelength range For custom applications requiring different out-of-band isolation please contact OZ Optics. Q: What linewidth do I need in a 200GHz DWDM system? 100GHz? 50GHz? A: Typical linewidths associated with these frequencies are 1.2, 0.8 and 0.3nm respectively. This ultimately depends on the channel width and isolation levels required for the system in question, OZ Optics can work with you to build the filter that best suites your requirements. Q: Is the unit calibrated? A: YES, the Digital Tunable Filter uses a stepper-motor which is calibrated to give the desired wavelength within the specified wavelength range of the unit. Q: Does the device operate at 220V as well as 110V? A: Yes, the universal power adapter works for both voltages but you have to use the appropriate power cord. A North American style power cord is included with the unit. Other types of power cords may be ordered separately. Application Notes: Introduction: OZ Optics' family of hand-held test equipment includes the Digital Tunable Filter for transmission of a well-defined band of light. Wavelength selection is controlled by angle of incidence of a collimated beam to a bandpass filter. Control of angle is accomplished with a micro-controlled stepper motor geared for an optimal balance of speed and resolution. The OZ Digital Tunable Filter TF-100 system includes the handheld unit with impact-absorbing blue rubber boot, RS-232 cable, AC/DC power supply with cord. Introduction To Thin Film Filters: In many fiber-optic applications we need to use light with a specific frequency or wavelength (l). Although a laser may be an excellent source of monochromatic radiation, we might need a source of light providing controlled, variable wavelength. Bandpass filters provide an effective means of transmitting a well-defined band of light while blocking unwanted wavelengths emanating from a broadband source. OZ Optics' Tunable Filter uses a narrow wavelength bandpass filter. With increased angle of incidence, the filter transmits light of decreased wavelength (Figure 3) Figure 3. Conceptual design of a tunable filter. 5

39 Application Notes: (cont d) The typical output wavelength distribution is demonstrated in Figure 4. tunable filter Figure 4: Use of a broadband source and a tunable filter to create a narrow-band signal. The main problem with typical tunable filters that has been solved by OZ Optics is their polarization sensitivity. As the angle of incidence increases, the sensitivity to polarized light also increases. (See Figure 5) This is a very important point in optical systems as the separation of the S and P polarizations causing large PDL can have detrimental affects on the system. Figure 5: Differences in spectral width and attenuation between "P" and "S" polarized light. OZ Optics' tunable filters utilize an optical technique to control PDL making the spectral response polarization insensitive. The polarization insensitivity is accomplished through the precision alignment of optical components on both the input and output side of the filter. As demonstrated in Figure 6. below, the light is first split into its respective polarizations and then one of the polarizations is rotated such that the light incident on the filter is all the samepolarization. After passing through the filter the other poliarization is rotated and then the beams are combined for the final focusing and collection into the fiber. By rotating the light and having a common polarization pass through the filters the PDL effect of the filter at high angles of incidence is avoided.therefore, the spectral response of S and P polarizations remain the same for increasing angles of incidence. See figure 7. Figure 6: A perspective sketch showing the splitting and recombining of the polarizations in a tunable filter. Figure 7: "S" and "P" polarized output light at a high angle of incidence in the OZ Optics filter. 6

40 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: CE Compliant High power handling (up to 2 watts) High speed Wide attenuation range Low PDL and wavelength dependency Low insertion loss and backreflection High resolution Rugged and compact design Calibrated for dual wavelengths, ( nm) or calibrated for C and L bands. It can also be calibrated for up to four individual wavelengths Wide wavelength range Wide range of receptacles Blocking technique for singlemode; neutral density filter technique for multimode fiber applications Computer interface Polarization maintaining fiber versions are available. Applications: Bit error testing Trouble shooting receivers and other active fiber optic components Simulating long distance fiber transmission Design of fiber optic transmitter/receiver circuitry Power meter linearity checks Power setting Product Description: DIGITAL VARIABLE ATTENUATOR Digital Variable Attenuator OZ Optics offers a compact, rugged and low cost digital attenuator with high resolution, high speed, high attenuation range and high power handling (blocking technique only). OZ Optics' digital attenuator is a hand held unit, CE approved. These attenuators have low insertion loss, low backreflection, low PDL and flat RS-232 GPIB Interface wavelength response. These units can be calibrated for up to 4 wavelengths, for C or L bands. Alternatively the unit can be calibrated for a continuous range. By using interpolation between the calibration wavelengths, the unit is capable of providing accurate attenuation levels over a continuous, broad range of wavelengths. OZ Optics' digital attenuators are ideal for use in bit error rate testing, troubleshooting receivers and other active fiber optic components, power meter linearity checks, simulating long distance fiber transmission and power setting. A computer interface allows users to access or remotely control the unit through a PC. OZ Optics provides digital attenuators that use either singlemode, multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fiber. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. DTS0007 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 04/02 1

41 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 5 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. How much power will be transmitted through the attenuator? 2. What type of fiber do you wish to use? 3. What is the worst acceptable return loss? 4. Will this attenuator be used in Europe or in the United Kingdom? 5. Are there any special performance requirements that you need to meet? 6. What wavelengths do you want the attenuator calibrated at? Digital Variable Attenuator: X = Connector code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT & T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See the standard tables data sheet for other connectors W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers: Example: 1300/1550 for standard telecom wavelength range DA-100-X-W-a/b-F-LB LB = Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode fibers,35db for MM fibers F = Fiber type: M=Multimode S=Singlemode P=Polarization Maintaining a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber. See the standard tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes Note 1: For low insertion loss attenuators add "-LL" to the end of the part number. LL 0.6dB with units that have 60dB return loss, LL 1dB for rest of the attenuators To handle continuous power levels above 500mW, add -HP to the end of the part number. Maximum continuous power level should not exceed 2 watts. Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: A customer wants to order a digital attenuator to be calibrated at 1300nm and 1550nm, using singlemode fiber and FC receptacles with 50dB back reflection and 1dB insertion loss. The part number should be: DA-100-3U-1300/1550-9/125-S-50-LL Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): Q: What advantages or disadvantages does the beam blocking version have over the neutral density versions. A: The beam blocking technique is naturally suited for high power applications, and can achieve greater attenuation levels. The neutral density version shows less mode dependence or modal noise in multimode applications. Q: What do you mean by mode dependence and modal noise? A: The term multimode means there is more than one path for light to travel inside a single fiber. These paths are known as modes. It does not mean the unit consists of multiple fibers in a bundle. When coherent laser light is coupled into multimode fiber, the output shows speckles. Bending the fiber causes the speckle pattern to change. If the losses in a system depend on which modes are excited, then changing the modes excited in the fiber changes the output power. This is known as modal noise. If the source being used is an LED, then one does not see speckles, and modal noise is not an issue. However, for laser sources, modal noise is an issue. When blocking style attenuators are used with multimode fiber, some modes are blocked, while others are transmitted. This can produce 1dB or greater modal noise fluctuations with coherent sources. A variable attenuator using a neutral density filter is not as strongly affected by modal noise. However, neutral density filter attenuators offer lower attenuation range (around 40dB) and can only handle about 50mW of power. Q: What are the standard numerical apertures (NA) for the fibers used in your attenuators? Should I specify the NA of the fiber when I'm ordering an attenuator? A: Please see our standard tables for detailed information on our fibers. If you want to use fiber that hasn't been specified in the standard tables then you should specify it while ordering. Q: I ordered an attenuator with 60dB return loss but when I measured it my return losses are higher. Why? A: If you ordered an attenuator with 60dB return loss with connectors, the back reflection will depend on what grade of connector you selected for your fibers. Typically only angle polished (APC) style connectors will give the desired return losses. The device itself has 60dB return loss (i.e. if you cut off the connectors and measured the return loss you will see it above 60dB) but if you picked only ultra PC finish connectors you may only see from 50 to 55dB return losses. 4

42 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: High speed Wide reflectance range Low insertion loss High resolution Rugged and compact design Can be calibrated for dual wavelengths Wide wavelength range Wide range of connectors Polarization insensitive RS232 communications interface Low cost CE compliant DIGITAL VARIABLE REFLECTOR Applications: Bit error rate testing Troubleshooting receivers and other active fiber optic components Design of fiber optic transmitter/receiver circuitry Digital Variable Reflector Product Description: OZ Optics Digital Variable Reflector enables the user to generate a known level of return loss to evaluate system response. The unit allows testing the return loss sensitivity of devices such as laser diodes, transmitters, isolators and so on. By generating a precise reflection level, system performance (bit error rate, noise levels, isolator performance) can be evaluated. Our built-in calibration table accurately defines intermediate degrees of reflection from 2dB to as high as 60dB for different wavelengths. Digital reflectors are offered using either singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining (PM) fibers. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. Optional GPIB To RS-232 Converter For best results, the standard parts are designed to accept angled FC/PC connectors. Other connector types are possible with lower dynamic reflectance range. The device can be controlled remotely via an RS232 interface. An optional GPIB to RS232 converter is also available. A universal AC/DC power supply is included with all units, along with a North American power cord. Other types of power cords may be purchased separately. The Digital Variable Reflector can be provided with a custom built-in fused coupler which directs a fraction of the reflected light to a second optical connector on the unit. The user can use this signal for monitoring the reflected power, or determining the influence of reflected power on his device under test. Contact OZ Optics for details. DTS0008 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 04/02 1

43 Digital Variable Reflector: DR-100-X-W-a/b-F-LB XY = Connector Code : 3S= Super NTT-FC/PC 3U= Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC SC=SC SCA=Angled SC 8= AT&T-ST W = Wavelength in nm: 980, 1310, 1480,1550 and 1625 a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns. LB = Backreflection range: 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM fibers 60dB backreflection is available for 1310nm and 1550nm singlemode only with FC/APC connectors 35dB for multimode fibers F = Fiber type: M=Multimode S=Singlemode P= Polarization maintaining (PM) fiber Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: A customer would like to emulate the anticipated backreflection from different types of devices by using a variable reflector. If his system is operating at a wavelength of 980 nm and he is using an SCA connector, then he could order the following part to perform the required testing: Bar Code Part Number Description N/A DR-100-SCA-980-6/125-S-40 Singlemode Digital Variable Reflector with 40dB dynamic range calibrated at 980nm with angled SC connector. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): Q: What is a variable reflector used for? A: A variable reflector is useful for emulating the reflectance that normally occurs from all optical interfaces within fiber optic systems. This allows a designer to test a prototype quickly and easily to determine if its operation will be adversely affected by unexpected backreflection. Q: Can it be used at wavelengths for which it is not calibrated? A: Sometimes. Since the wavelength response of the Digital Variable Reflector is fairly flat, it can be used at other wavelengths without noticeable degradation, if the wavelength is within a few tens of nanometers of the calibrated values. If the wavelength is significantly different than the calibrated value, then the insertion losses will increase and the overall backreflection will deviate somewhat from the displayed value. Q: How do I get the unit calibrated? A: OZ Optics recommends that the unit be returned to the factory annually for calibration. Q: Why is the power rating for a multimode unit different than that of a singlemode unit? A: Singlemode units use a beam blocking technique that can handle significant power levels. Multimode units use a variable neutral density filter. The power handling of the multimode unit is limited by the power handling capabilities of the filter. Q: Why do singlemode devices use a different technique than multimode units? A: With singlemode units, the beam blocking technique is simple, repeatable, and cost effective. With multimode units, the fiber can support many different modes. These mode patterns tend to be susceptible to any changes in the fiber due to applied stresses or temperature variations. The beam blocking technique does not work well in such situations because it will not block all possible modes equally. Hence, a variable filter is used instead. Application Notes: If a coherent light source is used in an application where a variable reflector will also be used, then the user may observe the effects of constructive or destructive interference as the reflected light returns to the source. This may cause instabilities in the source or measurements that might or might not be a problem in a "real" application. There are a couple of ways of getting around this problem: 1. If possible, replace the source with a non-coherent source. LED sources are relatively non-coherent and may be used successfully in some situations, although their power output is generally less than that of a laser. 2. By inserting a spool of fiber between the system under test and the variable reflector, the coherence of the light will be greatly diminished. 3. Use a source with a built-in isolator to block any reflections before they reach the source. 4

44 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) DUAL WAVELENGTH LED SOURCE Features: Rugged, compact, lightweight, dual wavelength LED source 850, 1300, and 1550 nm wavelengths available Long term stability Low temperature dependence Selectable internal modulation for CW, 270 Hz, 1 khz, or 2 khz Auto power-down mode Push-and-hold power keys to prevent accidental activation Low battery indicator Long battery life May be operated from AC power mains with optional adaptor Dust caps attached to the case Low cost Applications: Installing and maintaining fiber optic networks Testing multimode fiber cables Testing passive optical components Verifying patchcord specifications Measuring insertion loss Calibrating optical receivers Laboratory research Dual LED Source Product Description: The OZ Optics Dual Wavelength LED Source consists of two sources in a single, lightweight package, and is ideal for multimode fiber testing. Either one of the two outputs can be activated from the front panel. The user interface is controlled by a microprocessor and the optical outputs are thermally stabilized. Indicator LEDs and simple keys on the front panel provide easy operation. Two LEDs indicate the wavelength. Three LEDs indicate the modulation frequency: 270 Hz, 1kHz, or 2 khz. When all of these three LEDs are off, the output is continuous. The front panel keys are used to select on, off, modulation, and wavelength. Figure 1: Stability Of Dual LED Source At 850 nm DTS0009 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 06/02 1

45 Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: 1. A customer in the USA needs an 850 and 1300 nm dual wavelength LED source, with FC/PC receptacles. He also wants an AC power supply adaptor. Bar Code Part Number Description DLEDS-850/3-1300/3 Dual LED Source with 850 and 1300 nm wavelengths, receptacles for Standard Flat, Super and Ultra NTT-FC/PC AC-5VDC-NA 5 VDC power supply adaptor, for North America. 2. A customer in Europe needs a 1300 and 1550 nm dual wavelength LED source, with an SC receptacle. He also wants an AC power supply adaptor. Bar Code Part Number Description DLEDS-1300/SC-1550/SC Dual LED Source with 1300 and 1550 nm wavelengths, SC receptacles AC-5VDC-EU 5 VDC power supply adaptor, for Europe. Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 5 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What are the wavelengths required for the LED sources? 2. What is required maximum output power of each LED source? 3. What type of receptacles are required for each LED source? Dual LED Source DLEDS-W 1 /X 1 -W 2 /X 2 W 1,W 2 = LED source wavelength in nm(w 1 < W 2 ): 850 = 850nm 1300 = 1300nm 1550 = 1550nm X 1,X 2 = Connector receptacle: 3 = Flat, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC 1.25U = Universal receptacle for 1.25 mm diameter ferrule connectors (MU, LC, etc.) 2.5U = Universal receptacle for 2.5 mm diameter ferrule connectors (FC, ST, SC, etc.) Contact OZ Optics Limited for custom requirements. Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: A customer in North America needs an 850/1300 nm dual wavelength LED source, with an ST receptacle on the 850nm source, and an FC connector on the 1300nm source. He also wants an AC adaptor. Bar Code Part Number Description N/A DLEDS-850/8-1300/3 Dual LED Source with an 850nm LED, ST receptacle, and a 1300nm source with a receptacle for Standard, Super, and Ultra NTT-FC/PC connectors AC-5VDC-NA 5 VDC power supply and adaptor for North America. 3

46 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED VARIABLE FIBER OPTIC ATTENUATOR Features Stepper motor driven High power handling High speed Wide attenuation range Low PDL and wavelength dependency Low insertion loss and backreflection High resolution Rugged and compact design Can be calibrated for up to five wavelengths Wide wavelength range Flat wavelength response Blocking attenuation technique for singlemode and polarization maintaining fibers, neutral density filter for multimode fiber applications Computer interface (-MC Version) Polarization maintaining fiber versions are available. Latching operation Custom designs available Low Cost Applications Active gain equalization in DWDM Systems Local power monitoring and feedback attenuator settings Bit error testing Trouble shooting receivers and other active fiber optic components Simulating long distance fiber transmission Design of fiber optic transmitter/receiver circuitry Power meter linearity checks Power setting and power control Product Description OZ Optics offers a complete line of low cost, compact PC board mountable motor driven variable attenuators with low backreflection. These attenuators offer excellent speed, repeatability, and accuracy. Singlemode and polarization maintaining (PM) attenuators utilize a novel blocking style attenuation technique, while multimode attenuators use a variable neutral density filter to minimize mode dependent losses. Both types feature a homing sensor to calibrate the attenuator, removing the need to use external taps, and a jam-proof tuning mechanism. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. Motor Driven Variable Attenuator OEM Motorized Attenuator Loopback Style Motorized Attenuator The PC version uses a reliable stepper motor that can be controlled by an external driver. The basic model provides the user direct access to the stepper motor, as well as a logic level output for HOME position information. The -DR option adds a high speed driver circuit that accepts four logic level inputs to control the stepper motor. Finally, the -MC option features an embedded microcontroller with a programmed calibration curve. The units are addressable and support RS232, SPI, or I²C communication protocols. At this time, electronically controlled miniature loopback models are available only in PC versions. The MC version attenuators are calibrated at the wavelength specified in the part number. If required, the attenuators can be calibrated for multiple wavelengths. Just specify them in the part number. The standard models utilize a stepped motor with a 485:1 antibacklash gear train. Other gear ratios are available to increase either the speed or resolution of the device. Keep in mind that choosing lower gear ratios to improve the speed will reduce the resolution of the device. OZ Optics can also customize the design to fit your needs. We have smaller and faster versions if lower resolution is acceptable. Please read our application notes on our website. Contact OZ Optics for detailed specifications. DTS0010 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 07/02 1

47 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 10 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is your application? 2. What is your operating wavelength? 3. What is the worst acceptable return loss? 4. What fiber type do you need? What length? 5. What connectors, if any, are you using? 6. Do you have size constraints? 7. Do you require an inline or loopback version? 8. Do you have specific speed or resolution requirements? Compared to a standard unit with a 485:1 gear ratio, either of characteristics can be improved at the expense of the other. 9. What voltage would you like to use to operate the motor? Most users choose 6 volts. 10. Do you want to design and build your own motor control circuitry, or do you want it built into the unit? 11. What optical power level will be used with the attenuator? 12. Will the fiber be subjected to handling once installed, or will it be undisturbed? A 3mm jacket is more rugged than a 900um jacket, but it takes up more space and is less flexible. Description Part Number Electrically Controlled Variable Fiber Optic Attenuator DD-N-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-G-V(-CI) 1 (-LL) 2 N = 100 for inline style 600 for standard size loopback style 650 for miniature size loopback style W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Standard Tables datasheet for other standard fiber sizes F = Fiber type: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining LB = Backreflection level: 40,50 or 60dB for SM & PM only. 60dB is available for 1300nm and 1550nm wavelengths only. 35dB for multimode applications is standard. X,Y = Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables datasheet for other connectors CI = Control Circuit PC for an OEM assembly without interface port DR for built in stepper motor drive electronics MC/SP for intelligent SPI interface MC/IIC for intelligent I 2 C interface MC/RS232 for intelligent RS-232 interface V = Motor supply voltage: 5,6 or 12 Volt G = Gear ratio: 485:1 for normal speed, 76:1 for fast speed. Other gear ratios are 141:1, 262:1, 900:1 L = Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7 JD = Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the OZ Standard Tables for other jacket sizes Note 1 Unless specified, the unit will be built as a basic version which provides a TTL compatible home signal. The DD-600 and DD-650 use the blocking style attenuation technique and are recommended only for singlemode or polarization maintaining applications. Note 2 Add LL to the part number for 0.6dB typical insertion losses for 60dB return loss, < 1dB for the rest of the attenuators. 5

48 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN POLARIZATION CONTROLLER-SCRAMBLER Features: Negligible insertion losses Negligible return losses Negligible Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL) >100Hz response speed Continuous polarization control capability Low voltage Applications: Polarization scrambling Polarization stabilization Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) mitigation Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) mitigation PDL and PMD Measurement Systems Interferometers and Sensors Electically Driven Polarization Controller-Scrambler Product Description: OZ Optics' Electrically Driven Polarization Controller (EPC) provides a simple, efficient means to manipulate the state of polarization within a singlemode fiber. Employing a novel mechanical fiber squeezing technique, the device is controlled by either three or four (depending on the model) input voltages that one varies over a ±5 volt range to provide endless polarization control in a robust, easy to operate package. The controller's rapid response speed easily handles changes in polarization caused by the external environment, and is highly suitable for polarization scrambling for either averaging PDL effects, or for making PMD or PDL measurements. Because the fiber within the device is continuous, all insertion losses, return losses, and PDL effects are limited only by the fiber itself. This makes it ideal for precise test and measurement applications. The polarization controller is available in either a three or four channel configuration. The three channel system is ideal for polarization scrambling applications such as for polarization averaging or PDL measurements. The added redundancy of the four channel version opens the way to continuous polarization control, without having to occasionally reset the device when a controller reaches its limit. The unique design of the OZ Optics Polarization Controller means that it does not require any dedicated driver circuitry. There are no internal voltage multipliers or high voltage signals to worry about. Thus operation is safe and simple. Note: All units are in inches. Figure 1: EPC Drawing DTS0011 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 03-Mar-05 1

49 Ordering Example For Standard Parts: A customer is building a polarization scrambler circuit for PDL testing at 1550 nm. He will use a three stage system with standard singlemode fiber, and FC connectors. Bar Code Part Number Description EPC /1550-9/125-S-3U3U-1-1 Three Channel Polarization Scrambler using standard Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber. The input and output fibers are one meter long, with 900 micron diameter loose tube jacketing, terminated with Ultra FC/PC connectors. Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics provides custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a one piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. DESCRIPTION Controller and Scrambling Unit PART NUMBER EPC-A-11-W-a/b-S-XY-JD-L-(C) A = 300 for 3 stage scrambler 400 for 4 stage controller W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers: Example: 1300/1550 for standard telecom wavelength range a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber. See standard tables for other standard fiber sizes XY = Connector code: X = No Connector 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST JD = Fiber jacket type: 1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket SC = SC SCU = Ultra SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC/PC See standard tables for other connectors (C) = Electrical interface connector Leave blank for DB-9 PH = 5-pin header BNC = Female BNC L = Fiber Length in meters, on each side of the device. If they are different lengths, specify the input and output lengths separated by a comma. Example: To order 1 meter of the fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. Are you performing polarization scrambling or polarization controlling? 2. What is your operating wavelength? 3. What type and size of fiber do you want? 4. What type of connectors do you need? 5. How long should the fibers be? 6. What is the fiber jacket OD? 7. What type of electrical interface do you need? Ordering Example For Custom Parts: A customer wants a 4-channel polarization controller for 1310 nm wavelength. He wants singlemode fibers, 1 meter long, 900 micron hytrel jacketing with FC/APC connectors and a 5-pin header electrical interface. He also wants an EPC driver with built-in RS232 for remote control. He needs to order the following part numbers: Bar Code Part Number Description n/a EPC /1550-9/125-S-3A3A-1-1-PH5 Four Channel Polarization Controllers with Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber. Input and output are 1 m long with 900 micron OD jacket terminated with angled FC connectors EPC-DRIVER-04-RS/232 4 Channel EPC Driver/Controller Box featuring a dual mode operation: controller mode and scrambler mode. DC voltage ranging from -5 to +5V, frequency settable from 1 to 100 Hz and maximum current of 100 ma per channel. Built-in RS-232 provided. 3

50 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) PRELIMINARY DATA SHEET ENVIRONMENTAL OPTICAL TEST SYSTEM Features: Long period testing capability for optical passive component reliability Multiple wavelength configurations Multiple channel configurations Optional swept wavelength capability Flexible and simple user interface Statistical measurement analysis Custom configuration designs available Optional Optical Return Loss (ORL) capability Optional Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) measurement capability Low cost Environmental Optical Test System Applications: DWDM channel testing Long term reliability testing on optical passive components Characterization of insertion loss versus wavelength dependence Optical return loss measurement Characterization of PDL dependence versus wavelength Product qualification as per Telcordia Quality Control Product Description: OZ Optics has developed an environmental multi channel optical test system allowing fast, low cost, simple and flexible long-term reliability testing. The system integrates an optimized optoelectronic design (including sources, optical switches and photo-detectors) and robust system management software. This system allows optical manufacturers to perform automated and flexible long-term testing for compliance with industry standards such as Telcordia generic requirements (GR-326-CORE, GR-1209-CORE and GR-1221-CORE). The meter offers the capability of characterizing very low insertion loss (IL) drift. It also offers the optional capability of measuring return loss and polarization dependent loss variations. Measurement capability using tunable sources can also be offered. The system can be run through any computer operating Windows TM. The management software has a built in database for data processing and statistical analysis of multiple sets of measurements. Collected data can be graphically displayed for easy interpretation. Remote configuration and operation of the unit is possible with the unit via a parallel printer port, a standard serial communication port (RS232) or General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). Ordering Information for Standard Parts: Bar Code Part Number Description EOTS U3U /125-S 24 channels, 1310 and 1550 nm dual source Environmental Optical Test System with Ultra FC/PC connector in both input and output ports EOTS U3U /125-S 12 channels, 1310 and 1550 nm dual source Environmental Optical Test System with Ultra FC/PC connector in both input and output ports 2736 Power Cord - UK Power Cord for the United Kingdom 2737 Power Cord Europe European Power Cord Windows is a trade mark of Microsoft Corporation DTS0012 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 04/02 1

51 EOTS-100-AA-XY-W 1 -W 2-9/125-S-(OPT) AA: Number of channels: 8, 12, 16, 24, 32 or 64 X,Y: Input & Output Receptacle Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC connector 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC connector 3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC SC=SC SCA=Angled SC MU= MU type connector LC= LC type connector. OPT: -BR for optional measurement capability (for 60dB ORL measurements, the connectors have to be angled FC/PC) -BR/PDL for optional ORL and PDL capability -PDL for Optional PDL capability Add -T for tunable wavelength source option W1,W2: Built in sources: 1310, 1550, Specify 0000 for external sources Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: A European optical passive component R&D facility wants to perform IL and PDL long-term reliability testing of Fiber Bragg Gratings across the C-band. Assuming they have their own programmable environmental chamber and a computer, they need to order these following parts: Bar Code Part Number Description NA EOTS U3U /125-S-PDL 24 channels, Environmental Optical Test System with Ultra FC/PC connector in both input and output ports, with an external wavelength selectable source across the C-band, a built-in 1550nm source and PDL measurement capability 2737 POWER CORD - Europe European power cord Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) Q: How many channels can be ordered in a single unit? A: 8,12,16,24, 32 or 64. Q: Can I order a custom system? A: Yes, the design is customer oriented in both software and hardware. Q: Can I use the system without an external computer? A: No, an external computer with a suitable Windows operating system is required to operate with the unit Q: Can we export saved data to another computer for data analysis? A: Yes, the data can be saved in text format so that it can be easily imported to a standard spreadsheet or statistical software. Q: Can I test a 1 by 4 device using a 24 channel system without cycling through all ports? A: Yes, a flexible user interface allows the system to be configured for a variety of operating conditions. Q: Can I use the test system with polarization maintaining or multimode fibers? A: Yes the system can be used with polarization maintaining fibers although it will not maintain polarization itself, but not for multimode fiber because the inputs have singlemode fibers Q: Can I use my own source for testing? A: The standard system is provided with built-in sources. Ask OZ about custom configurations. Q: Can I monitor other parameters, such as external voltages, temperature, humidity, etc.? A: No, these parameters are external to our system. However, if the environmental chamber can provide such parameters, the application software can be configured to monitor those parameters during the test. 3

52 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) ERBIUM-DOPED FIBER AMPLIFIER (EDFA) Features: Up to 28 dbm (700 mw) output power C-band, L-band and C+L-band models Near quantum-limited noise figure preamplifiers Wide selection of different type of amplifiers Optional RS232 or USB interface High performance-to-cost ratio Multi-Output Option-up to 4 ports Custom design flexibility Preliminary Applications: Analog and digital CATV optical transmission networks Long-Haul transmission Access Networks Instrumentation Research and Development Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier Product Description: Erbium-doped Fiber Amplifiers (EDFA) are devices which provide amplification to low-level optical signals. The Rack Mount EDFA series of high performance, low noise and high output power amplifiers provide the perfect opportunity to build a flexible CATV network system. These units include a wide selection of Boosters, Pre-amplifiers, In-Line, Mid-Stage access and Gain-Flattened amplifiers. These EDFAs are available in both single channel and DWDM configurations. Amplifiers are available to cover the C-band, L-band, or both the C & L bands together. A range of output powers are available. EDFAs are available with either a flattened spectral output for stringent applications, or a non-flattened response for less demanding or cost-sensitive applications. The user can control the optical gain to suit the application. Fiber amplifiers are connected to the system through input and output female connector receptacles. A variety of standard connector types are offered. Custom connectors can also be accommodated. A built-in microprocessor can be included for applications that require the amplifier to operate under computer control. Either RS-232 or USB interfaces are offered. DTS0107 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 22-Mar-05 1

53 Ordering Information For Standard Parts Bar Code Part Number Description TBD TBD Typical Specifications For C-band Amplifiers 1 P in = -4 dbm for Booster, Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm. P in determined per customer request at 1550 nm for Mid-access and Gain Flattened amplifiers 2 P in = -4 dbm for Booster, P in = -20 dbm for Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm. P in determined per customer request at 1550 nm for Mid-access and Gain Flattened amplifiers 3 P in = -20 dbm for Booster, P in = -30dBm for Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm. P in determined per customer request at 1550 nm for Mid-access and Gain Flattened amplifiers 4 Non-condensing OFA-1-B / N-3A-B-X OFA-1-B / N-3A-B-X Basic single output Optical Fiber Amplifier providing up to 12 dbm output power for the C band ( nm), in a bench top unit with angled FC/PC receptacles. The spectral response is not flattened. Universal power supply with North American power cord included. Other types of power cords available separately. Basic single output Optical Fiber Amplifier providing up to 28 dbm output power for the C band ( nm), in a bench top unit with FC receptacles. The spectral response is not flattened. Universal power supply with North American power cord included. Other types of power cords available separately POWER CORD - EUROPE Power cord for European 4mm round pin plug to IEC connection POWER CORD - UK Power cord for UK plug to IEC connection. Parameters Unit Booster amplifier Pre-amplifier In-Line amplifier Mid-access amplifier Gain-Flattened amplifier Saturated output power 1 dbm Operating wavelength range nm Noise figure 2 db <4.0 <3.2 <3.6 <4.5 <4.5 Small signal gain 3 db Up to 40 Up to 40 Up to Gain flatness db PDL (maximum) db PMD (maximum) ps Operating temperature range C 0 to to to to to +50 Storage temperature range C -40 to to to to to +80 Humidity 4 % 0 to 95 0 to 95 0 to 95 0 to 95 0 to 95 Typical Specifications For L-band Amplifiers Parameters Unit Booster amplifier Pre-amplifier In-Line amplifier 1 P in = -2 dbm for Booster, Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1590 nm. P in determined per customer request at 1590 nm for Mid-access and Gain Flattened amplifiers 2 P in = -2 dbm for Booster, P in = -20 dbm for Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1590 nm. P in determined per customer request at 1590 nm for Mid-access and Gain Flattened amplifiers 3 P in = -20 dbm for Booster, P in = -30dBm for Pre-amplifier and In-Line amplifiers at 1590 nm. P in determined per customer request at 1590 nm for Mid-access and Gain Flattened amplifiers 4 Non-condensing Mid-access amplifier Gain-Flattened amplifier Saturated output power 1 dbm Operating wavelength range nm Noise figure 2 db <5.5 <5.0 <5.5 <5.8 <5.5 Small signal gain 3 db Up to 30 Up to 24 Up to Gain flatness db PDL (maximum) db PMD (maximum) ps Operating temperature range C 0 to to to to to +50 Storage temperature range C -40 to to to to to +80 Humidity 4 % 0 to 95 0 to 95 0 to 95 0 to 95 0 to 95 2

54 Typical Specifications For C+L-band amplifiers Parameters Unit Booster amplifier In-Line amplifier Saturated output power 1 dbm Operating wavelength range nm & & Noise figure 2 db <6.0 <6.0 Small signal gain 3 db Up to 22 Up to 20 PDL (maximum) db PMD (maximum) ps Operating temperature range C 0 to to +50 Storage temperature range C -40 to to +80 Humidity 4 % 0 to 95 0 to 95 1 P in = -2 dbm at 1550nm and 1590 nm. 2 P in = -2 dbm for Booster, P in = -20 dbm for In-Line amplifiers at 1550 nm and 1590 nm. 3 P in = -20 dbm for Booster, P in = -30dBm for In-Line amplifiers at 1550nm and 1590 nm. 4 Non-condensing Ordering Examples For Standard Parts A customer needs to increase a nominal 10 µw signal to at least 100 µw before it reaches a detector circuit. The wavelength is 1550 nm. She can do this with the following part: Bar Code Part Number Description TBD OFA-1-B / N-3A-B-X Basic single output Optical Fiber Amplifier providing up to 12 dbm output power for the C band ( nm), in a bench top unit with angled FC/PC receptacles. The spectral response is not flattened. Universal power supply with North American power cord included. Other types of power cords available separately. 3

55 Questionnaire 1. What gain do you require? 2. How flat do you require the spectrum of the amplifier to be? 3. Do you require that the amplifier be remotely controllable? If yes, what sort of interface do you prefer? 4. What sort of amplifier do you need (booster, pre-amplifier, In-line amplifier or Mid-Span amplifier)? 5. What is your operating wavelength range? 6. What style of fiber connectors do you use? 7. Do you need more than one output? 8. What sort of enclosure do you prefer? Description Optical Fiber Amplifier Part Number OFA-N-C-P-W-S-F-X-O-I N C P W Number of Output Ports. Specify 1, 2 or 4. The input signal will be amplified and split amongst the output ports. Configuration: B = Booster P = Preamplifier L = In-line M = Mid-span Maximum Output Power in dbm: Specify a value between 12 and 28, corresponding to 12 and 28 dbm respectively Wavelength range: 1525/1570 = 1525 to 1570 nm 1540/1560 = 1540 to 1560 nm 1570/1605 = 1570 to 1605 nm 1525/1605 = 1525 to 1560 and 1570 to 1605 nm (Custom wavelength ranges are available. Contact OZ Optics with your specific requirements) I O X F Control interface: R = RS232 U = USB X = Not Applicable - ie. gain block version or basic version Options: A = Automatic gain control with microprocessor B = Basic version M = Microprocessor controlled. Receptacle style: 3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC MU = MU Flatness: N = Non-flattened F = Flattened S Packaging style: 1 = Bench top 2 = Rack mountable 3 = OEM module 4 = Gain Block - No electronics provided, user must provide pump driver 9 = Custom 4

56 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FARADAY ROTATORS AND MIRRORS PIGTAIL STYLE Features Singlemode,multimode and polarization maintaining versions available Wide range of center wavelengths Low loss Low back reflection Compact housing Applications Fiber lasers Interferometers sensors Amplifiers Circulators Product Description Faraday rotators change the polarization state of light traveling through it. The output polarization state is rotated by 45 degrees with respect to the input polarization. When combined with a mirror, the reflected light is rotated by another 45 degrees, resulting in a 90 degree rotation. In addition, the polarization handedness is reversed by the mirror. This results in a reflected polarization that is orthogonal to the original polarization. This is useful when used in interferometers, because polarization changes through the fiber are cancelled out on the return journey. Miniature Faraday Rotator Package For nm Faraday Mirror Package for nm 1.93 [49] 1.38 [35] 0.91 [23] Faraday Rotator Package For nm Ø 0.12 [3.1] Ø 0.19 [4.75] Ø 0.22 [5.5] Units are in inches [mm] Figure 1: Miniature Faraday Rotator Dimensions Faraday Rotator Package For nm [38.6] [20] Ø0.216 [5.5] Units are in inches [mm] Figure 2: Miniature Faraday Mirror Dimensions Faraday Rotator Package For nm DTS0013 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 1

57 Standard Product Specifications (Faraday Rotator-Mirror Standard Parts) Parameter Condition Units Value Center Wavelength nm Faraday Mirror Insertion Loss 1 Maximum db Typical db Low Loss (- 60 Loss) db N/A N/A Return Loss 1 db , 60 40, 60 2 Polarization Extinction Ratio 3 db , 25, Rotation Angle At center wavelength degrees 45 Rotation Tolerance At center wavelength,25 C degrees ±3 ±3 ±3 ±3 (±1) Does not include insertion losses, return losses from connectors. For Faraday mirrors, return losses refers to reflections from points other than the mirror itself. When using polarization maintaining fibers. Wavelength[nm] Wavelength[nm] 2

58 Ordering Example For Standard Parts A researcher is building a fiber interferometer wants a Faraday mirror for 1550 nm. She is using standard singlemode fiber with 3 mm cabling. To minimize losses and unwanted reflections, she requires the lowest loss units available. She will fusion splice the unit in her system so no connectors are required. Bar Code Part Number Description FOFM-11P /125-P-60-XX-3-1 Description Pigtail Style Faraday Rotator : Body sizes: 1 for standard size 2 for miniature size ( nm) Faraday Mirror for 1550 nm with 60dB return loss, and with a one meter long 3 mm OD kevlar reinforced PVC cabled 1550 nm 8/125 polarization maintaining fiber pigtail with no connector. Ordering Information For Custom Parts OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire 1. Are you looking for a rotator or a Faraday mirror? 2. What is the operating wavelength? 3. Do you need single mode or polarization maintaining fiber? 4. What is the minimum acceptable return loss? 5. What is the maximum acceptable insertion loss? 6. Do you need connectors on the fibers? If yes, what type? 7. What type of fiber cabling do you prefer? 8. How long should the fibers be? Part Number FOR-11P-W-a/b-I-O-LB-XY-JD-L Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SMF See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes. Input Fiber: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining Output Fiber: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining Backreflection Level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB 60dB is available for 1300 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths only. Special charges apply for other wavelengths. Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device. Example: to order 1 meter of fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7. Fiber Jacket Type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other jacket sizes. Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors. Pigtail Style Faraday Mirror: FOFM-11P-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) Fiber length in meters Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SMF See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes. Input Fiber: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining Backreflection Level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB 60dB is available for 1300 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths only. Special charges apply for other wavelengths. Fiber Jacket Type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other jacket sizes. Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors. 4

59 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features Low insertion loss Miniature packages High power handling Wide wavelength range Low cross talk Center wavelengths 1310,1480,1550 nm Low return loss High extinction ratio High isolation Singlemode and polarization maintaining fiber versions available Applications DWDM networks Chromatic dispersion compensation Optical add drop modules (OADM) Fiber amplifiers Fiber sensors Product Description Fiber optic circulators act as signal routers, transmitting light from an input fiber to an output fiber, but directing light that returns along that output fiber to a third port. They perform a similar function as an isolator, protecting the input fiber from return power, but also allowing the rejected light to be employed. OZ Optics fiber optic circulators are manufactured with polarization maintaining fibers making them ideal for polarization maintaining applications such as 40 Gbit systems or Raman pump applications. They are also used in double pass amplifiers and in chromatic dispersion compensation modules. The standard fiber alignment is for all power to be transmitted along the slow axis of each fiber. With OZ Optics modular design and custom manufacturing capabilities, any of the three ports can be aligned for fast axis coupling. High extinction ratio connectors can also be installed. Regardless of the state of FIBER OPTIC CIRCULATORS Standard Polarization Maintaining Circulator In-line Fiber Optic Circulator polarization of the return beam, the input fiber will still be isolated from reflected light. OZ Optics now offers miniature devices for OEM applications. Polarization independent circulators using singlemode fibers are also now available. Additional connector and cable options and custom designs are also available. Please forward a detailed description of your application requirements to the OZ Optics Sales Department. Figure 1: Standard Circulator Dimensions DTS Oct-04

60 Ordering Information For Custom Parts OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort, so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases, non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and minimum order quantities will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as posssible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts 1. What is your operating wavelength, in nm? 2. Do you prefer a standard or inline style package? 3. Are you using singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber? 4. What are the minimum return loss requirements? 5. How long should the fibers be and what fiber type? 6. Do you require connectors? If so, what type? 7. How much power will be transmitted through the fiber? Description Fiber Optic Circulator Part Number FOC-12P-11-a/b-PPP-W-LB-XYZ-JD- L Circulator Type: P for standard style N for miniature inline style Fiber Core/Cladding Sizes, in microns 7/125 for 1300 nm polarization maintaining fiber 8/125 for 1550 nm polarization maintaining fiber 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm singlemode fiber See Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard Tables for other standard fiber sizes Fiber Length in meters Fiber Jacket Type: 0.25 = 250 Micron OD acrylate jacket 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other jacket sizes Fiber Type: S for singlemode P for polarization maintaining Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) Backreflection Level: 40, 50 or 60dB Connector Code: 3 = NTT - FC/PC 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other connectors. Ordering Example For Custom Parts A customer is building a fiber laser, and is using a circulator to direct the input light and amplified return signal. The operating wavelength is 1550 nm, and uses polarization maintaining fiber. He wants a reconfigurable system, so he wants angled FC connectors on the fiber ends. He also wants 3 mm cable on the fibers as he wants rugged units that can withstand repeated handling. One meter long fibers are sufficient. Bar Code Part Number Description XXXXX FOC-12P-111-8/125-PPP A3A3A-3-1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) Polarization maintaining fiber optic circulator for 1550 nm with 60dB return loss, with 1 meter long, 3 mm OD cabled 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, with FC/APC connectors on all ends. Q. Can I use a polarization maintaining circulator with singlemode fiber? A. Not without seeing high insertion losses. The transmission through polarization maintaining circulators is highly polarization dependent. Only the return output port can be made using singlemode fiber without affecting performance. One alternative is to use an all-fiber polarization controller on the inputs to control the polarization through the unit. Otherwise, we recommend the miniature units. Q. Why do I get high losses? A. Check to see that you are launching light through the proper polarization axis of the proper fiber port. Q. Can I get a higher isolation or extinction ratio? A. OZ Optics can supply circulators with 25dB and 30dB extinction ratios and can make design modifications for higher isolation values. Please forward you system requirements for a proposal. Q. What happens to light polarized along the wrong axis? A. Fast axis light in port T is absorbed internally, as is fast axis light returning into the circulator. 3

61 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FIBER OPTIC MEDIA CONVERTERS Features Cost effective copper to fiber conversion Complies with IEEE and IEEE 802.3u Extends network span up to 2 km for LED sources and 40 Km for laser sources Diagnostic LEDs for troubleshooting and maintenance Auto MDI/MDI-X on UTP port 10/100 Mbps auto-negotiation Far-end fault detection and link fault pass-through Multiple power options, including AC/DC adaptor, USB power, or 5VDC Rack mount chassis available for most versions Plug and play for most versions Applications PRELIMINARY DATA SHEET Short haul communications High-speed data transfer Transmitting data through electrically noisy environments Secure optical links Network testing Fiber Optic Media Converter Product Description The OZ family of media converters enables the transformation from copper UTP media to fiber media. The auto-negotiation feature of these units allows these plug-and-play devices to be connected to either 10 or 100 Mbps fast Ethernet on the electrical side (10/100Base-TX), and 100 Mbps fiber (100Base-FX) on the optical side. LEDs display the status of the unit to simplify diagnostics and maintenance. The units can be powered by a variety of means, including AC/DC adaptor, USB port, or 5VDC input. Data transfer is achieved by a combination of switching and store-and-forward techniques. Fault pass-through capability is incorporated into every unit. Each unit may be used as a stand-alone device, or mounted into a chassis for applications requiring multiple data links. DTS0101 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 29-Oct-04 1

62 Questionnaire 1. How long is the optical fiber for the data link? 2. What type of fiber do you intend to use (core and cladding sizes)? 3. What type of optical connector do you require? Ordering Information for Parts Description Media Converter Part Number MC-T-F-RJ45-X (-W) T Type: 100 = Rack mountable, 1300 nm LED source 110 = Single port 1300 nm LED source 120 = Rack mountable, 1310 or 1550 nm laser W (option for T=120 only) -A = TX:1310 nm; RX:1550 nm -B = TX:1550 nm; RX:1310 nm F Fiber type: Description M = Multimode S = Singlemode Media Converter Chassis Part Number MCC - Y X Optical connector: VF45 = VF-45 TM SC = Duplex SC for T=100 or 110, Single SC for T=120 LC = Duplex LC ST = Duplex ST Y Number of channels Y = 10 for 10-slot chassis 16 for 16 slot chassis VF-45 is a trademark of 3M Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) Q: Can I use the units with either singlemode or multimode fiber? A: Since most of the units use LEDs, it is difficult to couple a useful amount of light into singlemode fibers, which have a much smaller core than multimode fibers. The MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A/B, however, uses a laser diode as the light source, and can be used with either 9/125 micron singlemode fiber or 50/125 micron multimode fiber. Q: Why does the MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A/B have a much greater range than the other devices? A: The MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A/B uses a laser diode as the source. Laser diodes produce a more intense beam than the LEDs used in the other devices. In addition, a greater percentage of the laser light can be coupled into the fiber, compared to an LED source. These two factors combine to give a greater useable range for the device. Q: Does the same model of media converter need to be used at each end of the fiber? A: No. Since standard protocols are used, the media converters do not have to be identical. Q: I have a MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A connected to each end of my optical cable, but I cannot establish communications through the cable. What is the problem? A: If you have a MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A at one end of the cable, then you should be using a MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-B at the other end. The MC-100-S-RJ45-SC-A transmits at 1310 and receives at Therefore the unit at the other end should transmit at 1550 and receive at

63 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FIBER PIGTAILED TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED LASER DIODE HOUSING FEATURES: Highly stable power output Highly stable wavelength Good coupling efficiency Low backreflection Wide wavelength range Singlemode, multimode, polarization maintaining fiber versions Adjustable output power Optional OEM laser diode and Peltier driver electronics Receptacle and pigtail versions Laser driver is externally TTL modulatable APPLICATIONS: Interferometric sensors Wavelength and power stabilized laser diode sources Long term stability measurements SPECIFICATIONS: Available Wavelengths: Backreflection: Connector Types: Extinction Ratio: Case Temperature Control Preset in the Factory: Optical Coupling Efficiency: nm -25, -40, -50, and -60dB NTT-FC/PC, Super NTT-FC/PC, Ultra NTT-FC/PC, Angled SC, Angled NTT-FC/PC, SC, AT&T-ST, SMA905, SMA906 20, 25, or 30dB for PM fiber From 15 C to 25 C to within ±0.1 C 30% - 60% in SM fiber 60% - 95% in MM fiber Laser Diode Driver Electronics (OEM Version): CW: Currents up to 120mA can be sourced in constant optical power (CW) mode. TTL: Currents up to 250mA can be sourced at frequencies up to 20MHz. Higher power versions are available. Contact OZ Optics for further information. Figure 1 Peltier Driver Electronics (OEM Version): Matching requirements for the unit in Figure 1 is 3 Amp, 5 Volt. Higher power versions are available. Contact OZ Optics for further information. 09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.

64 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: The laser diode housing consists of an emitter (either a laser diode, LED, or SLED), a Peltier cooler, heatsink, and coupling optics into the fiber. The Peltier controller and laser diode driver electronics are external to the housing. A current source is required for the Peltier cooler. Upon request, OZ Optics can provide a complete OEM turnkey laser diode housing with a laser diode driver and Peltier cooler controller electronics. The control electronics for the Peltier include a temperature sensor on the laser diode side, and on the heat sink side. External control and modulation signals use pigtailed BNC connectors. A special version of the unit comes with a blocking screw to control the light output. This allows the user to control the ouput power from the source without adjusting the source current. This ensures that the output wavelength from the source is as stable as possible. The laser diode housing shown in Figure 1 is designed for diodes with less than 150mW of optical power. Oz Optics manufactures housings for diodes with more than 150mW of optical power. Contact OZ Optics for further information. OZ Optics can also design customer specified complete laser diode to fiber delivery systems, including optical coupling mechanisms, fibers, collimators/focusers, driver electronics, and software. Contact OZ Optics for further information. ORDERING INFORMATION: Receptacle Style Housing: HULD-TX-W-F-P-M Receptacle Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 5 = SMA905 & = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other receptacle types Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) Modulation Technique: 1 = CW operation only 2 = TTL Modulation only 3 = Both CW and TTL Optical Output Power, in mw, from the fiber Fiber type: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining Pigtail Style Housing: LDPC-T1-W-a/b-F-BL-X-JD-L-P-M Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes Fiber type: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining Backreflection level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB. 60dB version available for 1300nm and 1550nm only Modulation Technique: 1 = CW operation only 2 = TTL Modulation only 3 = Both CW and TTL Optical Output Power, in mw, from the fiber Fiber length, in meters Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 OD Micron hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other jacket sizes Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 5 = SMA905 6 = SMA906 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connector types NOTES: Add -DR to the end of the part number to include Laser Diode Driver Electronics. Add -PC to the end of the part number to include Peltier Cooler Controller Electronics. Add -PS to the end of the part number to include a power supply. Add -LD to the end of the part number if the laser diode is to be supplied by OZ Optics. Add -BL to the end of the part number if a blocking screw is required. Contact OZ Optics for other versions.

65 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FIBER TERMINATORS Features: Low backreflection Compact size High reliability LOW COST! Applications: Fiber optic telecommunications Fiber amplifiers CATV systems Optical network equipment Fiber Terminators Specifications: Backreflection: > 50dB Connector type: Ultra FC, SC, ST or LC Wavelength range: 1300 nm to 1620 nm Power handling: Up to 1W Fiber type: Singlemode 9/125 Operating temperature: -20 ~ 75 C Storage temperature: -40 ~ 85 C Humidity: 95% RH Figure 1: SC Terminator Product Description: Fiber Optic Terminators are recommended for any fiber optic system with unused ports. Non - terminated ports may create unwanted backreflections that can degrade overall system performance. These terminators can be easily installed into panel mount receptacles to significantly reduce reflections from the fiber face. Terminators are available for FC, SC, LC and ST style connectors with Ultra polish grade. Figure 2: FC Terminator Ordering Informations For Standard Parts: Bar Code Part Number Description 3324 TER-3U Fiber Terminator for FC/UPC connectors 3325 TER-SCU Fiber Terminator for SC/UPC connectors TER-LCU Fiber Terminator for LC/UPC connectors TER-8U Fiber Terminator for ST/UPC connectors 10.0mm 29.4mm 20.0mm 5.60mm Figure 3: LC Terminator 5.60mm DTS0029 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 21-Feb-05 1

66 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FIBER TO PHOTODIODE COUPLERS OZ Optics provides packaging services of photodiodes at a low cost. Fiber to photodiode couplers are available for virtually any photodiode available, using either singlemode, multimode or polarization maintaining fiber. The coupler design is both rugged and flexible, allowing people to do their own alignment, if they desire. For OEM applications, miniature pigtail style fiber to photodiode couplers are available that do not use the tilt adjustment technique. These feature both a smaller size and lower cost. OZ Optics fiber to photodiode couplers come in three basic designs. The most common design consists of two baseplates, separated by a resilient O-ring. The photodiode is epoxied into one plate. The other plate contains the focusing optics and the connector for the input fiber. A focusing lens is used to focus the light from the fiber to a spot less than or equal to the size of the active area of the photodiode. Spot sizes of less than 10 microns in size can be achieved with this method, making it ideal for very high speed transmission rates. Utilizing Oz Optics patented tilt adjustment technique, the alignment between the photodiode and the coupling optics is adjusted until the maximum coupling efficiency is achieved. Typical coupling efficiency exceeds 80 percent for singlemode fibers, although this varies, depending on the fiber and photodiode characteristics. The tilt adjustment design is recommended for getting the best coupling efficiencies into very small surface area photodiodes. The second design does not have the tilt adjustment design built in. Instead, the fiber, lens and photodiode are glued into a single assembly. The third and final design uses no lens at all. The fiber is simply butted against the photodiode. Both of these designs are intended for OEM applications. For optimum coupling efficiency, stability, and minimum backreflection, we recommend using pigtail style fiber to photodiode couplers. These units have the fiber directly attached to the photodiode. A wide variety of fiber types are available from stock. They can be cabled with different cable sizes, and preterminated with different types of connectors. Metallized fibers and lenses, as well as soldering techniques, are available for photodiode couplers requiring hermetic sealing. 09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specification without prior notice.

67 ORDERING INFORMATION Part Number FPD-0X-W-F PFPD-11-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L FPD-2X-W-F PFPD-21-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L FPD-3X-W-F PFPD-31-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L Description Lens style fiber to photodiode coupler with a receptacle and tilt adjustment design. Lens style fiber pigtailed photodiode coupler using the tilt adjustment design. Lens style miniature fiber to photodiode coupler with a receptacle, without tilt adjustment. Lens style miniature fiber pigtailed photodiode coupler without tilt adjustment. Miniature fiber to photodiode coupler with a receptacle, without tilt adjustment or lens. Miniature fiber pigtailed photodiode coupler without tilt adjustment or lens. When ordering, please fax us your photodiode and fiber specifications. Add PD to the end of the part number if the photodiode is to be provided with the coupler by OZ Optics. Add PO to the end of the part number for Parts Only - if the customer is to do the alignment him/herself. Where: X is the connector receptacle type. For pigtail style photodiode couplers it refers to the male connector on the end of the fiber. (3 for NTT-FC compatible, 3S for Super FC, 3A for Angled PC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC connectors, X for unterminated fiber ends), W is the operating wavelength of the photodiode, in nm, a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters respectively, in microns, F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber), LB is the desired backreflection level for pigtail style fiber to photodiode couplers. (25, 40 or 60dB typically), JD is the fiber jacket type (0.25 or 0.4 for unjacketed fiber, 1 for 900 micron OD nylon jacketing or loose tubing, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube PVC cable), L is the length of fiber in meters. Example: A customer wants to pigtail a photodiode to a 9/125 singlemode fiber, to work at both 1300 and 1550nm. To minimize size he chooses the fiber to photodiode coupler without tilt adjustment, but including a lens to maximize coupling efficiency. The fiber is to be 0.5 meters long, with 900 micron nylon jacketing, and unterminated. OZ Optics part number: PFPD /1550-9/125-S-40-X-1-0.5

68 219 Westbrook Rd, Carp, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FIXED ATTENUATORS AND ATTENUATING FIBER PATCHCORD Features: Low backreflection Wide wavelength range Polarization insensitive Compact and rugged housings Wide range of connectors/receptacles Hybrid style attenuator uses attenuating fiber Attenuating fiber patchcords utilize a new patent pending technique. Not fusion splice. Mode independent multimode loopback attenuators Designed to meet Telcordia requirements Low cost Applications: Optical power equalization CATV, LAN, and telecommunications Test and measurement Channel balancing for WDM systems Receiver padding Optical transmission systems Product Description: OZ Optics line of low cost fixed attenuators are available in four different configurations (hybrid male to female, attenuating fiber patchcord, bulkhead receptacle and loopback) to best suit your particular application. Each configuration has its own strengths. The hybrid type is ideal for reducing the intensity of a signal just prior to going into a receiver. They are also available with different connector types on the input and output. The attenuating fiber patchcord is ideal for high power applications and can be easily installed into fiber splice enclosures. The receptacle style is ideal when two male connectors need to be mated with a fixed attenuator. Finally, the loopback style attenuator is intended for patch panel installations. The Attenuating Fiber Advantage: OZ Optics has recently enhanced its fixed attenuator product line by developing a new technology to precisely attenuate signals in fibers. This patent pending, fully automatable technique allows one to create fixed attenuators within any standard fiber, with low polarization dependent loss (PDL) and high power handling. The resultant attenuating fiber is physically identical in appearance and behaviour to the original fiber, allowing it to be used to build patchcords or male-female hybrid attenuators. As the process used does not require the manufacture of special fiber, fixed attenuators can be constructed in small batch quantities economically. At the same time the automation aspect of the techniques allows large quantity orders to be manufactured at a cost as low as a dollar per unit. Attenuating fiber can be made from either singlemode and polarization maintaining (PM) fiber. PM attenuating fiber Hybrid Male-Female Fixed Attenuator Attenuating Fiber Patchcord Receptacle Style Attenuator Loopback Style Attenuator DTS0030 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 17-Feb-05 1

69 Example 2: A customer needs to reduce by 5dB the signal power from a polarization maintaining fiber that has an angle FC/PC connector before it enters a receiver, which also has an angle FC receptacle. The signal wavelength is 1550 nm, and the power is in excess of 1 Watt. The OZ Optics bar code number and description of the attenuator for this application is as follows: Bar Code Part Number Description PFA-3A3A / P-5-HP High power inline 5dB fixed attenuator at 1550 nm with 0.5 meter long, 3 mm OD cabled, 8/125 micron PM fiber with FC/Angle PC connectors on both ends. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is your operating wavelength range? 2. Are you using polarization maintaining fiber? What type? 3. What level of attenuation do you require? 4. Do you need the ends of the fiber connectorized? What type of connector do you need? 5. How long should each end of the fiber be? 6. Do you need the fiber cabled? What cable size do you need? 7. What is the power level of your application? Ordering Information For Custom Parts OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 25 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Description Hybrid Style Fixed Attenuator: Part Number FA-300-XY-1300/1550-a/b-F-N-M1 X Y = Connector Code (X for male, Y for female end): 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC SCU = SC Ultra PC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC 8U = ST Ultra PC N = Patchcord Attenuation: 1 for 1dB 2 for 2dB for 20dB 25 for 25dB F = Fiber type: M=Multimode S=Singlemode a/b = Fiber core/cladding size in microns singlemode: 9/125 multimode: 50/125, 62.5/125 Note: Hybrid style attenuators with angled finishes must have matching style connectors one each end (i.e. Angled NTT-FC/PC to Angled NTT-FC/PC, not Angled NTT-FC/PC to Angled SC or Angled NTT-FC/PC to Ultra NTT-FC/PC Bulkhead Receptacle Style Fixed Attenuator: X = Receptacle Code: 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC SCU = SC Ultra 8U = ST Ultra Loopback Plug Style Fixed Attenuator: X = Connector Code: SCU = Ultra SC SCA = Angle SC 3U = Ultra FC 3A = Angled FC LC = Ultra W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) a/b = Fiber core/cladding size in microns singlemode: 9/125 multimode: 50/125, 62.5/125, or 100/140 FA-500-X-1300/1500-9/125-S-N FA-400-X-W-a/b-F-N N = Attenuation: 1 for 1dB 2 for 2dB for 20dB 25 for 25dB F = Fiber type: M=Multimode S=Singlemode N = Attenuation: 1 for 1dB 2 for 2dB for 20dB 25 for 25dB 4

70 Ordering Information For Custom Parts - continued Description Part Number Fiber Patchcord Inline Fixed Attenuator: PFA-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-F-N Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) Fiber Core/Cladding size, in microns: 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for other standard fiber sizes Fiber Jacket Type: 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other jacket sizes Patchcord Attenuation: 1 for 1dB 2 for 2dB for 20dB 25 for 25dB Fiber type: M = Multimode S = Singlemode Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device. Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7 Note: Add -(HP) to the end of the part number for attenuated high power patchcord style. Ordering Examples for Custom Parts 1. A customer needs a mode independent Loopback 10dB attenuator at 1300 nm for a multimode application. Core/cladding size should be 50/125: and requires SC connectors. OZ part number will be: FA /125-M A 20dB inline fixed attenuator is required for 9/125 singlemode fiber, with an operating wavelength of 1300 nm. The input connector is to be a male angled FC connector, while the output connector is a male SC connector. Fiber length 2 meters on each side. OZ part number will be: PFA-3ASC / S A customer needs 12dB attenuation between the patchcord and the receiver. This patchcord has an LC male connected while the receiver has a female LC receptacle. Working wavelength is C band. Then customer should order: PFA-300-LCLC- 1300/1550-9/ S-M1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) Q: Is the patchcord style attenuator a good choice for multimode applications? A: The plug type or loopback type are better choices. The patchcord style uses a high loss splice. It will attenuate high order modes more than low order modes. Therefore the attenuation will depend on the launch conditions. Q: Will I see the same attenuation with the patchcord attenuators at both 1300 nm and 1550 nm? A: No. Because the mode field diameter is different for the different wavelengths, there is over 10% variation in the attenuation in db with the change in wavelength. Application Notes: Example 1: Power Equalization in Optical Networks: A network installer often has to lower system powers in a complex network so that each receiver sees the optimum signal strength without being overloaded. To do this properly, the optical power from each fiber should be measured just before entering the corresponding receiver. The required attenuation can then be calculated for each channel, and the corresponding attenuator can be selected and installed. For instance, if each receiver is designed to work with between 0.5 mw (-3dBm) and 1 mw (0dBm) of optical power, and fiber one emits 20 mw (+13dBm), while fiber two emits 50 mw (+17dBm), then a 15dB attenuator can be used on fiber one, while a 20dB attenuator can be used for fiber two. The installer simply installs the matching plug style attenuator before each receiver. Example 2: Patch Panel Attenuator Arrays: Patch panels are ideal locations for installing attenuation fiber patchcords. Quite often one needs to attenuate the incoming signals from many fibers entering a hub, in order to equalize the signals. Attenuating fiber patchcords provide a convenient means of introducing a fixed attenuation level in a fiber line, neatly arranged in a patch panel enclosure. In contrast, using hybrid male-to-female fixed attenuators requires using an additional fiber patchcord as well, adding complexity to the system, and potentialy increasing the chances of failure at a node. Fiber Patchcord Hybrid Attenuator Attenuating Fiber Patchcord Replace This... With This 5

71 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FIXED FILTERS Features: Narrow Line Widths Rugged and Compact Size Removable Filter Holder Designs Wide Wavelength Range Singlemode, Polarization Maintaining, and Multimode Fiber Versions Expanded Beam Technology LOW COST! Applications: Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing CATV, LAN and Telecommunications Use Test and Measurement Pigtail Style Fixed Filter Product Description: Fixed filters transmit or block specific wavelengths of light as they travel through the optical fiber. Light from the input fiber is first collimated and passed through the filter. The beam is then focused into the output fiber. Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width at Half Maximum (FWHM). The standard filters used have a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. Other filter designs are available. For instance, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. Please contact OZ Optics for custom filter designs. Miniature Pigtail Style Fixed Filter Fixed filters using singlemode, multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are offered. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. Removable Filters Figure 1: Pigtail Style Fixed Filter (FF-11 Series) Figure 2: Pigtail Style Fixed Filter with (RFF-11 Series) Removable Filter DTS0031 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 08/02 1

72 Fixed Filter FF-1A-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-LW FF = Body Type: FF for fixed filters RFF for removable fixed filters A = Filter Size 1 for standard size 2 for miniature pigtail size a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in µm 9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber 7/125 for 1300nm PANDA style PM fiber F = M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining LB=Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM fibers only. (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength ranges only) 35dB for multimode fibers LW =Filter line width in nanometers. For flat top filters add "F" to the line width. L = Fiber length, in meters JD = X,Y = Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable 3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC 8=AT&T-ST SC=SC SCA=Angled SC LC=LC LCA=Angled LC MU=MU X=No Connector Notes: 1 Only available for pigtail style non-removable filters Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: A 0.8nm line width filter with a flat top profile is needed for nm, to transmit light at a specific channel in the ITU grid, while blocking spurious noise in a neighboring channel. Size is critical, so the customer needs the miniature style fixed filters. Return loss is not critical. The customer wants to use standard singlemode fiber pigtails, 1 mm jacketing, no connectors, each one meter long. Part number and description are as follows: Part Number FF /125-S-40-XX F Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): Description Pigtail style fixed filter for nm, with 1 meter long, 1mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 40 db return loss, no connectors and 0.8nm FWHM flat top profile filter. Q: What is a Fabry-Perot filter? Are there other types available? A: A Fabry-Perot filter has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. This shape is known as a Lorentz profile. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. By adjusting the spacer thickness one can adjust the pass bandwidth of the filter. Other shapes of filters are available. For instance, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. For more information on what custom filters are available please contact OZ Optics. Q: How do you define your linewidths? A: Standard filters are specified by their Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). This the transmitted linewidth at -3dB from the peak transmission. For custom filters linewidths such as the passband at -0.3dB and -25dB can be specified. Q: Is the shape of the transmission curve affected by polarization? A: No, OZ Optics tunable filters utilize an optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This design reduces PDL to minimal levels, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. Q: How well does the filter block unwanted wavelengths? A: For standard single cavity Fabry Perot filters the typical linewidth at -20dB is roughly 10 times the FWHM linewidth. This type of filter is good for selecting specific channels in a DWDM system or cleaning up the ASE noise from a broadband source. The filter may transmit light at specific wavelengths significantly outside the operating wavelength range. For custom applications requiring different out-of-band isolation please contact OZ Optics. Q: What linewidth do I need in a 200GHz DWDM system? 100GHz? 50GHz? A: Typical linewidths associated with these frequencies are 1.2, 0.8 and 0.3nm respectively. This ultimately depends on the channel width and isolation levels required for the system in question. OZ Optics can work with you to build the filter that best suites your requirements. 3

73 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FIXED NEUTRAL DENSITY ATTENUATORS EXPANDED BEAM STYLE Features: Mode Independent Attenuation Level Rugged and Compact Size Pigtail and Receptacle Styles Removable Filter Versions Wide Wavelength Range Singlemode, Polarization Maintaining, and Multimode Fiber Versions Expanded Beam Technology for flexible design Low Cost Applications: CATV, LAN and Telecommunications use Receiver Padding Test and Measurement Optical Power Equalization Research & Design Product Description: OZ Optics line of expanded beam style neutral density fixed attenuators are ideal for multimode applications and for applications where attenuating fibers are not available or usable. These attenuators provide mode independent fixed attenuation when used with multimode fibers. The insertion losses will not depend on how the light is launched into the fiber. This is a significant advantange over other attenuator designs. The attenuators consist of a set of collimating and focusing optics and a central baseplate containing the filter. They can be ordered in receptacle or pigtail styles. The expanded beam design permits higher power handling than plug style attenuators. The filters themselves can be either permanent or removable. This provides great flexibility for experimentation. Pigtail Style Fixed Attenuator Figure 1: Fiber Pigtailed Neutral Density Fixed Attenuators Removable Filter Style Attenuator Figure 2: Fiber Pigtailed Style Neutral Density Removable Filter Attenuators Figure 3: Receptacle Style Fixed Attenuators with Neutral Density Filter DTS0032 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 03/02 1

74 Standard Product Specification: Version Pigtail Style Receptacle Style Fixed Filter Removable Filter Fixed Filter Removable Filter Attenuation 5dB to 30dB, 5dB increments Return Loss 40dB for Singlemode or PM Fibers, 35dB for 14dB (Multimode offered only) multimode Available Wavelengths nm Attenuator Diameter 0.79 (20mm) 1.31 (33mm) 0.79 (20mm) 1.31 (33mm) Filter size for N/A 12.7mm diameter x N/A 12.7mm diameter x removable filters 3mm thick 3mm thick Questionnaire: 1. What is the power level of your application? 2. What is the operating wavelength? 3. Do you need a removable filter? 4. What fiber size are you using? Ordering Information Custom Parts: Receptacle Style: Body Type: ND for non-removable filters RND for removable filters Connector Code: 3 = Flat, Super or Ultra FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables for other connectors ND-200-XY-W-a/b-F-N Attenuation: 5 for 5dB 10 for 10dB 15 for 15dB 20 for 20dB 25 for 25dB Fiber type: M = Multimode Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Standard Tables for other standard fiber sizes Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) Pigtail Style: ND-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-N Body Type: ND for non-removable filters RND for removable filters Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SMF See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Standard Tables for other standard fiber sizes Fiber type: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining Backreflection level (Return Loss): 40 db for Singlemode and PM 35dB for multimode Attenuation: 5 for 5dB 10 for 10dB 15 for 15dB 20 for 20dB 25 for 25dB Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7 Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the OZ Standard Tables for other jacket sizes Fiber Connectors X = No Connector 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC MU = MU See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables for other connectors 2

75 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FUSED COUPLERS FIBER OPTIC Fused couplers are used to split optical signals between two fibers, or to combine optical signals from two fibers into one fiber. They are constructed by fusing and tapering two fibers together. This method provides a simple, rugged, and compact method of splitting and combining optical signals. Typical excess losses are as low as 0.2dB, while splitting ratios are accurate to within ±5 percent at the design wavelength. The devices are bidirectional, and offer low backreflection. The technique is best suited to singlemode and multimode couplers. Fused couplers do suffer from some disadvantages. Multimode fused couplers are mode dependent. Certain modes within one fiber are transferred to the second fiber, while other modes are not. As a result, the splitting ratio will depend on what modes are excited within the fiber. The couplers are optimized for a uniform distribution of modes within the fiber known as an equilibrium mode field distribution, (EMD). This condition is met by using an incoherent source, such as an LED, or by using a mode scrambler, to mix up the modes traveling through the fiber. It is also achieved by sending the signal through a long length of fiber, before it enters the coupler. Singlemode fused couplers only transmit one mode, so they do not suffer from mode dependency. However, they are highly wavelength dependent. A difference in wavelength of only 10nm can cause a significant change in the splitting ratio. As a result it is important to specify the exact wavelength at which the fused coupler will be used. Finally, fused couplers made from polarization maintaining fiber do not maintain polarization well at the fusion point, making them sensitive to temperature or vibration. As a result they are not well suited for polarization applications. If any of the above problems are of concern to you, then you should instead consider using an OZ Optics Fiber Optic Beam Splitter/Combiner, which uses hybrid micro-optics. Refer to the data sheet entitled Fiber Optic Beam Splitters/Combiners. OZ Optics fused couplers are available in a range of wavelengths, fiber sizes, and splitting ratios. The fiber ends can be terminated with a variety of fiber connectors. Standard configurations are One-by-Two and Two-by- Two couplers. N by M fused couplers, such as one by three, or one-by 4, etc., are also available on request. SPECIFICATIONS: Standard Wavelengths: 488nm, 514nm, 633nm, 830nm, nm, and nm for single-mode fused couplers. Other wavelengths are available on request. Multimode couplers are broadband in nature. Their operating range is 400nm to 1600nm. Fiber Sizes: Singlemode: 3.5/125 for 488nm and 514nm couplers, 4/125 for 633nm, 5/125 for 830nm, and 9/125 for 1300nm and 1550nm. Multimode: 50/125, 62.5/125 and 100/140 size fibers. Excess Loss: <0.3dB for 1300nm and 1550nm couplers. <0.5dB for 830nm couplers. <1.0dB for wavelengths between 480nm and 700nm. Directivity: 50dB or better. Splitting Ratio Accuracy: Within ±3% for 850nm, 1300nm, and 1550nm wavelengths. Within ±5% for wavelengths between 480nm and 850nm. Temperature Range: -40 C to +85 C DTS0033 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 23-Feb-05

76 ORDERING INFORMATION: Part Number FUSED-12-W-a/b-S/R-XYZ-JD-L FUSED-22-W-a/b-S/R-XYZT-JD-L Description One-by-Two Fused Coupler Two-by-Two Fused Coupler Where: X,Y,Z,T are the input and output male connector types (3 for NTT-FC compatible, 3S for Super FC/PC, 3A for Angled PC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC connectors, and X for unterminated fiber ends), W is the operating wavelength in nm (Standard wavelengths are 488nm, 514nm, 633nm, 830nm, 1300nm and 1550nm), a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters respectively, in microns, S/R is the desired splitting ratio (50/50 splitting is standard), JD is the fiber jacket type (3 for 3mm OD loose tube kevlar reinforced PVC cable is standard.), L is the fiber length in meters. The standard fiber length is 0.5m per side. Contact OZ Optics for availability on other lengths. Example: The customer requires a singlemode two-by-two 50/50 coupler for 633nm (fiber core size is 4/125 for 633nm singlemode fiber). All ends are to be 0.5 meters long, cabled, and terminated with FC style connectors. OZ Optics' part number: FUSED /125-50/ Note: OZ Optics reserves the right to substitute a two-by-two coupler for the equivalent one-by two splitter, depending on availability. This will not affect the couplers performance or pricing. The only difference will be an extra input fiber on the coupler.

77 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features Wide dynamic range Wide wavelength range Interchangeable optical connectors available Long battery lifetime, up to 300 hours Powered by rechargeable battery or AC adaptor RS-232 interface for computer control Protective rubber boot Built-in backlight CE compliant Low cost HAND HELD OPTICAL POWER METER Applications Fiber optic assembling and testing Quality control and measurement Network installation Component and system troubleshooting Education General optical power measurement POM-300 Optical Power Meter Product Description The OZ Optics POM-300 offers a high-resolution optical power meter with a wide dynamic range covering a broad spectrum of wavelengths. A user-friendly keypad and easy-to-read back-lit display makes it well suited to most user applications. Extremely low power consumption allows extended operation in the field. Alternatively, the AC adaptor may be used, either directly, or to recharge the internal battery. The POM-300 can accommodate a variety of standard, interchangeable screw-in receptacles. Power levels as high as +10 dbm or as low as -75 dbm can be easily measured, with the values displayed in watts or dbm. Relative measurements can be displayed in db. The wavelength can be selected in increments of 10 nm, or set to a specific value, within 1 nm. Through the keypad and liquid crystal display, the user can configure various modes of operation and format the displayed measurements. Alternatively, using the RS232 serial interface, the POM-300 can be controlled by a host PC using a series of simple commands. DTS0103 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 14-Jan

78 Questionnaire: 1. What is the wavelength range that you need? 2. What is the maximum power level that you need to measure? 3. What is the minimum power level that you need to measure? 4. What type of optical receptacle do you need? 5. Do you need to be able to control the power meter from a computer? Ordering Information for Custom Parts Description Optical Power Meter Part Number POM-300-W W: Wavelength range: IR = infrared, 800 to 1650 nm VIS = visible, 440 to 900 nm Description Optical receptacle Part Number POM-300-R-X X: Receptacle style: 3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC MU = MU 1.25U = Universal adaptor for 1.25 mm diameter ferrules 2.5U = Universal adaptor for 2.5 mm diameter ferrules Ordering Examples for Custom Parts: A customer needs to measure optical power from a system operating at 650 nm, which has an LC connector on the end of a fiber. He can do this by ordering the following parts: Part Number POM-300-VIS POM-300-R-LC Description Hand Held Optical Power Meter with silicon detector and battery, for 440nm - 900nm wavelengths, -65dBm to 10dBm measurement range. Measurements are in watts/dbm/db with 4 or 5-digit display. Receptacle is not included. Interchangeable LC/PC receptacle for POM-300 Optical Power Meter Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) Q: I need to measure a noisy signal. Can I do this? A: Yes. The POM-300 allows the user to set the length of an averaging queue, which will filter much of the noise to provide a steady average reading. Q: I need to make measurements in a fairly dark room. Does the POM-300 have a backlit display? A: Yes. The backlight can be easily turned on or off. It can also be set to automatically turn off after a user-selectable time period has passed. Q: How long will the rechargeable battery last between charges? A: The POM-300 can be run for up to 300 hours on a single charge. Using the backlight continuously will increase the power consumption and drain the battery faster. For maximum battery life, the backlight should only be turned on when it is required. 3

79 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: Unique connector design minimizes thermal damage Multimode, singlemode, and polarization maintaining fiber types Operating wavelengths from 200nm to 2000nm 2 micron to 1500 micron diameter core sizes Low and high numerical aperture fibers Anti-reflection coatings available Armored cabling for maximum safety HIGH POWER FIBER OPTIC PATCHCORDS Applications: Materials processing Laser cutting and welding High power spectroscopy Non-linear optics Laser surgery Light detection and ranging (LIDAR) Product Description: OZ Optics produces fiber optic patchcords specifically for high power applications. These patchcords feature special high power fibers, carefully prepared fiber endfaces, and specially designed fiber optic connectors to ensure maximum power handling for your application. High Power Patchcords In standard connectors the fibers are glued into place, and the fiber is polished flush with the connector surface. When used with high power lasers, heat generated at the tip of the fiber causes the surrounding epoxy to break down and give off gases. These gases in turn burn onto the tip of the fiber, causing catastrophic damage to the fiber and perhaps the entire system. Our connectors feature an air-gap design, where the fiber extends into free space by 1.1mm to 1.5mm, providing an epoxy-free region where thermal energy can be safely dissipated without burning the surrounding material. Standard connectors based on SMA 905 and FC connector designs are offered. A unique feature of the FC connector design is that it features Adjustable Focus. A special connector allows one to adjust the distance the ferrule and fiber protrudes from the FC connector housing. This allows one to precisely position the fiber tip in free space, making it ideal for laser to fiber coupling. High Power SMA Connector In addition to patchcords, OZ Optics features high power laser to fiber delivery systems, optimized to work with our patchcords for maximum laser coupling. Our engineers have extensive working knowledge with both continuous output (CW) and pulsed laser applications, and can help you select the best system for your application. Contact OZ Optics for further assistance. High Power Adjustable Focus FC Connector DTS0037 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 01-Oct

80 Key Focus Adjustment Strain Relief Fiber Ferrule Motion Nut 1.1mm Figure 1: High Power SMA Connector Design Protected Fiber Focus Lock Figure 2: High Power Adjustable Focus FC Connector Design Ordering Information for Standard Parts: Bar Code Part Number Description QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-200/ meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 200/240 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends QMMJ-5HP5HP-UVVIS-200/240-3AS-4 4 meter long, 3mm OD stainless steel armored cabled, 200/240 high powered multimode UVVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-400/ meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 400/430 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-550/ meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 550/600 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends QMMJ-5HP5HP-UVVIS-550/ meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 400/430 high powered multimode UVVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-940/1000-3AS-1 1 meter long, 3mm OD stainless steel armored cabled, 940/1000 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends QMMJ-A3HP3S-UVVIS-25/ meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, UVVIS 25/125 MM fiber patchcord, terminated with an adjustable high power air gap FC/PC connector on one end and with a super FC/PC connector on the other end. Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: A customer needs a high power patchcord to transmit 150 Watts of light with a 1064nm wavelength. Reviewing table 5 of the standard tables shows that there is a fiber with a 550 micron core, 600 micron cladding that can handle up to 230 Watts of power. Because the fiber is a large core multimode fiber he elects to use high power SMA connectors. The patchcord can be any length or cable type. Bar Code Part Number Description QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-550/ meter long, 3mm OD PVC cabled, 550/600 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with High Power Air Gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends. 2

81 Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What wavelength of light will you be transmitting through the fiber? 2. Are you working with a pulsed or continuous source? 3. If continuous, what is the output power from your source, in watts? 4. If pulsed, what are the pulse energies (in mj), pulse duration (in nsec), and repetition rate? 5. Do you need multimode, singlemode, or polarization maintaining fiber? 6. If multimode, do you need graded index or step index fiber? 7. What fiber core/cladding size do you prefer? 8. What should the numerical aperture of the fiber be? 9. How long should the patchcord be, in meters? 10. What type of connectors do you need on each end? 11. What type of cabling do you need? Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Description High Power Fiber Optic Patchcord F = Fiber Type: QM = High power multimode fiber QS = High power singlemode fiber QP = High power polarization maintaining fiber X,Y = Input and Output Connector Types: 5HP = High power SMA 905 A3HP = High power adjustable FC X = No connector See table 6 of the standard tables for other connector types W = Wavelength in nm: See tables 1 and 2 of the standard tables for standard singlemode and PM fiber operating wavelengths. For multimode fibers specify either IRVIS for visible and infrared applications ( nm), or UVVIS for ultraviolet and visible applications ( nm). Part Number FMJ - XY - W - a/b - JD - L-(A) A = Alignment (Polarization maintaining patchcords only) 0 = unaligned and rotatable 1 = slow axis of the fiber aligned with respect to the key and locked L = Patchcord length, in meters JD = Jacket Diameter 3 = 3mm OD PVC loose tube with Kevlar 3A = 3mm OD armored 3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel armored 5A = 5mm OD armored 5AS = 5mm OD stainless steel armored See table 7 of the standard tables for drawings a/b = Fiber core and cladding diameters, in microns: See tables 1 to 5 of the standard tables for standard fiber sizes. Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: A customer needs a high power patchcord to transmit 20 Watts of light at a 1064nm wavelength. He requires the smallest available fiber with a numerical aperture of 0.22 or lower that will transmit this much power. Reviewing table 5 of the standard tables shows that there is a fiber with a 200 micron core, 240 micron cladding that can handle up to 30 Watts of power. Because the fiber is a large core multimode fiber he elects to use high power SMA connectors. The patchcord needs to be 5 meters long, with 3mm diameter stainless steel armored cable for protection. Part Number QMMJ-5HP5HP-IRVIS-200/240-3AS-5 Description 5 meter long, 3mm OD stainless steel armored cabled 200/240 high powered multimode IRVIS fiber patchcord, terminated with high power air gap SMA 905 connectors on both ends. 3

82 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) HIGH POWER LASER TO FIBER COUPLERS WITH TEMPERATURE CONTROL FEATURES: Very High Power Handling High Resolution Wide Range of Lenses Rugged, Stable Design Built-In Peltier Cooler and Fan Temperature Sensor and Safety Interlock APPLICATIONS: Laser Welding and Cutting And Marking Medical, Chemical, and Pharmaceutical Sensors High Power Laser Physics High Power Spectroscopy OEM Laser Systems SPECIFICATIONS: Coupling Efficiency: Typically >55% for singlemode and polarization maintaining fibers, >80% for multimode fibers Backreflection: -14dB for receptacle style couplers using flat finish connectors -60dB for receptacle style couplers using angle finish connectors -40dB or -60dB for pigtailed source couplers Polarization Extinction Ratio: >20dB 25dB, 30dB versions are also available Available Wavelengths: nm Power Handling: Up to 5 Watts CW for singlemode applications Over 100 Watts CW for multimode applications. Contact OZ for Pulsed Laser power handling specifications ORDERING INFORMATION: Receptacle Code: 3 for FC, Super FC or Ultra FC 3A for Angled FC/PC 3AF for Flat Angled FC 5 for SMA for AT&T-ST 8U for Ultra AT&T-ST SC for SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other connectors. Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 633 for 633nm) Add - DR to the part number if a TE driver is required. Add - PS to the part number if a Power Supply is required. HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH-TE Laser Head Adaptor: 1 for 1-32TPI Male Threaded Adaptor 2 for Disk Adaptor with 4 holes on a 1 square 11 for Post Mount Adaptor See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for other adaptors. Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 for Non- Contact couplers with receptacles in the Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes Fiber Type: M for Multimode S for Singlemode P for Polarization Maintaining 09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.

83 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) HIGH POWER MULTI-MODE INDUSTRIAL DIODE LASERS Features Up to 90 W output power CW and pulsed operation Top-hat output profile Built-in red aiming beam option Compact, air cooled package Maintenance free operation Pump laser diodes with lifetimes > 200,000 hours High electrical-to-optical efficiency RS232, USB, or analog control interfaces Hight performance-to-cost ratio Custom design flexibility Applications Heat treatment Plastic welding Cutting Drilling and trimming Soldering Laser pumping Medicine Preliminary High Power Multi-Mode Industrial Diode Laser Our Diode Laser Sources (DLS) consist of a series of single-emitter laser diodes combined into a single delivery fiber to provide up to 90 watts of CW laser light through a multimode fiber. Available as either a turnkey, stand-alone system, or as an OEM module, these sources deliver a beam directly to the work site through a metal-shielded multi-mode fiber cable terminated by a standard connector. Optional collimators and focuser accessories convert the output from the fiber into either a collimated beam or focused spot. Output beam diameters as large as 10 mm can be provided, while focuser spots as small as 100 microns can be produced with working distances as long as 100 mm for convenient use. A built-in red aiming laser diode can be added as an option, allowing one to easily aim the beam to the desired target. The output light immediately exiting the fiber has a round top-hat beam profile, which provides uniform heat distribution. The all-fiber configuration of these sources provides a robust, monolithic design with no optical parts to align or stabilize, no need for maintenance parts or materials, and the ability to operate under high shock, vibration and dusty conditions. These laser systems are completely sealed and will provide high performance and reliability. Systems include RS-232 or USB communication interfaces as well as analog signals to allow users to easily integrate the fiber laser into their setup. They require only standard wall plug power line and will operate immediately. OEM modules offer analog control of the laser power, pump laser diode currents and temperature. DTS0111 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 26-May-05 1

84 Standard Product Specifications: Mode of operation 1 Parameters Unit Value Nominal output power W 4-90 Peak wavelength nm 915±10 or 975±10 Output power control % Long term output power stability 1Can be 100% amplitude modulated up to 50 khz, single shot, repetitively pulsed or externally TTL modulated 2Lasers can be provided as either an OEM module, a bench-top unit or in a 19" rack-mountable case CW <2% over 5 Hours Emission linewidth (FWHM) nm <10 Pump laser diode lifetimes hours >40,000 standard, >200,000 optional Output fiber type 550/600 micron core/cladding, 0.22 NA standard. Other sizes, numerical apertures, available on request. Output fiber length m Operating voltage (AC) V 100/120 or 200/ or 60 Hz Dimensions 2 mm TBD Weight kg TBD Cooling forced air Operating Temperature C +5 to +45 Storage Temperature C -30 to +70 Humidity % 5 to 95, non-condensing Safety Features: Feature Error interlock input Remote stop Remote warning out Front panel key switch Power on indicator Emission indicator Error Indicator Description Disables the laser operation when open, requiring a restart to restore operation. Disables laser operation when open, without requiring a restart to restore operation. Normally closed, opens if either the error interlock or remote stop inputs are opened Key is required to turn on the laser Indicates that the source is turned on. Indicates laser light is being emitted by the unit. On when laser output has been disabled by any internal or external error condition. Ordering information: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In certain cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. 2

85 Questionnaire: 1. What is your preferred operating wavelength? 2. What are your minimum optical power requirements? 3. What package style do you prefer? Rack mount or a bench top unit? 4. What sort of connector do you want on the output fiber? 5. What are your needs with respect to fiber type, length, and connector? 6. What sort of control interface will you use? 7. Do you need to collimate or focus the light from the fiber? Description Diode Laser Source Part Number DLS-N-W-a/b-M-X-JD-L-P-I N = Package style 1 for Bench Top unit 2 for 19" Rack mount 3 for OEM Module W = Output Wavelength, in nm 915 for 915 ± 10 nm 975 for 975 ± 10 nm a/b = fiber size: Core/cladding diameters, in microns 550/600 is standard 200/240, 365/400, and 940/1000 options available X = Connector Type: 5HP for High Power SMA Connector A5HPM for mechanically cleaved high power air-gap SMA Connector A5HPL for laser conditioned high power air-gap SMA Connector Note: Contact OZ for information on available collimator and focuser options. I = Control Interface R = RS232 U = USB A = Analog Control P = Maximum output power, in Watts L = Fiber length, in meters 1 meter is standard JD = Jacket Size 3AS (3mm OD stainless steel armored cable) standard. See table 7 of the standard tables for other jacket sizes. Standard Accessories: Bar Code Part Name Description 2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord 2736 POWER CORD - UK UK power cord 3

86 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) HIGH POWER PULSED FIBER SOURCES Features Peak powers up to 20 kw Average output power from 20 mw to 2 W Output wavelengths of 1.07 µm or 1.55 µm Adjustable pulse durations, repetition rates Gaussian beam profiles Compact, air cooled package Maintenance free operation High electrical-to-optical efficiency RS232, USB, or analog control interfaces High performance-to-cost ratio Custom design flexibility Applications Spectroscopy Lidar Range finding Nonlinear Optics Free-Space communication Material processing R&D Preliminary Pulsed Fiber Source in OEM Module Package OZ Optics' Pulsed Fiber Sources (PFS) are a series of compact turnkey systems or OEM modules based on a highly reliable masteroscillator/power-amplifier (MOPA) design, to deliver multi-kilowatt level peak powers with average output powers of up to 2 W. The all-fiber configuration provides a robust, monolithic design with no optical parts to align or stabilize, and no need for maintenance parts or materials. The sources can operate under high shock, vibration, or dusty conditions. PFS systems have RS 232 or analog interfaces, to allow you to integrate them into your setup. Standard Product Specifications: 1 Other output powers available Parameters Unit Value Average output power 1 W 0.02 to 2 Peak power kw Up to 20 Wavelength range 2 nm or Pulse width (FWHM) ns 5 to 100 Repetition rate khz Up to 100 Data input 2 Other wavelengths near 1 µm, 1.5 µm or 2 µm are available, with different specifications. Standard TTL level input Operating voltage: (AC or DC) V 100/120 or 200/240, 50 or 60 Hz AC or +5 to +28 DC Dimensions mm TBD Weight kg TBD Cooling Method forced air Operating Temperature C 0 to +50 Storage Temperature C -30 to +70 Operating Humidity % 5 to 95, non-condensing DTS0109 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 26-May-05 1

87 Safety Features: Feature Error interlock input Remote stop Remote warning out Front panel key switch Power on indicator Emission indicator Error Indicator Packaging Options: All PFS units can be supplied in either a bench top unit, a 19" rack-mount case, or OEM module. Mil-Spec watertight electrical interface connectors are available for OEM modules. Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In certain cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is your preferred operating wavelength? 2. What are your minimum optical power requirements? 3. What requirements do you have with regards to pulse duration and repetition rate? 4. What package style do you prefer? Rack mount or an OEM module? 5. What sort of connector do you want on the output fiber? 6. What sort of control interface will you use? 7. What is the available supply voltage? Description Pulsed Fiber Source Description Disables the laser operation when open, requiring a restart to restore operation. Disables laser operation when open, without requiring a restart to restore operation. Normally closed, opens if either the error interlock or remote stop inputs are opened Key is required to turn on the laser Indicates that the source is turned on. Indicates laser light is being emitted by the unit. On when laser output has been disabled by any internal or external error condition. Part Number PFS-N-W-a/b-F-X-JD-L-P-PW-R-I N = Package style 1 for Bench Top unit 2 for 19" Rack mount 3 for OEM Module W = Output Wavelength, in microns 1.0 for µm 1.5 for µm a/b = fiber size: Core/cladding diameters, in microns 6/125 for 1 micron wavelengths 9/125 for singlemode fiber at 1.5µm wavelengths 8/125 for PM fiber at 1.5µm wavelengths F = Fiber type: S = singlemode fiber P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber X = Connector Type: 3S = Super FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/PC 5 = SMA 905 SC = SC SCA = Angled SC E = E2000 EA = Angled E2000 See table 6 of the standard tables for other connector types. Standard Accessories: Bar Code Part Name Description 2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord 2736 POWER CORD - UK UK power cord I = Control Interface R = RS232 U = USB A = Analog Control R = Repetition rate in khz PW = Pulse width in ns P = Maximum average output power, in milliwatts L = Fiber length, in meters 1 meter is standard JD = Jacket Size 3AS (3mm OD stainless steel armored cable) standard. See table 7 of the standard tables for other jacket sizes. Note: Contact OZ for information on available collimator and focuser options. 2

88 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) HIGH POWER SINGLEMODE INDUSTRIAL Yb FIBER LASER Features Up to 50 W output power Nearly perfect Gaussian Beam quality 1040 to 1100 nm fixed wavelength Compact, air cooled package Maintenance free operation Pump laser diodes feature lifetimes > 200,000 hours High electrical-to-optical efficiency RS232, USB, or analog control interfaces Linear output polarization optional High performance-to-cost ratio Custom design flexibility Applications Marking Micromachining Precision cutting and welding Drilling and trimming High resolution soldering Non-linear converter pumping Graphic imaging Preliminary High Power Singlemode Fiber Laser Module OZ Optics offers a series of compact, diode-pumped single-mode Ytterbium Fiber Lasers (YFL) in either a turnkey system or as an OEM module, capable of providing up to 50 W of CW near diffraction limited (M 2 < 1.1) 1.08 um laser light. The YFL fiber laser delivers a beam directly to the work site through a metalshielded singlemode fiber cable terminated by a standard connector. Optional collimators and focuser accessories convert the output from the fiber into either a collimated beam or focused spot. Collimated beam diameters can range from 0.3 mm to over 7.5 mm, while focusers can produce circular spots as small as a few microns in diameter, with long working distances to the work piece. The all-fiber configuration of these sources provides a robust, monolithic design with no optical parts to align or stabilize, no need for maintenance parts or materials, and the ability to operate under high shock, vibration and dusty conditions. The laser systems have a very high reliability which can not be achieved by other solid state or gas laser systems. YFL systems have RS-232, USB, or analog interfaces to allow you to integrate them easily into your setup. They require only standard wall plug electrical power and activate immediately. YFL modules provide analog outputs for monitoring laser power, pump laser diode currents, and operating temperature. DTS0110 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 26-May-05 1

89 Standard Product Specifications: Mode of operation 1 Parameters Unit Value Nominal output power W 1-50 Peak wavelength 2 nm Output power control % for <5 W modules for >5 W modules Long term output power stability <2% over 5 Hours Pump laser diode lifetimes hours >40,000 standard, >200,000 optional Output linewidth (FWHM) nm 1 Output polarization Random 3 Output fiber length m 1 standard custom Operating voltage (AC) V 100 to 120 or 200 to /60 Hz Dimension mm TBD 4 Weight kg TBD Cooling 1Can be 100% amplitude modulated up to 50 khz. Pulse mode emission available through TTL pulsed input. 2Other wavelengths near 1 µm, 1.5 µm or 2 µm are available, with different specifications. 3Linearly polarized versions using polarization maintaining fibers are available as an option. 4Lasers can be provided as either a bench-top unit or in a 19" rack-mountable case CW forced air Operating Temperature C +5 to +45 Storage Temperature C -30 to +70 Humidity % 5 to 95, non-condensing Safety Features: Feature Error interlock input Remote stop Remote warning out Front panel key switch Power on indicator Emission indicator Error Indicator Description Disables the laser operation when open, requiring a restart to restore operation. Disables laser operation when open, without requiring a restart to restore operation. Normally closed, opens if either the error interlock or remote stop inputs are opened Key is required to turn on the laser Indicates that the source is turned on. Indicates laser light is being emitted by the unit. On when laser output has been disabled by any internal or external error condition. Ordering information: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In certain cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. 2

90 Questionnaire: 1. What is your preferred operating wavelength? 2. What are your minimum optical power requirements? 3. What package style do you prefer? Rack mount or a bench top unit? 4. What sort of connector do you want on the output fiber? 5. What are your needs with respect to fiber type, length, and connector? 6. What sort of control interface will you use? 7. Do you need to collimate or focus the light from the fiber? Description Ytterbium Fiber Laser Part Number YFL-N-W-a/b-F-X-JD-L-P-I N = Package style 1 for Bench Top unit 2 for 19" Rack mount 3 for OEM Module W = Output Wavelength, in microns 1.0 for µm a/b = fiber size: Core/cladding diameters, in microns 6/125 for 1 micron wavelengths 9/125 for singlemode fiber at 1.5µm wavelengths 8/125 for PM fiber at 1.5µm wavelengths F = Fiber type: S = singlemode fiber P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber X = Connector Type: 3HP for High Power FC Connector A3HPM for mechanically cleaved high power air-gap FC Connector A3HPL for laser conditioned high power air-gap FC Connector I = Control Interface R = RS232 U = USB A = Analog Control P = Maximum output power, in watts L = Fiber length, in meters 1 meter is standard JD = Jacket Size 3AS (3mm OD stainless steel armored cable) standard. See table 7 of the standard tables for other jacket sizes. Note: Contact OZ for information on available collimator or focuser options Standard Accessories: Bar Code Part Name Description 2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord 2736 POWER CORD - UK UK power cord 3

91 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) INTELLIGENT TUNABLE LASER DIODE SOURCE Features: User tunable wavelength User controllable power level Excellent power and wavelength stability over wide operating temperature Very short warm-up time Serial port for computer control Small size, low cost Applications: DWDM network testing Component testing Instrument wavelength and power calibration General lab use PRELIMINARY DATA SHEET Product Description: The Tunable Laser Diode Source from OZ Optics is a compact optical source providing a user controllable wavelength and output power level. Using a unique temperature compensation system, the source is able to provide excellent stability in both wavelength and power. Unlike many sources that are accurate at only the calibration temperature, OZ Optics' tunable laser is designed to maintain high accuracy over a wide range of ambient temperatures. This makes it an ideal source for use in environments where the room temperature is not precisely controlled. Tunable Laser Diode Source Unlike conventional sources that may require half an hour to warm up, the unique design of this source allows the device to achieve stable operation within seconds of being turned on. This saves time and effort for technicians in the field or on the production floor. In DWDM applications, precise wavelength control is essential for obtaining accurate test measurements. With wavelength accuracy at the picometer level, the OZ tunable source is able to meet these demanding requirements. While the operating wavelength of most laser diodes is dependent on the current through the laser, the design of OZ Optics' tunable laser will automatically compensate for changes in output power to restore the wavelength to its desired value. DWDM applications for the metro marketplace require lasers operating at precise wavelengths in order to ensure that light intended for one channel does not interfere with adjacent channels. The precise wavelength control of the Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source allows one to replace an array of specific-wavelength sources with a single tunable source. By tuning the source, one can set the source to the specific channel required. OZ Optics also makes banks of 4 to 8 tunable laser modules for OEM applications. Each laser in a bank can be individually tuned to cover any of up to 10 channels (at 50 GHz spacing). Not only does the Tunable Source offer accurate wavelength control, it also provides excellent power level control and stability. Power level accuracy is better than 1%, over a wide range of temperatures and wavelengths, with stability of better than 0.01 db. With specifications like these, the Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source is well suited to countless applications where stability, accuracy, and reliability are required. For more information on tunable laser diode products, contact OZ Optics. DTS0090 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 02/20/04 1

92 Ordering Information For Standard Parts: Bar Code Part Number Description TL-100-3A D Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source with angled FC/APC connector, 1550nm center wavelength, ± 2 nm tuning range using a DFB laser, with 1 mw output power. Universal 110/220 volt AC/DC adapter with removable North American power cord included. (Other power cords are available separately. See below.) 4572 GPIB-RS232 RS232 to GPIB Adapter 4571 GPIB-CABLE-2 GPIB Cable, 2m long POWER CORD - UK POWER CORD for UK 2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE POWER CORD for Europe 8122 SMJ-3A3A-1300/1550-9/ meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 1300/1550nm 9/125 SM fiber patchcord, terminated with angled FC/PC connectors on both ends. Standard Product Specifications: Center Wavelength 1550 nm Wavelength Tuning Range ± 2 nm Wavelength Accuracy ± nm Wavelength Resolution nm Wavelength Response Time 30 (typical) Seconds, from minimum wavelength to maximum wavelength. Output Power 1 mw Power Dynamic Range 20 db Power Stability ± db Power Accuracy 5 % Power Resolution db Power Response Time 2 (typical) Seconds, from minimum specified power to maximum specified power. Connector Angled FC\APC Remote Communications Interface RS232 Power Requirements 120 to 240(@50-60 Hz) Volts. Universal AC/DC adaptor included. Operating Temperature Range 15 to 35 C Storage Temperature Range -30 to 60 C Warm up time Seconds. Limited by slew rate of wavelength. Seconds to stable power. Limited by boot-up time Dimensions 60 x 90 x 190 mm, including protective boot. Weight 0.5 kg Storage Humidity <90% RH, non-condensing 2

93 Ordering Information For Standard Parts: A customer in Europe wants to use a tunable laser in order to test the spectral characteristics of DWDM optical components at different wavelengths around 1550 nm. His test jig has an angled FC/PC connector. The power level must be adjustable over the range of 50 microwatts to 1 milliwatt. The customer would like to be able to use a tunable source directly, or operate it under computer control for automated testing. The standard Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source offered by OZ Optics will fulfill the requirements. In addition, the customer should order a power cord for use in Europe. He may also wish to order a patchcord to connect the source to his test jig. The complete list of parts that he would order is shown below: Bar Code Part Number Description TL-100-3A D Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source with angled FC/APC connector, 1550nm center wavelength, ± 2 nm tuning range using a DFB laser, with 1 mw output power. Universal 110/220 volt AC/DC adapter with removable North American power cord included POWER CORD - EUROPE POWER CORD for EUROPE 8122 SMJ-3A3A-1300/1550-9/ meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 1300/1550nm 9/125 SM fiber patchcord, terminated with angled FC/PC connectors on both ends. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is the desired center wavelength? 2. What is the required tuning range? 3. What is the maximum power required? 4. What is the minimum power that you require? 5. What type of optical receptacle do you need on the source? 6. What type of laser diode do you need? Ordering Information for Custom Parts: Description Part Number Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source TL-100-X-W-R-P-L X: Output Connector Codes: 3S=Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC 8=AT&T-ST SC=SC SCA=Angled SC LC=LC LCA=Angled LC W: Center Wavelength in nanometers: (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) L P R Type of Laser Diode: F=Fabry-Perot D=DFB (Distributed Feedback) (Recommended) Maximum Optical Power in milliwatts: (Example: 10 for 10 milliwatts.) Tuning Range in nanometers from the center wavelength: (Example: 1 for ± 1 nm range.) Ordering Examples for Custom Parts A customer in North America needs to test the wavelength sensitivity of some DWDM components over the range of 1532 nm to 1536 nm, at a power level in the range of 500 microwatts to 5 milliwatts. He requires an angled FC connector on his source. He can meet these requirements with the following: Part Number TL-100-3A D Description Tunable Laser Diode Source with angled FC/APC connector, 1534 center wavelength, ± 2 nm tuning range, with 5 mw output power. Universal 110/220 volt AC/DC adapter with removable North American power cord included. 3

94 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FIBER OPTIC ISOLATORS Isolators are optical devices that allow light to be transmitted in one direction only. They are most often used to prevent any light reflected back down the fiber from entering the source, thus preventing any feedback problems from occurring. The simplest type of isolator consists of a polarizer followed by a quarter wave plate. Such a device will block any simple reflections provided that the output polarization from the quarter wave plate is not modified by other optical elements. Unfortunately, this is rarely the case in fiber optic systems. A much better type of isolator uses polarizers with a Faraday rotator to block the return light. This type of isolator blocks all types of polarization, and thus makes a much higher quality isolator. This is the type of isolator used by OZ Optics. With this type of isolator, isolation levels of 35dB can be achieved for 514 to 1064nm wavelengths, and 42dB for 1300 and 1550nm wavelengths. Furthermore, isolation levels of 60dB can be achieved for 1300nm and 1550nm by cascading two isolators together. By using a patented tilt alignment technique, OZ Optics has solved the problem of using isolators with fibers. Input light from a laser, laser diode, or optical fiber is first collimated (if necessary), then transmitted through the isolator. A focusing lens on the output end of the isolator then couples the light into the output fiber. Because Faraday isolators use polarizers on the input end as well as the output end, the transmission level through the isolator depends on the input polarization. For maximum transmission, the input light should be linearly polarized, with the polarization axis aligned with the transmission axis of the polarizers. If the source is randomly polarized, then at least fifty percent of the light will be lost at the input. Because the transmission level through the isolator is polarization sensitive, one has to be careful when using singlemode fibers on the input end of the isolator. Singlemode fibers do not maintain polarization. Instead, if linearly polarized light is launched into singlemode fiber, then any bends or stresses in the fiber will change the output polarization state. This may cause intensity changes in the isolator output. There are four basic techniques to avoid this stability problem. The simplest technique is to attach the isolator directly onto the polarized source. This technique is the most cost effective. By eliminating the need for an input fiber in the system, the overall coupling efficiency will be greatest. A second technique is to use a polarization maintaining (PM) fiber between the isolator and the source instead of an ordinary singlemode fiber. To work properly, the polarization axis of the PM fiber must be aligned with both the polarization axis of the source and the polarization axis of the isolator. A third method is to use a polarization controller on the input end of the fiber, and change the input polarization state entering the fiber until the output transmission is maximized. Finally, one could use a polarization insensitive isolator, now offered by OZ Optics. This type of isolator uses a beam splitter to divide the light into two orthogonal polarizations. Each polarization is then sent through a separate isolator. The two output beams from the isolators are then recombined, and focused into the output fiber. This type of isolator is much more expensive than a standard isolator. Since the whole purpose of an isolator is to prevent reflected light from re-entering the source, it is important to minimize backreflection from the input end of the isolator. For this reason, we strongly recommend against using isolators with a female receptacle on the input end. The receptacle itself is a common source of backreflection. Instead, use fiber pigtails or angled connectors such as APC connectors at the input end.. In fiber to fiber pigtailed isolators, backreflections are reduced by polishing the fiber ends at an angle, and positioning them off-center with respect to the collimating lens axis. In laser diode to fiber isolators, it is done by positioning the diode off-center with respect to the collimating lens axis. This will cause the collimated output beam from the laser diode to emerge at a slight angle before entering the isolator. In both cases, the tilt adjustment technique is used to compensate for the offset on the input ends, thus ensuring minimum losses. 09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specification without prior notice.

95 OZ Optics can provide completely packaged isolator systems for different wavelengths. In addition, OZ Optics can provide components to allow the customer to do his own laser or laser diode packaging with an isolator. If the customer wishes to do this, then it is recommended that the customer purchases an alignment kit. This kit includes a centering lens, multimode fiber, and video instructions on how to package an isolator. Part number: ALIGN-0X SPECIFICATIONS: Isolation: Insertion Loss: Backreflection: Available Wavelengths: 35dB for 514 to 1064nm wavelengths. 42dB or 60dB for 1300nm and 1550nm. 42dB for polarization independent isolators. Typically 0.6dB plus isolator loss. Total loss is typically 1.2dB for 514 to 1064nm isolators, 0.8dB for 42dB 1300 or 1550nm isolators, and 1.4dB for 60dB cascaded 1300 or 1550nm isolators. Typically 40dB for pigtail style 42dB isolators. 60dB for pigtail style 60dB isolators nm. ORDERING INFORMATION: Part Number Description FOI-01-1X-W-a/b-F-LB-Y-JD-L-I Fiber isolator with a pigtailed fiber on the input, and a female receptacle on the output. FOI-02-0X-W-F-I Laser to fiber coupler with an isolator and an output female connector receptacle. FOI W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-I Pigtail style fiber to fiber isolator. FOPI W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-I Pigtail style fiber to fiber polarization independent isolator, with -45dB backreflection. FOI W-a/b-F-LB-Y-JD-L-I Pigtail style laser to fiber coupler with an isolator. ALIGN-0X Isolator alignment kit. It includes video instructions, centering lens, wrench, and a multimode jumper. Where: to X,Y are the connector receptacle types for connector style couplers with isolators. For pigtail style isolators, it refers the male connector on the fiber end (3 for NTT-FC, 3S for Super FC, 3A for Angled FC, 8 for AT&T-ST, etc.); W is the isolator operating wavelength in nm; F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber); I is the desired isolation level (35, 40, or 60dB. 60dB is available for 1300nm and 1550nm only); a/b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, respectively, in microns; JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3 mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A for 5mm armored cable); L is the fiber length in meters; LB is the backreflection for pigtail style isolators (40 or 60dB typically. 60dB is available for 1300 or 1550nm only). Ordering example: A customer wants a pigtail style fiber to fiber isolator for 1550nm, with better than 60 db backreflection. The input and output fibers are polarization maintaining fibers, cabled, and 1 meter long. The input fiber is terminated with an angled FC connector. The output fiber is terminated with a Super FC connector. OZ Optics part number: FOI /125-P-60-3A3S

96 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) LASER DIODE COLLIMATORS Laser diode collimators are used to collimate the highly divergent beam that is emitted by a laser diode. It consists of a laser diode holder, a collimating lens holder, and a high numerical aperture (NA) collimating lens, with a focal length f. The lens is housed in a threaded receptacle that is screwed into the collimating lens holder. By adjusting the distance between the laser diode and the collimating lens, one can collimate the laser diode output. The dimensions of the collimated beam is determined by two factors - the far field divergence angles θ and θ, of the laser diode being used, and the focal length of the collimating lens. The collimating beam dimensions are given by the equations BD = 2 f sin(θ /2) BD = 2 f sin(θ /2) Standard focal lengths include f = 1.6mm, 2.0mm, 2.6mm, 3.9mm, and 6.2mm. For information on the diode characteristics, consult the diode manufacturer for specifications. The light from a laser diode is not circularly symmetric. Instead, the output diverges more in one direction than in the perpendicular direction. As a result the output beam from the collimating lens will be elliptical in shape rather than circular. There are two main methods to correct this problem. The first is to add a cylindrical lens or anamorphic prism in front of the diode before collimating it. A second technique is to couple the light from the laser diode into a singlemode fiber and then collimate the output from the fiber. The fiber acts as a spatial filter, providing a near perfect Gaussian output. Both methods are shown in the figures at the bottom of this page. Contact OZ Optics for further information about these techniques. Laser diode collimators are available in different diameters. The standard diameter package is 0.79 inches in diameter. This size fits most diode types. A larger, 1.3 inch diameter housing, is used for large O.D. diodes, such as H1 packages. A 0.59" diameter housing is available for diode can sizes 9.0mm in diameter or smaller. Smaller housings with 10mm OD's are available for OEM applications. DTS0043 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 22-Feb-05

97 OZ Optics also offers special compact laser diode to fiber couplers for OEM applications. These packages have the diode and collimating lens permanently glued into the same housing. This package features a compact, rugged housing, at a significant reduction in cost. OZ Optics has in stock a selection of laser diodes. OZ Optics can also supply you with laser diode power supplies, that operate either from a battery or a DC voltage source. We can even provide you with complete miniaturized packaged systems. Contact OZ Optics for information on what is available. ORDERING INFORMATION: Note: When ordering, please specify what type of diode you wish to use, along with any diode characteristics that you know (Wavelength, output power, can size, emitter chip dimensions, divergence angles, distance between the chip and the window on the package, etc.) Part Number HULDO-11-W-f HULDO-31-W-f HULDO-41-W-f HULDO-51-W-f LDC-21 LDC-21A Description Laser diode collimator with 1.3" diameter flange. Laser diode collimator with 0.79" diameter flange. Laser diode collimator with 0.59" diameter flange. 10mm diameter single piece laser diode collimator. Collimating lens wrench for standard collimators. Collimating lens wrench for large lens collimators. Where: W is the operating wavelength in nm; f is the focal length of the collimating lens, in mm, and the lens type. GR denotes graded index lenses, while AS denotes aspheric lenses. Standard lenses are 1.6GR, 2.0AS, 2.6AS, 3.9AS and 6.2AS. Other focal lengths are available on request. Contact OZ Optics for details. Note: Add the term "-LD" to the part number if OZ Optics is to supply the laser diode. Add the term "-PS" to the end of the part number if OZ Optics is to also include a power supply. Example: A customer wants a laser diode collimator for a 670nm laser diode, using a 2mm focal length aspheric lens. The customer also wants the 0.79" package size. The customer is supplying the laser diode and the power supply. OZ Optics part number: HULDO AS

98 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) LASER DIODE POWER COMBINER OZ Optics introduces a new coupler designed to combine two polarized laser diode outputs into a single fiber. The output fiber can be singlemode, multimode or polarization maintaining fiber. Fiber-to-fiber polarization combiners / splitters are also available. The device utilizes a polarizing beam splitter in reverse, to act as a combiner. The laser diode outputs are collimated, and then attached onto the combiner. The collimated laser diode outputs are rotated until the maximum light comes out of the splitter / combiner output. The combined beam is then focused into the output fiber using OZ Optics' patented tilt adjustment technique. A second version of the power combiner utilizes a dichroic splitter instead of a polarization beam splitter to combine the diode beams. This method has the advantage that the polarization axes of the two diode beams can be oriented in the same direction. This is useful when one needs to launch the two input signals along the same axis of a polarization maintaining fiber. However, this method is only possible when the wavelengths of the two diodes differ by at least 40nm. Laser diode power combiners come in a small, rugged package and are available either with female receptacles to accept different connectors (NTT-FC, AT&T-ST, etc.), or pigtail style, with the fiber directly attached. Pigtail style combiners are recommended for optimum stability, minimum insertion losses, and low backreflection. Receptacle style systems are best suited for applications where the output coupler is used with a multimode fiber. If a receptacle style combiner is used with a singlemode fiber, then the user may have to adjust the alignment to maximize coupling efficiency. Receptacle style systems with better repeatability are available, but at the expense of lower coupling efficiencies. The coupling efficiency from each diode is about 75-90% for multimode fibers and 45%-55% for singlemode fibers. The typical backreflection level returning to the laser diode is -20dB. Backreflection levels of -25dB, -40dB, and -60dB are available for pigtail style combiners. This is accomplished by polishing the fibers at an angle and positioning the fiber off center with respect to the lens axis. For -60dB backreflection levels, the fiber ends are AR coated to reduce reflections. Applications include Erbium doped fiber amplifiers, coherent telecommunications and medical surgery. Oz Optics also supplies laser diode to fiber couplers with photodiodes. They are available in two configurations. In one setup, the photodiode acts as a monitor photodiode, measuring the reference power from the laser diode. The second setup instead uses the photodiode to detect light returning from the fiber. Such a setup is also known as an optical transceiver. 09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.

99 ORDERING INFORMATION: Part Number ULBS-11X-F-W-PBS ULBS-11P-a/b-F-W-PBS-LB-X-JD-L ULBS-12P-a/b-FD-W-S/R-LB-X-JD-L TRBS-12P-a/b-FD-W-S/R-LB-X-JD-L WDM-11X-F-W1/W2 WDM-11P-a/b-F-W1/W2-LB-X-JD-L Where: Description Laser diode polarization power combiner with an output connector receptacle. Pigtail style laser diode polarization power combiner. Laser diode to fiber coupler with a monitor photodiode. Laser diode transceiver module. Connector receptacle style laser diode power combiner with a dichroic splitter. Pigtail style laser diode power combiner using a dichroic splitter. X is the connector type for receptacle style combiners. For pigtail style combiners, they refer to the male connector on the fiber end (3 for NTT-FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST connectors, X for bare fiber, etc.), a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, respectively, in microns, W,W1,W2 are the diode wavelengths in nm, S/R is the desired split ratio (50/50 and 90/10 are standard) F is the output fiber type (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber), LB is the desired backreflection level (25dB, 40dB or 60dB for pigtail style systems only). JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube Kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A for 5mm OD armored cable.), L is the fiber length in meters. Example: A customer requires a pigtail style power combiner to combine the light from two 670nm laser diodes. The customer wants low (-40dB) backreflection back into the diodes. The output fiber is a two meter long, 3.0mm O.D kevlar cabled, 4/125 singlemode fiber, terminated with a male NTT-FC connector. OZ Optics' part number: ULBS-11P-4/125-S-670-PBS Example 2: A 90/10 beam splitter is used to split the signal from an 830nm laser diode. Ninety percent of the light is coupled into a 2 meter long, 3.0mm OD cabled PM fiber, terminated with an FC connector. The remaining 10 percent is reflected to a monitoring photodiode. The typical backreflection level is 25dB. In this manner, one can independently monitor the output power emmitted by the laser diode before it enters the fiber. Oz Optics part number: ULBS-12P-5/125-PD /

100 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) LASER DIODE SOURCE FIBER OPTIC (SINGLE OR MULTI-WAVELENGTH) Features: Single or multi-wavelength sources available Continuous wave (CW) and waveform modulation Wide range of connector receptacles available Optional output power adjustment Polarization-maintaining, singlemode, or multimode versions available Low battery indicator Rugged and compact design Low cost User selectable auto turn off mode Applications: Insertion loss measurement and attenuation measurement Fiber identification using internal modulated mode Splicing and connectorization testing End-to-end short link testing FTTX/PON Quality Assurance Multi-Wavelength Laser Diode Source Product Description: OZ Optics produces Fiber Optic Laser Diode Sources in a variety of wavelengths. The receptacle-style sources are offered with a wide range of receptacles, while the pigtail-style sources offer the choice of polarization maintaining, singlemode, or multimode fiber output. Each source has a low battery indicator on the front panel. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. The standard source provides continuous waveform output. It can also be pulse modulated internally at 270 Hz, 1 khz and 2 khz. As an option, OZ Optics can include a blocking-style optical attenuator to adjust the output power for the FOSS-01 and FOSS-11 models. This method of power control does not affect the spectral properties of the laser diode output. The FOSS-2N allows the user to select one of four preset power levels via the keypad. Single Wavelength Laser Diode Source with Patchcord OZ Optics recommends angled connectors for improved stability. For 1300nm and 1550nm wavelengths, an isolator can be added for improved stability. OZ Optics also manufactures the Highly Stable Laser Diode Source (HIFOSS), which includes a temperature controller and an isolator. See the Highly Stable Laser Diode Source data sheet for more information on this product. DTS0019 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 1

101 Standard Product Specifications: Parameter Specifications Model FOSS-2N FOSS-01 and FOSS-11 Available wavelengths1 For single wavelength - without isolator For single wavelength - with isolator For multi-wavelength - without isolator Wavelength accuracy 2 Linewidth2,3 Available receptacles Optical power 4 Optical power stability5 Without isolator With isolator Internal modulation 532, 635, 655, 670, 685, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm 1310, 1550 nm 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm ± 5 nm for 635 to 685 nm ± 15 nm for 780 to 1064 nm ± 20 nm for 1310 to 1625 nm 1.5 nm (Typical for 1550 nm) Super, Ultra and angled NTT-FC/PC, SC, angled SC, AT&T-ST, LC, MU, 2.5 mm ID Universal, and 1.25 mm ID Universal 0.8 to 1 mw (Standard, depending on wavelength and laser class) ± db (Typical) ± 0.05 db (Typical) CW, 270 Hz, 1 khz and 2 khz square wave Power supply Two AA alkaline batteries. Optional universal 110/220 V AC/DC adapter 7 9 V alkaline battery. Optional universal 110/220 V AC/DC adapter 7 Dimensions (W x L x H) 6 76 x 127 x 25.4 mm (3 x 5 x 1 in.) 72 x 110 x 25 mm (2.75 x 4.6 x 1 in.) Temperature Range Operating Storage -10 to +50 C -20 to +60 C Weight (including batteries) 225 g (0.5 lb.) 200 g (0.45 lb.) Laser classification based on IEC Class 1 Class 1, 2 or 3b -10 to +50 C -30 to +60 C, at 95% humidity, noncondensing Note: 1Typical wavelengths shown. For other wavelengths, please contact OZ Optics. 2Depends on Laser diode specification. 3For narrow linewidth, please contact OZ Optics. 4Higher power is available upon request. Please contact OZ Optics. 5Over 6 hours, at 23 C, after 30 minutes warm up, tested at 1550 nm with super FC/PC receptacle, 9/125 singlemode fiber. 6Dimensions and weight may change for special order. Does not include pouch and connectors. 7See Standard Parts for universal 110/220 V AC/DC adapter. Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: 1. A customer needs a 1550 nm laser diode source, with 1 mw output power, 9/125 µm core/cladding singlemode fiber with a super FC/PC receptacle. He wants an AC adaptor for North America as well. Bar Code Part Number Description 2836 FOSS-01-3S-9/ S-1 Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelength, 1 mw output, for 9/125 core/cladding, singlemode fiber, with super FC/PC receptacle AC-9VDC-NA Universal 110/220 VAC to 9 VDC power supply adaptor, for North America. 2. A customer wants a pigtail style 635 nm laser diode source, with 1mW output power. Fiber is 4/125 um core/cladding, singlemode, 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable, 1 meter long with super FC/PC connector. Bar Code Part Number Description 8772 FOSS-11-4/ S-1-3S-3-1 Pigtail-style Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 635 nm wavelength, 1 mw output. Fiber is singlemode, 4/125 core/cladding, 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable, 1 m long, with super FC/PC connector. 3

102 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is the wavelength required for the laser diode source? 2. What is required maximum output power of the laser diode source? 3. What type of fiber are you using? (SMF, MMF or PMF) 4. What model source do you need? If Receptacle style, what type? If Pigtail style, what it the fiber length, Jacket OD and connector type? Receptacle Style FOSS1 X = Receptacle or connector code:4 3S = Standard, Super, or Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC 8 = AT&T-ST LC = LC MU = MU 1.25U=Universal Receptacle for 1.25mm OD ferrule (LC, MU, etc.) 2.5U=Universal Receptacle for 2.5mm OD ferrule (FC, ST, SC, etc.) FOSS-01-X-a/b-W- F-1(-BL2) (-ISOL3) F = M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining W = Wavelength, in nm: 635, 650, 670, 685, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550,1625 a/b4 = Fiber core/cladding size, in µm 9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber 7/125 for 1300nm PANDA style PM fiber Pigtail Style FOSS1 a/b 4 = Fiber core/cladding size, in µm 9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber 7/125 for 1300nm PANDA style PM fiber W =Wavelength, in nm: 635, 650, 670, 685, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, 1625 F = Fiber type M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining FOSS-11-a/b-W-F-1-X-JD-L(-BL2) (-ISOL3) L = Fiber length, in meters JD = Fiber jacket type:4 1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable X = Receptacle or connector code:4 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC 8 = AT&T-ST LC = LC MU = MU Note: 1 Standard unit. For Highly Stable Laser Diode Source (HIFOSS), which includes TE cooler and an isolator, please see the Highly Stable Laser Diode Source data sheet. 2 Add -BL to the part number to add blocking style attenuator to the FOSS. 3 Add -ISOL to the part number to add an isolator (1310nm or 1550nm only. For other wavelengths, order HIFOSS with isolator and TE cooler). 4 See Standard Tables data sheet for fiber sizes, jacket sizes, and other connectors. 4

103 Description Single/Multiwavelength Receptacle Style Laser Diode Source N = Number of channels: 1 = Single Wavelength Source 2 = Dual Wavelength Source 3 = Triple Wavelength Source X = Connector type: 3S = Standard, Super, or Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC 8 = AT&T-ST LC = LC MU = MU 1.25U = Universal receptacle for 1.25 mm OD ferrule (LC, MU, etc.) 2.5U = Universal receptacle for 2.5 mm OD ferrule (FC, ST, SC, etc.) Part Number FOSS-2N-X-a/b-W-F-P P = Output Power in mw: (0.2 mw, 0.5 mw and 0.9 mw are standard for infrared wavelengths.) F = Fiber type: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining - Only available for single wavelength option. W = Wavelength, in nm: For single wavelength sources, the standard wavelengths are: 532, 635, 655, 670, 685, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1490, 1550, and 1625 nm. For other wavelengths, please contact OZ Optics Ltd. For multi-wavelength sources, the options are: 1310, 1490, 1550, and 1625 nm. For multiwavelength sources, specify each wavelength separated by a "/" (Example 1310/1550). Some combinations of wavelengths may not be available. a/b = Fiber core/cladding size in µm: 9/125 for 1300/1500 nm singlemode fiber. 8/125 for 1550 nm PANDA style PM fiber. 7/125 for 1300 nm PANDA style PM fiber (See tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data sheet for other values) Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: A customer needs a 1550 nm laser diode source, with 1mW output power and isolator, for 9/125 µm core/cladding singlemode fiber with super FC/PC receptacle. He wants the output power to be adjustable. Part Number FOSS-01-3S-9/ S-1-BL-ISOL Description Fiber Optic Stable Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelengths, 1 mw output, isolator and blocking attenuator, for 9/125 µm core/cladding singlemode fiber with super FC/PC receptacle. Ordering Examples for Custom Parts: A customer needs to verify the integrity of an optical network using 9/125 SM fiber at 1310, 1480, and 1550 nm. The network uses FC connectors. The customer would like to carry out the tests using 0.5 mw sources. He can do this by ordering the following part: Part Number FOSS-23-3S-9/ /1490/1550-S-0.5 Description Triple Wavelength Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 1310, 1490, and 1550 nm wavelengths, 0.5 mw output, for 9/125 µm core/cladding SM fiber with FC receptacle. Uses 2 AA batteries or optional AC adapter. 5

104 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) LASER DIODE TO FIBER COUPLERS OZ Optics offers a complete line of laser diode to fiber couplers, offering optimum coupling in a small, rugged package. They may be purchased prealigned, with the diode already in place, or as a kit that can be assembled by the customer using their own diode. The complete assembly procedure is quite straightforward, and can be done in less than twenty minutes. Assembly and operating instructions are available in a video cassette, showing the alignment process. The video is available in both North America and European (PAL) versions. In addition, a complete alignment kit is available, which includes the collimating wrench, multimode fiber assembly, centering lens, and video instructions. Diode source couplers are available for a variety of diode case sizes, and for diode wavelengths from less than 630nm to greater than 1550nm. These source couplers work with multimode, singlemode, and polarization maintaining fiber. Should the diode ever fail, it can be easily replaced while using the rest of the coupling optics. The source coupler can then be realigned for optimum coupling. This is one of the main advantages of using the OZ Optics tilt adjustment technique. There are two versions of tilt adjustable laser diode to fiber couplers; receptacle style couplers, and pigtail style couplers. Connector receptacle style couplers have a female receptacle, such as NTT-FC, or AT&T-ST, etc. at the output end. This allows the user to connect any optical fiber with a matching male connector to the diode. Pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers are also offered, with the fiber pigtailed directly onto the coupler. Pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers provide higher coupling efficiencies than receptacle style couplers, as well as better stability, and lower backreflection levels. The output fiber can also be terminated with different output connectors. Laser diode to fiber couplers are available in different diameters. The standard diameter package is 0.79 inches in diameter. This size fits most diode types, and is available for both receptacle style and pigtail style couplers. For the best coupling efficiencies choose the larger, 1.3 inch diameter housing, which supports larger and higher quality lenses. This housing size is also used with large diode case sizes, such as H1 package sizes. For pigtail style source couplers, a smaller 0.59" diameter housing is available for diode can sizes 9.0mm in diameter or smaller. For diodes with can diameters of 5.6mm or less, a miniature 0.5" diameter tilt adjustable housing is possible. One misconception about tilt adjustable laser diode couplers is the belief that the number of tilt and lockingscrews make the coupler sensitive to temperature 1 09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.

105 or vibration. In fact, tilt adjustable source couplers can be used over a temperature range of -25 C to 60 C, and have been vibration tested. Higher temperature versions are available on request. OZ Optics also offers a special, low cost, miniature pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers for OEM applications. These packages use just a single lens to couple light from the laser diode into the fiber. They do not use OZ Optics tilt adjustment technique. This package features a compact, rugged housing, at a significantly lower cost. The housing diameter is typically 10mm. Coupling efficiency into singlemode and multimode fibers is typically 10 percent and 35 percent, respectively. A variety of options are available for laser diode to fiber couplers. One such option is a coupler with a built in isolator. Isolators can reduce the effects of backreflection by up to 60dB. This is done by using coated optics and angled polished fibers. This is very useful for applications where the intensity and wavelength stability of the output light from the diode is critical. Self contained systems are available in both a pocket size casing, as well as a miniature pen size housing. Both receptacle style and pigtail style systems are available. OZ Optics can also provide fiber pigtailed collimators for your system. OZ Optics has in stock a selection of laser diodes. In addition we can package customer specified laser diodes. OZ Optics also provides laser diode power supplies and drivers, as well a thermoelectric Peltier coolers. Please refer to the Fiber Optic Stable Source & TE Cooled Laser Diode Housing Data Sheet. OPERATING PRINCIPLE Another option for laser diode to fiber couplers is a blocking screw to attenuate the output beam. This allows the user to precisely control the output power entering the fiber, without having to change the diode current. Another option is laser diode to fiber couplers with polarizer or polarization Rotator in the middle. Laser Diode to Fiber Coupler with Polarization Rotator in the middle LIGHT SOURCES OZ Optics also has available self contained laser diode to fiber delivery systems, with battery operated power supplies. AC to DC converters are also available. These systems provide a compact, portable source of light to attach to an optical fiber for test and measurement systems. They are used in a variety of applications, including fault detection, laser acupuncture, fluorescence measurements, etc. Laser diode to fiber couplers with tilt adjustment use a two stage process to couple light from the laser diode into the fiber. In the first stage, the output light from the diode is collimated with a collimating lens. The distance between the diode and the collimating lens is easily adjusted with a collimator wrench, then locked with a radial set screw. The collimated beam is then coupled into the fiber with a second lens, using OZ Optics' patented tilt alignment technique. The focal lengths of the collimating and coupling lenses are carefully selected to transform the optical properties of the laser diode light to match the mode field pattern of the fiber as closely as possible. Coupling efficiencies of over 50 percent into singlemode fiber, and 80 percent into multimode fibers, can be achieved with certain diodes with the correct choice of lenses. Coupling efficiencies into singlemode fibers better than 80% are possible with certain diodes by correcting the diode astigmatism and the ellipticity of the diode output with a miniature cylindrical type lens. Contact OZ Optics for further information about this technique. Before building a laser diode to fiber coupler, OZ Optics has to choose an appropriate lens combination to maximize coupling efficiency. To do so, we need to know the following laser diode characteristics: (1) Diode wavelength (2) Output power (3) Diode can size (4) Emitter dimensions (5) Far field divergence angles (6) Astigmatism. In addition, the diode selected should exhibit good pointing stability over time. 2

106 SPECIFICATIONS Coupling Efficiency: Backreflection levels: Wavelength range: Operating temperature: Output extinction ratios: 75% to 85% for multimode fibers, 35%-55% for singlemode (SM) or polarization maintaining (PM) fibers. Coupling efficiencies greater than 75% into SM or PM fibers are also possible for certain diodes. Typically -15dB for receptacle style versions, and either -25dB, -40dB, or -60dB for pigtail style versions. (-60dB is available for 1300nm and 1550nm only.) 600nm to 1600nm. -20 C to +60 C. Typically greater than 20dB for PM fibers. 30dB versions are available on request for 1300 and 1550nm only ORDERING INFORMATION When ordering laser diode to fiber couplers, please specify the laser diode characteristics (diode type, angular beam profile, housing dimensions, etc.). If possible, please fax us the diode manufacturer's specification sheet before ordering. For pigtail style laser diode to PM fiber couplers please indicate whether you wish to align the slow axis or the fast axis of the PM fiber with respect to the diode output. The OZ Optics standard is to align the PM fiber such that the diode output is transmitted along the slow axis of the fiber. Part Number HULD-AX-W-F-C LDPC-0A-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-C VIDEO-01-NTSC (or PAL) MMJ-X1-50/ LDC-21 (or LDC-21A) ALIGN-0X-NTSC (or PAL) Where: Description Laser diode to fiber source coupler with connector receptacle. Pigtail style laser diode to fiber source coupler. Video instructions for using OZ Optics' components. Please indicate whether an American (NTSC) or European (PAL) standard video is required. One meter long multimode jumper assembly for performing initial alignment of singlemode laser to fiber couplers. Alignment wrench for adjusting the laser diode collimation. Alignment kit for laser diode to singlemode fiber source couplers, containing a collimating wrench, a multimode jumper assembly, written instructions, and instructional video. Please indicate whether an American (NTSC) or European (PAL) standard video is required. A is the diameter of the diode package. (Use 1 for the standard 0.79" diameter package size, 2 for the higher performance 1.3" diameter package, 3 for compact 0.59" diameter, and 4 for the miniature 0.50" diameter. Note that due to limitations in the size of the diode being used, not all package sizes are available for every diode.) X is the receptacle type for connector style laser diode to fiber source couplers. For pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers, it refers to the male connector on the fiber end (3 for FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC connectors, etc. Use X for unterminated fibers for pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers.) W is the laser diode wavelength in nm; a/b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, respectively, in microns; F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber); C is the desired coupling efficiency (35%, 45% or 75% typical efficiencies for singlemode couplers, 75% typically for multimode fibers). Note that due to limitations in the diode optical characteristics, not all of the coupling efficiencies listed are possible with every diode. Contact OZ Optics for further technical help. LB is the desired backreflection level for pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers. (25, 40 or 60 db typically); JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3 mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A for 5mm armored cable); L is the fiber length in meters; Options: If OZ Optics is to supply the laser diode, then add the term "-LD" to the part number. If you require a power supply as well, then add the term "-PS" to the part number. For a blocking screw, add the term "-BL" to the part number. Add -PO to the part number for parts only, if customer wants to do the alignment. Add -DR to the part number for laser diode driver circuit. APPLICATION EXAMPLES 1. A pigtail style laser diode to fiber coupler is needed to couple light from a 1300nm laser diode into a PM fiber. The output fiber is to be one meter long, cabled with 3.0mm kevlar cable, and with an NTT-FC connector on the end. The backreflection level is to be less than 40dB. A coupling efficiency of 45% is desired. The slow axis of the fiber is to be aligned with the polarization axis of the output light from the diode. The customer wants OZ Optics to supply the laser diode and a power supply for the diode. OZ Optics' part number: LDPC /125-P LD-PS. 3

107 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) LASER DIODE TO FIBER COUPLER PIGTAIL STYLE Features: Proven design and manufacture Variety of standard packaging options 400nm to 1625nm Single mode, multimode or polarization maintaining fiber Rugged design Applications: Fiber Optic Communications Optical Alignment Systems Process Control Optical Sensor Applications Medical Apparatus Imaging Systems Test and measurement systems Product Description: OZ Optics offers a complete line of laser diode to fiber couplers, offering optimum coupling in a small, rugged package. They may be purchased prealigned, with the diode already in place, or as a kit that can be assembled by the customer using their own diode. The complete assembly procedure is quite straightforward, and can be done in less than twenty minutes. A complete alignment kit, which includes tools and video instructions, is available seperately. Laser diode source couplers are available for a variety of diode case sizes, and for diode wavelengths from 400nm to greater than 1650nm. These source couplers work with multimode, singlemode, and polarization maintaining fiber. One advantage of the design is should the diode ever fail, it can easily be replaced while reusing the rest of the optics. The device can then be realigned for optimum coupling. There are two versions of tilt adjustable laser diode to fiber couplers - receptacle style couplers, and pigtail style couplers. Pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers are offered with the fiber pigtailed directly onto the coupler. The pigtail style laser diode to fiber coupler provides higher coupling efficiencies and lower backreflection levels than receptacle style couplers, as well as better stability. The output fiber can be terminated with different output connectors, as desired. Laser diode to fiber couplers are available in different diameters. The standard diameter package is 0.79" in diameter. This size fits almost all standard laser diode packages. The larger 1.3" diameter housing provides best coupling efficiencies as it permits a wider selection of coupling optics. This housing size is also used with large diode case sizes, such as TO-3 (H1) package sizes. A smaller 0.59" diameter housing is available for diode can sizes 9.0mm in diameter or smaller. For diodes with can diameters of 5.6mm or less, a miniature 0.5" diameter tilt adjustable housing is possible. LDPC-01 LDPC-02 LDPC-03 LDPC-04 One misconception about tilt adjustable laser diode couplers is the belief that the number of tilt and locking screws make the coupler sensitive to temperature or vibration. In fact, tilt adjustable source couplers can be used over a temperature range of -25 C to 60 C, and have been vibration tested. Higher temperature versions are available on request. OZ Optics also offers a special, low cost, miniature pigtail style laser diode to fiber couplers for OEM applications. These packages use just a single lens to couple light from the laser diode into the fiber. They do not use OZ Optics tilt adjustment technique. This package features a compact, rugged housing, at a significantly lower cost. The housing diameter is typically 10mm. Coupling efficiency into singlemode and multimode fibers is typically 10 percent and 35 percent, respectively. LDPC-05 A variety of options are available for laser diode to fiber couplers. One such option is a coupler with a built in isolator. Isolators can reduce the effects of backreflection by up to 60dB. This is very useful for applications where the intensity and wavelength stability of the output light from the diode are critical. Another option is a blocking screw to attenuate the output beam. This allows the user to precisely control the output power entering the fiber, without having to change the diode current. Laser diode to fiber couplers with polarizers or polarization rotators in the middle are also available. LDPC-06 DTS0063 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 1

108 Standard Product Specifications: Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: A customer needs to couple light from a 1310nm laser diode into a 9/125 SM fiber. They require 35% coupling and want to do the alignment themselves. Bar Code Part Number Description XXXX LDPC /125-S-40-3S LD 1310nm laser diode to SM fiber coupler (33mm OD housing) with a FC receptacle, 35% coupling efficiency from a 1310nm laser diode into a 9/125, singlemode fiber ALIGN-01/4-NTSC-IRVIS Alignment kit for laser diode to fiber couplers with 4mm OD pigtails. The kit includes a collimating wrench; 4mm OD lensed multimode fiber assembly, instruction manual and an instructional video (NTSC format). Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a 10 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: Please fill out the Laser Diode to Fiber Coupler Delivery System Questionnaire, available seperately. Pigtail Style Laser Diode to Fiber Coupler LDPC-0A-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-C-(OPT) A = Package size 1 : 1 = 0.79" OD cylindrical housing 2 = 1.31" OD cylindrical housing 3 = 0.59" OD cylindrical housing 4 = 0.50" OD cylindrical housing 5 = OEM 10mm OD cylindrical housing 6 = OEM Rt. Angle PCB mountable housing W =Wavelength 2 : 400, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, a/b = Fiber core/cladding diameters (in µm) F = M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining LB =Backreflection level: 25 = 25dB return loss 40 = 40dB return loss 60 = 60dB return loss C = Coupling Efficiency 3 : 30 = 30% 45 = 45% 75 = 75% L = Fiber length, in meters JD = Jacket Diameter: 0.25 = 250µm buffered fiber 0.4 = 400µm buffered fiber 1 = 900µm jacketed fiber 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar etc. X = Connector Receptacle: 2.5U = 2.5mm universal receptacle (for FC, ST, or SC). 3 = FC/PC 3S = Super FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/PC 5 = SMA905 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = SCA 1 Note that due to limitations in the size of the laser diode being used, not all package sizes are available for every laser diode. 2 These are standard center wavelength values. The tolerance may vary depending on both wavelength and the laser diode manufacturers tolerance. (typically ±5nm to as high as ±30nm). 3 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diode being used, not all coupling efficiencies are available for every laser diode for every fiber type. Options: Add "-ISOL" if the laser diode is to be coupled through an optical isolator. Add "-DR" If OZ Optics is to provide the laser diode driver circuit or module for the laser diode. Add "-PS" if OZ Optics is to provide the power supply to operate the laser diode driver. Add "-#LD" if OZ Optics is to provide the laser diode (where # is the LD output power, IE: -5LD). Add "-BL" If OZ Optics is to provide a manual blocking screw to control the laser diode output power. Add -PO if OZ Optics is to supply parts as a kit, for customer to install the laser diode. Add -CSP for customer supplied laser diodes 4

109 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) LASER DIODE TO FIBER DELIVERY SYSTEMS FOR ACUPUNCTURE OZ Optics introduces a laser diode to fiber delivery system, housed in a compact, rugged pocket size housing. It can be either battery operated, or powered by an optional AC to DC converter. The system could be used for laser acupuncture treatments. Users must first comply with FDA regulations. The delivery system uses a 635nm visible laser diode, complete with a drive circuit and power supply, to couple light into a fiber. A fiber is attached to the diode, and the output end of the fiber has a collimating lens attached, to give a tightly collimated beam. Fiber splitters are also available, to divide the light from the diode into multiple output beams. The diode source comes in an attractive pocket size housing, complete with an optional belt clip, to give the operator maximum mobility during treatment. Delivery systems with up to 25mW of 635nm output power are available on request. Contact OZ Optics for further details. ORDERING INFORMATION Part Number Description FODL a/b-P Pocket size 635nm laser diode delivery system with Super FC/PC receptacle. PROBE-a/b-L Fiber probe with 0.4mm collimating lens. AC-9VDC Universal 110 or 220V AC to DC adaptor. Where: P is the output power of the diode source in milliwatts (mw). The standard output power is less than or equal to 1mW (CDRH class II rating). Delivery systems with up to 25mW output power are available. Contact OZ Optics for details. a,b are the fiber core and cladding diameters respectively, in microns Standard sizes are 4/125, 9/125, 25/125, etc. L is the fiber length in meters. Note: We recommend the use of an AC adapter for units larger than 1mW. Proper eye protection is also required for units above 1mW. Example: A customer wants to order a 635nm, 12 mw laser diode source, with a 3 meter long 25/125 multimode fiber probe. OZ Optics part number: FODL / for the diode source, PROBE-25/125-3 for the fiber with lens. WARNING: Laser diode sources emit visible laser radiation. Do not stare directly into the output beam. The FODL system is designed solely as an OEM component for incorporation into the customer's end products. Therefore it does not comply with the appropriate requirements of FDA 21 CFR, Sections and for complete laser products. The complete laser product manufacturer is responsible for complying with these requirements. These products are not to be used for clinical applications without first complying with FDA regulations. DTS0046 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. Oct-99

110 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ADJUSTABLE FOCUS Features: Precision focus adjustment Excellent coupling efficiency Wide wavelength ranges Rugged, simple design Easy to install and adjust Applications: Interferometric sensors Laboratory applications Education and training Visual laser alignment for manufacturing Medical, pharmaceutical, and chemical sensors Fluorescence measurements OEM laser systems Tunable lasers Laser shows and entertainment Laser To Fiber Coupler With Adjustable Focus Specifications: Coupling Efficiency: Typically >70% for singlemode and polarization maintaining fibers, >90% for multimode fibers Backreflection Levels: >40dB >60dB versions are also available Polarization Extinction Ratios: >20dB 25dB and 30dB versions are also available Available Wavelengths: nm Power Handling: >1 Watt CW for GRIN lenses >10 Watts CW for aspheric lenses >5 Watts CW for achromats >100 Watts CW for fused silica or sapphire plano-convex and biconvex lenses Patchcord With Adjustable Connector Product Description: Adjustable focus source couplers are ideal for situations where optimum coupling efficiency is critical. A special connector allows the spacing between the fiber and lens to be precisely controlled without rotating the fiber. This allows one to compensate for any changes in wavelength or beam waist location, thus further optimizing the coupling efficiency. Adjustable focus couplers are available with a variety of lens types and fiber types. Internal surfaces are angle polished and/or AR coated to minimize backreflection. Typical backreflection levels are -40dB. -60dB is available for certain options. OZ Optics also sells fiber patchcords with adjustable FC/PC connectors only. Contact OZ Optics for details. Figure 1: Operating Principle Of Adjustable Focus DTS0047 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 05/30/03 1

111 Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: A research lab in North America needs to launch light from a Argon-Ion laser, emitting light at 488 and 514nm, into a singlemode fiber. The laser beam diameter is 1mm. The laser does not have any provisions for mounting optics, so a post mount will be used in front of the laser. The patchcord needs to be at least, 2 meters long, and with an FC/PC connector on the other end. An alignment kit is ordered to help in aligning the optics. Bar Code Part Number Description HPUC-2A3A-400/700-S-6AC-11 Non-Contact style laser to SM fiber coupler for nm, with an adjustable angle FC compatible receptacle, f=6mm achromatic lens and post mount adapter QSMJ-A3A,3S / meter long, 3mm OD PVC jacketed 3.5/125µm 488nm high power SM fiber patchcord, terminated with an adjustable FC/PC connector on one end, and a Super FC/PC connector on the other end START-0A3A-NTSC-IRVIS Alignment kit for laser to fiber couplers with adjustable angle FC/APC compatible receptacles. The kit includes a MM patchcord and a instructional video (NTSC format). For nm applications. Ordering Information: Coupler With Adjustable Focus: HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH Receptacle Code: A3 for adjustable FC A3A for adjustable FC/APC Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) For achromats for wavelengths specify 400/700 Laser Head Adapter 1 for 1-32TPI Male Threaded Adapter 2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1 square 11 for Post Mount Adapter See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for other adapters Fiber Type: M for Multimode S for Singlemode P for Polarization Maintaining Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 for Non - Contact couplers with receptacles in the Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes Adjustable Patchcords: FMJ-X,Y-W-a/b-JD-L(-A) Fiber Type: M for Multimode S for Singlemode P for Polarization Maintaining QM for High Power Multimode QS for High Power Singlemode QP for High Power PM Connector Code: A3 = Adjustable Flat NTT-FC A3S = Adjustable Super NTT-FC/PC A3U = Adjustable Ultra NTT-FC/PC A3A = Adjustable Angled NTT-FC/PC X = Unterminated End See table 6 of the standard tables for other connectors Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 633 for 633nm) For Multimode fibers specify either UVVIS for ultraviolet/visible wavelengths or IRVIS for visible/infrared wavelengths. A = Alignment (Polarization maintaining patchcords only) 0 = unaligned and rotatable 1 = slow axis of the fiber aligned with respect to the key and locked Fiber Length in meters Fiber Jacket Type:1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other jacket sizes Fiber Core/Cladding Sizes in Microns: 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for other standard fiber sizes. NOTE: To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler system based on your response. Unit prices for couplers are approximately $450USD for typical applications with delivery being between 2 and 4 weeks after receiving your order (ARO). Unit prices for adjustable patchcords are $190USD for each adjustable connector plus the fiber price. Delivery is 2-4 weeks, ARO. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more information. 3

112 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ATTENUATOR OR SHUTTER FEATURES: High Power Handling High Resolution Polarization Insensitive Attenuator/Shutter Wide Attenuation Range Manual and Electrically Controlled Versions Different Connector Receptacles APPLICATIONS: Power Setting Safety Interlocks Colour Balancing Spectroscopy Medical, Pharmaceutical, and Chemical Sensors Interferometric Sensors OEM Laser Systems Laser Shows/Entertainment SPECIFICATIONS: Coupling Efficiency: Backreflection: Typically >55% for singlemode and polarization maintaining fibers, >80% for multimode fibers -14dB for receptacle style couplers using flat finish connectors -60dB for receptacle style couplers using angle finish connectors -25dB for LPSC-01 style pigtailed source couplers -40dB or -60dB for LPSC-03 style pigtailed source couplers Polarization Extinction Ratio: >20dB 25dB, 30 db version are also available Available Wavelengths: Power Handling: Attenuation Range: Resolution: Interface: nm Up to 3 Watts for singlemode applications Over 100 Watts for multimode applications 0 to 60dB 0.05dB Manual/Current Drive/RS-232/SPI/I 2 C LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED ATTENUATOR LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED SHUTTER PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: OZ Optics offers source to fiber couplers with built in attenuators or shutters. These couplers provide a precise method to control the intensity of light through a fiber. They are available in both receptacle style and pigtail style. Source couplers are available with both manual and electrically controlled attenuators. In the manual version, the beam from the laser is partially blocked by a precision blocking screw. Adjusting the screw controls how much light reaches the fiber. In the electrically controlled version, a stepper motor controls the amount of attenuation. It includes a homing sensor to calibrate the attenuator against. The stepper motor is available with several options for control. The basic model provides direct access to the motor as well as logic level output for the HOME sensor. The -DR option adds a high speed driver circuit that accepts four logic level signals to control the motor. Finally, the -MC option features an embedded microcontroller. These units are addressable and accept RS232, SPI, and I 2 C protocols. The shutter accepts a +12V supply to block or transmit the beam. This shutter is normally closed until voltage is applied. This makes it ideal for safety interlocks. A manual switch is also on the shutter. The shutter response speed is under 20 milliseconds. Shutters with foot pedal control are also available. OZ Optics can also provide shutters with a safety interlock function on the fiber connection. If the fiber is disconnected from the coupler, the shutter will close automatically. Contact OZ Optics for more information. DTS0048 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 22-Feb-05

113 ORDERING INFORMATION: RECEPTACLE STYLE SOURCE COUPLERS: HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH-B (-G-V-I) Receptacle Code: 3 for FC, Super FC/PC, Ultra FC/PC 3A for Angled FC/PC 3AF for Flat angled FC 8 for AT&T-ST, Super ST, Ultra ST 5 for SMA905, SMA906 See Tables 6 of the Standard Tables for other connectors Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) Fiber Type: M for Multimode S for Singlemode P for Polarization Maintaining Lens Focal Length and Type: See Lens Selection Guide 3 for Non-Contact Style Couplers in the Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes Laser Head Adaptor 1 for 1-32TPI Male Threaded Adaptor 2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1 Square 11 for Post Mount Adapter See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for Other Adapters PIGTAIL STYLE SOURCE COUPLERS: LPSC-0A-W-a/b-F-f-LB-LH-X-JD-L-B(-G-V-I) Interface (Motorized Attenuator only): PC for Base Model DR for High Speed Driver MC/SPI for Intelligent SPI Interface MC/IIC for Intelligent I 2 C Interface MC/RS232 for Intelligent RS232 Interface Stepper Motor Voltage (Motorized Attenuator only): 6 or 12 Volts Gear Ratio (Motorized Attenuator Only): 485:1 Standard 76:1 for Fast Speed Other ratios include 141:2, 262:1, and 900:1 Attenuation Technique: BL for Manual Blocking Screw SH for Electronicaly Controlled Shutter DD for Electronically Controlled Attenuator Coupler Type: 1 for Contact Style 3 for Non-Contact Style Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 633 for 633nm) Fiber Core/Cladding Sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for other standard fiber sizes Fiber Type: M for Multimode S for Singlemode P for Polarization Maintaining Lens Focal Length and Type See Lens Selection Guide 1 for Pigtail Style Source Couplers in the Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes Backreflection: 25dB (Contact Style) 40, 50, or 60dB (Non-contact style) 60dB versions standard only for 1300 and 1550nm wavelengths. Contact OZ before specifying other wavelengths Connector Code: 3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC 8=AT&T-ST SC=SC SCA=Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other Connectors Interface (Motorized Attenuator only): PC for Base Model DR for High Speed Driver MC/SPI for Intelligent SPI Interface MC/IIC for Intelligent I 2 C Interface MC/RS232 for Intelligent RS232 Interface Stepper Motor Voltage (Motorized Attenuator Only): 6 or 12 Volts Gear Ratio (Motorized Attenuator Only): 485:1 Standard 76:1 for Fast Speed Other ratios include 141:2, 262:1, and 900:1 Attenuation Technique: BL for Manual Blocking Screw SH for Electronicaly controlled Shutter DD for Electronically Controlled Attenuator Fiber Length in meters Fiber Jacket Type: 1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other jacket sizes Note: To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler based on your response. Unit prices range from $350USD to $1000USD for standard applications with delivery being between 4 and 8 weeks after receiving your order. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more information.

114 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) LASER TO FIBER COUPLER WITH RECEPTACLE (NON-CONTACT STYLE) FEATURES: Low Cost High Power Handling Wide Range of Lenses Excellent Polarization Maintaining Capabilities Different Connector Receptacle Versions Wide Wavelength Ranges APPLICATIONS: Laser Shows/Entertainment Spectroscopy Interferometric Sensors Fluorescence Measurements Medical, Pharmaceutical, and Chemical Sensors OEM Laser Systems SPECIFICATIONS: Coupling Efficiency: Typically >60% into singlemode or polarization maintaining fibers, >80% for multimode fibers Backreflection Levels: Typically -14dB with standard connectors Typically <-60dB with angled connectors Available Wavelengths: nm Polarization Extinction Ratios: Typically >20dB 25, 30dB versions are also available Power Handling: >1 Watt CW for GRIN lenses, >10 Watt CW for aspheric lenses >5 Watts CW for achromats >100 Watts CW for fused silica or sapphire plano-convex and biconvex lenses PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: In non-contact style source couplers, an air gap exists between the fiber and the lens. This design is more flexible, allowing a wide range of lens types and focal lengths to be used. The distance between the fiber and the lens can be adjusted to compensate the changes in the source wavelengths or to intentionally defocus the laser beam to prevent arcing in high power laser to multimode fiber applications. Couplers using GRIN lenses, achromats, aspheres, fused silica, plano-convex, and biconvex lenses have all been made utilizing this design. Non-contact style couplers can handle input powers of up to 100W CW, and even higher energies from pulsed sources. They are best suited for applications where either the input energy is higher than 400mW, or when more than one wavelength is to be coupled into the fiber, or for input beams that have unusually large beam diameters or divergence angles. They also have superior polarization maintaining capabilities compared to physical contact style couplers. However because of the 09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. CONNECTOR POLISH STYLES air gap between the fiber and the lens, the backreflection level for the endface of the fiber is about -14dB. This can be reduced to -40dB to -60dB by slant polishing both fiber ends to deflect the backreflected signal. There is a significant variation in the endface geometries of angled PC (APC) connectors. This effects the spacing between the endface of the fiber and the lens. To minimize this variation, OZ Optics offers an angled flat (AFC) connector. This connector features a beveled endface where the fiber itself is angled but the ferrule tip is flat. This geometry provides optimum repeatability between connections.

115 ORDERING INFORMATION: Receptacle Code: 3 for FC, Super FC/PC, Ultra FC/PC 3A for Angled FC/PC 3AF for Flat Angled FC 5 for SMA for AT&T-ST 8U for Ultra AT&T-ST SC for SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other connectors Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) HPUC-2X-W-F-f-LH Laser Head Adaptor 1 for 1-32TPI Male Threaded Adapter 2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1 square 11 for Post Mount Adapter See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for other adapters Lens ID: See Lens Selection Guide 3 for Non - Contact couplers with receptacles in the Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes Fiber Type: M for Multimode S for Singlemode P for Polarization Maintaining STANDARD COUPLERS: OZ OPTICS PART NUMBER BAR CODE NUMBER OZ OPTICS PART NUMBER BAR CODE NUMBER HPUC /700-S-3.5AC HPUC /700-S-3.5AC HPUC /700-S-6AC HPUC /700-S-6AC HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-10AC HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-10AC HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-3.5AC HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-3.5AC HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-6AC HPUC-23AF-400/700-S-6AC HPUC /700-S-10AC HPUC /700-S-10AC HPUC S-5BQ HPUC S-5BQ HPUC S-10BQ HPUC S-10BQ NOTE: To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler based on your response.

116 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FEATURES: Low Cost Easy to Install and Adjust Rugged, Compact, Simple Design Good Coupling Efficiency Different Connector Receptacles Adjustable Output Power Wide Wavelength Ranges APPLICATIONS: Interferometric Sensors Laboratory Applications Education and Training Visual Laser Alignment for Manufacturing Medical, Pharmaceutical and Chemical Sensors Fluorescence Measurements OEM Laser Systems Laser Shows/Entertainment SPECIFICATIONS: Coupling Efficiency: Typically >55% for singlemode and polarization maintaining fibers, >80% for multimode fibers Backreflection Levels: Typically -25dB Polarization Extinction Ratio: Typically 20dB LASER TO FIBER COUPLERS WITH RECEPTACLES (PHYSICAL CONTACT STYLE) Available Wavelengths: Optimized for 488, 514, 532, 543, 633, 830, 1300, 1550 and 1625nm Power Handling: Up to 250mW for nm Up to 10mW for nm PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: Physical contact source couplers are the most economical type of laser to fiber source couplers. A Graded Index (GRIN) lens is used to focus the light into the fiber. The fiber is butted directly against the endface of the lens thus ensuring that the laser beam is properly focused onto the end of the fiber. A special version is available for use with unterminated (bare) fibers. By using index matching gel on the end of the fiber, backreflection levels are reduced to -25dB. This technique should only be used for low power lasers and nm wavelengths. Gel is not recommended for nm wavelengths. The couplers are optimized for a specific wavelength which is specified when ordering. Backreflection is approximately -15dB when gel is not used. 09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.

117 ORDERING INFORMATION: HUC-1X-W-F-f-LH Receptacle Code: 1 for Bare Fibers 3 for FC, Super FC or Ultra FC 8 for AT&T-ST, Super ST or Ultra ST 5 for SMA 905 See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other receptacles. Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 633 for 633nm) Fiber Type: M for Multimode S for Singlemode P for Polarization Maintaining Laser Head Adaptor: 1 = 1-32TPI Male Threaded Adaptor 2 = Disk Adaptor with 4 holes on a 1 square 11 = Post Mount Adaptor See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for other adaptors. Lens Type: 1.8GR for beam sizes < 0.5mm 2.6GR for beam sizes between 0.5mm and 1mm Use Non-contact style couplers for beam sizes larger than 1mm. Note: Add -BL to the part number if a manually adjustable attenuator is to be added. STANDARD COUPLERS: OZ Optics Part Number Bar Code Number HUC S-1.8GR HUC S-1.8GR HUC S-2.6GR HUC S-2.6GR HUC M-2.6GR HUC M-2.6GR HUC S-2.6GR HUC S-2.6GR RECEPTACLE STYLE PHYSICAL CONTACT SOURCE COUPLER BARE FIBER SOURCE COUPLER NOTE: To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler based on your response. Unit prices range from $100USD to $230USD for standard items with delivery being from stock to within 2 weeks of receiving your order. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more information.

118 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) PIGTAIL STYLE LASER TO FIBER COUPLERS FEATURES: Rugged, Compact, Stable Design Low Backreflection Low Cost Environmentally Stable Excellent Coupling Efficiency Excellent Polarization Maintaining Capabilities Wide Wavelength Ranges Adjustable Output Power APPLICATIONS: Interferometric Sensors Medical, Pharmaceutical, and Chemical Sensors Fluorescence Measurements Spectroscopy Laser Shows/Entertainment OEM Laser Systems SPECIFICATIONS: Coupling Efficiency: Typically >60% into Singlemode or Polarization Maintaining fibers, >80% for Multimode fibers Backreflection Levels: Typically -25dB for Physical Contact style, -40dB for Non- Contact style. -60dB versions are also available Polarization Extinction Ratios: >20dB 25dB and 30dB versions are also available Available Wavelengths: nm Power Handling: >1 Watt CW for GRIN lenses, >10 Watts CW for aspheric lenses >5 Watts CW for achromats >100 Watts CW for fused silica or sapphire plano-convex and biconvex lenses PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: Pigtail style source couplers are recommended for permanent or semipermanent situations, where optimum coupling efficiency, output stability, and minimum backreflection are desired. In these couplers the fibers are permanently glued to the focusing lens. The fiber-lens assembly is then inserted into the tilt adjustment flange, and held in place with two radial set screws. Because the fiber is permanently attached to the lens, the fiber cannot be replaced without also replacing the coupling lens. Pigtail style couplers are manufactured in both contact (LPSC-01) model and non-contact (LPSC-03) model versions. For contact style pigtailed couplers, the backreflection level is typically -25dB. In the case of non-contact style couplers, the internal endface of the fiber is polished at an angle to reduce backreflection. Non-contact pigtail style couplers are available with up to -40dB or -60dB backreflection levels. 09/99 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice.

119 ORDERING INFORMATION: LPSC-0A-W-a/b-F-f-LH-LB-X-JD-L Coupler Type: Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 633 for 633nm) Fiber Type: 1 for Contact Style 3 for Non-Contact Style Fiber Core/Cladding Sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for other standard fiber sizes M for Multimode S for Singlemode P for Polarization Maintaining Lens Type: See the Lens Selection Guide 1 for Pigtail Style Source Couplers in the Laser to Fiber Coupler Application Notes Laser Head Adaptor 1 for 1-32TPI Male Threaded Adaptor 2 for Disk Adapter with 4 holes on 1 square 11 Post Mount Adapter See Table 8 of the Standard Tables for other adapters Fiber Length in meters Fiber Jacket Type: Connector Code: 1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7of the Standard Tables for other jacket sizes 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST 8S = Super AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables for other connectors Backreflection: 40, 50, or 60dB 60dB versions standard only for 1300 and 1550nm wavelengths. Contact OZ before specifying other wavelengths. Note: Add -ER=30 or -ER=25 to the part number for 30dB or 25dB extinction ratios (For 1300nm and 1550nm only). Add -BL to the part number if a manually adjustable attenuator is to be added. NOTE: To determine the best laser to fiber source coupler for your application please complete a Laser to Fiber Delivery System Questionnaire. OZ Optics will then recommend a coupler based on your response. Unit prices range from $250USD to $400USD for typical applications with delivery being from stock to within 2 weeks of receiving your order. Quantity discounting and blanket orders can be arranged. Contact OZ for more information.

120 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) MANUALLY ADJUSTABLE POLARIZATION INSENSITIVE TUNABLE FILTERS Features: Narrow linewidth Polarization insensitive Wide wavelength range Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining fiber versions High resolution Applications: Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Tunable sources Spectral analysis Quality control and measurement Product development Fiber optic component manufacturing Product Description: Manually Adjustable Tunable Filter Tunable filters consist of a collimating optical assembly, an adjustable narrow bandpass filter, and a focusing optical assembly to collect the light again. Tunable filters are available in three versions - a manually adjustable version, a motor driven version for OEM applications, and a digital version with a display and computer interface. The manual tunable filter is a pigtailed component with a rotating stage that allows for the manual adjustment of the angle of incidence between the beam and the filter. The filter works based on the principle that by adjusting the angle of incidence between the filter and the incident beam one controls the wavelength at which the filter transmits. Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width at Half Maximum (FWHM). The standard filter used in tunable filters has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. Other filter designs are available. For instance, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. For more information on custom filters please contact OZ Optics. OZ Optics tunable filters now utilize a new optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This new design reduces PDL to below 0.3dB, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. This feature makes it ideal for today's DWDM system applications. Tunable filters using singlemode, multimode and Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are offered. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. Figure 1: Manually Adjustable Tunable Filter DTS0051 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 06/02 1

121 Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: A customer wants to use a broadband source as a manual tunable source in order to test the spectral characteristics of optical components at different wavelengths. Both the light source and components have FC/PC receptacles and the wavelength region of interest for the components is throughout the C-band. The broadband source is polarized randomly and therefore the tunable source required should be polarization insensitive. The component required for this application is a polarization insensitive manual tunable filter. With this filter connected to the broadband light source and by adjusting the angle at which the beam is incident on the filter the transmitted wavelength from the broadband source can be tuned from 1520 to 1570nm. Bar Code Part Number Description TF /1570-9/125-S-40-3S3S Polarization insensitive manual tunable filter in U-bracket for nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss, super FC/PC connectors and standard 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter. Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What wavelength range are you interested in? 2. What linewidth do you require? 3. What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, multimode or PM fiber? 4. Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source? 5. What return losses are acceptable in your system? 6. What connector types are you using? 7. What fiber length and jacket diameter do you need? TF W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-LW W: Wavelength range in nanometers: Example: 1520/1570 a/b: Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns: 9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF28 fiber8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber F: Fiber type: M=Multimode S=Singlemode P=Polarization Maintaining LB: Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM fibers only. (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength ranges only) 35dB for multimode fibers LW: FWHM linewidth in nm. Standard filter is a Fabry Perot. For a flat top profile filter, add the letter F to the end of the number L: Fiber length in meters JD: Fiber Jacket type: 1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable X,Y: Input & Output Connector codes: 3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC 8=AT&T-ST SC=SC SCA=Angled SC LC=LC LCA=Angled LC MU=MU X=No Connector Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: Example 1: A customer wants to reduce the ASE noise and manually tune the transmitted wavelength for a special broadband light source between the C and L bands, 1550 to 1600nm, with a very narrow linewidth. A custom version of the manually tunable filter will meet this requirement with a narrow linewidth custom filter used in the component. Bar Code Part Number Description N/A TF /1600-9/125-S-50-3U3U Polarization insensitive manual tunable filter for nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 50dB return loss and ultra FC/PC connectors. Custom 0.3nm FWHM Fabry Perot filter. 3

122 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) MEMS VARIABLE OPTICAL ATTENUATORS SINGLE/MULTI-CHANNEL Features: Small size, low cost Single channel up to 8 channels per module for MEMS VOA arrays and up to 40 channels for MEMS VOA with electronic drivers Standard or custom arrays. Continuous attenuation control for each channel. Integrated output power monitoring (optional). Fast response. Low insertion loss. High dynamic range. Flat wavelength response. SM or PM fiber versions are available Low power consumption Very low crosstalk High attenuation acuracy Preliminary Applications: Active gain equalization in DWDM systems Local power monitoring and feedback control Power control into receivers Gain tilt control in EDFAs Channel balancing for optimizing transmission performance in longhaul and metro networks Power balancing before modulation and multiplexing Dynamic optical power control and channel equalization in add/drop multiplexers MEMS Variable Optical Attenuator Product Description: OZ Optics Ltd. introduces a MEMS based variable optical attenuator (VOA) in a fast, low cost miniature package. The attenuators are available either in individual units or as an integrated array of separate attenuators, each with independent continuous control. The attenuation is controlled by a simple analog voltage input signal. Up to 8 attenuators can be incorporated into one module. Integrated optical power monitoring of each channel is available as an option. The combination of ease of control with integrated power monitoring makes the unit an attractive choice for DWDM optical networks, where automated control is essential. MEMS based VOAs using either singlemode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are available. An ingenious manufacturing technique ensures optimum alignment of PM fibers while keeping assembly costs to minimal levels. This reduces costs dramatically. MEMS VOAs can be provided in 4 configurations: single channel; multi channel VOA arrays without any electronics; multi channel VOA arrays with 0-5V drive electronics; and multi channel VOA arrays with 0-5V drive electronics and serial port communication interface. Dimensions are in milimeters Figure 1: Single Channel MEMS VOA Figure 2: 8 Channel MEMS VOA Module DTS0078 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 17-Jan

123 MEMS Multichannel VOA C = Number of Channels: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 40 W = Wavelength Specify in nm 1550 for nm operating range (C, L, and S bands) F = Fiber type S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns 9/125 for standard Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber Note: 1 Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: Part Number MMVOA-C-W-F-a/b-XY -JD -L(-M) 1 Add -M to the part number to have integrated power monitoring added Add -DR to the part number to have integrated 0-5V drive electronics Add -DR/RS232 or DR/I 2 C to the part number to have integrated 0-5V drive electronics with serial interface A customer needs an eight channel, 1550nm PM MEMS VOA. The fibers on each side are 1 meter long, with 900 micron loose tube hytrel jacketing. The ends of the fibers are to be terminated with FC/APC connectors. The customer wants built in power monitoring. The part number and description are as follows: Description L = Fiber length, in meters on each side of the device: 1 meter is standard. If the inputs and outputs are different lengths, then specify the input and output lengths with a comma. Example: To order 1 meter on the input, and 7 meters on the output, enter 1,7 for L in the part number. JD = Fiber Jacket Size: 0.25 = 250µ OD acrylate coating (standard) 1 = 900µ OD Hytrel Buffer (optional) X,Y = Input and Output Connector types 3S = FC connector, Super PC finish 3U = FC connector, Ultra PC finish 3A = FC connector, Angled PC (APC) finish 8 = AT&T-ST connector SC = SC connector, Super PC finish SCA = SC connector, Angled PC (APC) finish LC = LC connector MU = MU connector X = No connector Note: All fibers on one side are terminated with one connector type. MMVOA P-8/125-3A3A-1-1-M Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): MEMS Multichannel VOA, with eight channels. Each channel uses PM fiber for 1550nm, 1 meter long on both ends, 900 micron loose tube hytrel jacketing, with FC/APC connectors on each end. Integrated power monitoring is included. Q: How does the integrated power monitoring work? A: Integrated power monitoring is achieved through the use of a unique tapping process and a photodiode. The output signal from the photodiode can be measured by a feedback circuit to control the attenuation. Application Notes: Application example: Load balancing on a WDM network As illustrated in figure 2, an eight channel wavelength multiplexed signal from a trunk line is demultiplexed into individual signals. The signals are of different intensities, and have to be balanced to avoid saturating any of the receivers. To do so, each channel is sent through a corresponding port on an eight channel MEMS VOA. The signal strength through the attenuator outputs is monitored by a control circuit. If the output signal on one channel gets too high or too low, the corresponding attenuator is adjusted to bring the light level to the correct range. The complete module is very compact. Figure 3: Using A MEMS VOA To Balance Signal Strengths In A WDM Network 3

124 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: Singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining fibers Easy to solder Cleaved enfaces available Unplated (masked) ends available Mid-span plating available Designed to meet Telcordia requirements Large volume manufacturing capacity Custom configurations available METALIZED FIBERS Applications: Hermetic feed-throughs Integrated optics packaging Diode pigtailing Metalized Fiber Product Description: OZ Optics metalized fibers are specifically designed for optoelectronic packaging. The fiber is first coated with a layer of nickel to provide superior adhesion and a stable soldering base. The fiber is then plated with an overcoat layer of gold to provide resistance to oxidization. The result is a strong, uniform coating capable of handling the rigors of soldering and hermetic sealing. OZ Optics metalized fibers are well suited for use in assemblies that must conform to Telcordia requirements. If required, OZ Optics metalized fibers can be manufactured with masked ends. This process provides a clean, non-metalized fiber end suitable for termination with ceramic ferrules, fusion splicing or direct connection to a device. This allows for an easy transformation of devices into hermetically sealed packages. Also available are custom mid-span metalization of optical fibers and metalized ribbon fibers. The mid-span configuration provides a solution for hermetically sealing in-fiber devices such as Fiber Bragg Gratings, optical isolators or optical filters, as well as allowing larger package devices that exceed the length restrictions of standard metalized fibers. Metalization of ribbon fibers allows for easy hermetic sealing of multiple fibers into hermetic packages that require many fibers or are being used with V-Groove assemblies. OZ Optics metalized fibers are available with Singlemode, Multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers. PM fibers offer a means to control polarization of optical signals throughout the system thus controlling Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL) and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD). This control is crucial in developing high speed, 10 Gbs, 40 Gbs, and faster systems. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. Figure 1: Metalized Bare Fiber DTS0053 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 06/02 1

125 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 50 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionaire For Custom Parts: 1. What type of fiber is required for your application? 2. Do you need the fiber to be protected with 0.9mm loose tubing? 3. What length of metalization is required? 4. Is the metalization needed at the end of the fiber or another location along the length? 5. If this is an end plating, do you require a bare length of fiber (masked region) at the end? 6. Do you need the end of the fiber to be cleaved? 7. What is the overall length of the fiber needed? 8. Do you need a connector on the opposite end? 9. What is the application that this fiber is being used for? F = Fiber Type M = Multimode S = Single Mode P = Polarization Maintaining X = Connector Code 3S = Super FC 3U = Ultra FC 3A = Angle FC 8 = ST SC = Super SC SCU = Ultra SC SCA = Angle SC MU = Super MU LC = Super LC LCA = Angle LC W = Wavelength, in nanometers 1300/1550 for Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber a/b = Fiber core/cladding 9/125 for Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber 6/125 for 980nm PANDA style PM fiber 7/125 for 1300nm PANDA style PM fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber * Note: 1 PANDA style 1300nm or 1550nm fiber only MEFMJ-X-W-a/b-JD-A-B-E-L-(OPT) L = Overall Length in Meters E = Fiber Endface Finish 0 = 0 cleave (Flat) 8 = 8 cleave (Angled) X = No cleave B = Metalized fiber length in millimeters (for assemblies with full metalization, this number should match "A") A = Stripped fiber length in millimeters JD = Jacket Diameter 0.25 = 250 micron acrylate coating (standard bare fiber) 0.40 = 400 micron acrylate coating (PM bare fiber) 1 = 900µm Hytrel loose tube buffered fiber (standard bare fiber) OPT = Options (add if required) M = Mid-span plating ER = 30 for >30dB extinction ratio 1 Ordering Examples For Custom Parts A customer needs to hermetically seal a 2 meter long length of PANDA style 1550nm PM fiber into a package. To do so he will solder into place a metalized fiber. The metalized fiber length needs to be 30mm long with only 20mm metalized, leaving 10mm of exposed bare fiber for attachment to his device, No fiber end finish is required. There is also a requirement for the fiber to be jacketed to 900 micron with an FC/APC connector. Bar Code Part Number Description NEW MEPMJ-3A / X-2 2 meter long, 0.9mm OD Jacketed 1550nm 8/125 Polarization Maintaining fiber patchcord with metalized tip on one end, Angle FC/PC connector on the other end. Strip length is 30mm, metalized length is 20mm, no ferrule or cleave on the end 3

126 Features 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Very small size Low cost Interchangeable optical receptacles available Powered by replaceable batteries Auto-off CE compliant Applications Fiber optic assembling and testing Network installation Component and system troubleshooting Education General optical power measurement MINI OPTICAL POWER METER Product Description The OZ Optics POM-400 is a pocket-sized optical power meter covering a range of popular wavelengths. The ultra-compact size and user-friendly keypad makes it well suited to many user applications. Low power consumption allows extended operation in the field. POM-400 Optical Power Meter The POM-400 can accommodate a number of standard, interchangeable screw-in receptacles. The dynamic range exeeds 63 db. Power levels from +3 dbm to as low as -60 dbm can be easily measured, with the values displayed in watts or dbm. The user may select any of three pre-set calibrated wavelengths. Measurement range -60 to +3 dbm Calibrated wavelengths 1550, 1490, 1310 Detector type Display resolution InGaAs 0.01 db Accuracy (@ 23 C) ± 5% Measurement units Watts, dbm Ordering Information for Standard Parts: Available optical receptacles Universal receptacle for FC/SC/ST. FC receptacle also included. Dimensions Bar Code (L x W Part x H) Number Description 90 x 55 x 16 mm Weight POM-400-IR Optical 90 g with Power battery Meter calibrated at infrared wavelengths 1310/1490/1550 nm, -60 to +3dBm Power supply measurement 3 AAA 1.5 volt range. batteries Measurement units are in watts and dbm. Universal adaptor for FC/SC/ST connectors. FC/PC receptacle is included. Battery operated. Battery operating lifetime 360 hours Temperature range: Operating Storage -10 to +60 C -25 to +70 C DTS0104 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 14-Jan

127 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) MINIATURE INLINE POLARIZATION MAINTAINING SPLITTERS/ TAPS/COMBINERS Features: Rugged compact design Broad wavelength range Low insertion loss High extinction ratio Low return losses Low Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) Low Wavelength Dependent Loss (WDL) Applications: EDFA amplifiers Raman amplifier combiners Polarization mode dispersion compensation Polarization extinction ratio measurements Fiber optic sensors Coherent communication systems Product Description: OZ Optics miniature fiber optic beam splitters are used to split the light traveling through a fiber into two fibers, or to split or combine orthogonally polarized light into separate fibers. These splitters feature a rugged miniature housing to fit into compact spaces in equipment and systems. Light from a fiber is first collimated, then sent through a beamsplitting optic to divide it into two beams by either a fixed ratio or into two orthogonal polarizations. The resultant output beams are then coupled back into the output fibers. This flexible design allows one to manufacture splitters with different fiber types on the input and output ports. Miniature inline splitters are sold in two different configurations - a polarization maintaining splitter, with a fixed splitting ratio, and a polarizing splitter, to split and combine orthogonal polarizations. Their operating principles are as follows: Polarization Maintaining Splitters: Also known as optical taps, these splitters use a partially reflecting mirror to transmit a portion of the light from the input fiber to the main output fiber, and reflect the remainder of the light to the second output fiber. All ports made using polarization maintaining fiber are aligned so that polarized light aligned parallel to the stress rods on the input fiber emerge from the output fibers in the same manner, maintaining the polarization state to a high degree. The top drawing in Figure 2 shows the arrangement of the input and output ports. Splitters that only split off a small portion of the input light are commonly known as taps. These splitters are often used for power monitoring applications. The small signal, typically between one and ten percent, is sent to a monitoring photodiode, while the majority of the signal goes on to the main destination. For a very low cost alternative configuration, combining the functions of a tap and monitor photodiode in a single unit, we invite you to review our Inline Optical Taps and Monitors data sheet. Polarizing Splitters: Polarizing Beam Splitters split incoming light into two orthogonal states. They can also be used to combine the light from two fibers into a single output fiber. When used as a beam combiner, each input signal will transmit along a different output polarization axis. By default the output fibers on a polarizing splitter are aligned so that the output polarization from each fiber is in line with the stress rods of the fibers. Ø 0.12 [3.1] Miniature Inline Splitter Ø 0.19 [4.75] 1.93 [49] 1.38 [35] 0.91 [23] Ø 0.22 [5.5] Dimensions are in inches [mm] Figure 1: Inline Splitter Dimensions Input Fiber Output Fiber 2 Input Fiber 1 50/50 or 96/4 PBS Output Fiber 1 Output Fiber 1 Output Fiber 2 Figure 2: Polarization Maintaining And Polarizing Splitter Configurations If the input fiber is a polarization maintaining (PM) fiber, the input fiber is aligned such that light polarized parallel to the fiber s stress rods is transmitted to port 1 of the splitter, while light polarized perpendicular to the stress rods is transmitted to port 2 of the splitter. The bottom drawing in Figure 2 illustrates this. Because of OZ Optics modular design, the PM fiber configuration can be changed to whatever suits your needs. Splitters can be manufactured with different fibers on the input and output ports. For example, light from a singlemode fiber could be split into its two orthogonal states and then launched into two polarization maintaining fibers. Standard products for 1550 nm applications are readily available, while custom items can be made with rapid turnaround at low cost. Products for other wavelengths, such as 980 nm, 1300 nm, or 1480 nm are offered. Contact OZ Optics for details and a quotation. DTS0091 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 1

128 Ordering Information For Standard Parts: A customer requires a polarization maintaining tap to monitor the output power from a 1550 nm DFB laser diode with a PM output. The tap ratio needs to be 5% or smaller. The coupler has to exhibit the lowest possible insertion losses and return losses. Connectors are not required. Bar Code Part Number Description FOBS-12N-111-8/125-PPP /4-60-XXX-1-1 Miniature inline polarization maintaining splitter for 1550 nm, with a 96/4 splitting ratio, 60 db return loss. The fibers on all ports are 1 meter long, 900 micron loose tube cabled PM fibers, with no connectors. Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is your operating wavelength? 2. What is the intensity of your signal? 3. What is the input fiber type? 4. What is the first output fiber type? 5. What is the second output fiber type? 6. What splitting ratio do you desire? Do you require a fixed splitting ratio or a polarizing splitter? 7. Do you intend to use the unit as a splitter or as a combiner? 8. What are your insertion loss requirements? 9. What are your return loss requirements? 10. How long should the fibers be on each port? 11. Do you require uncabled fibers, or fibers protected with a 900 micron diameter loose tube cable? 12. Do you need any connectors on the fibers? If so, what type? Description Miniature Inline Splitter Part Number FOBS-12N-111-a/b-ABC-W-S/R-LB-XYZ-JD-L a/b = ABC = Fiber Types on each port (input, output 1, output 2) M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining W = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm singlemode fiber. 8/125 for 1550 nm PM fiber 7/125 for 1300 nm PM fiber See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes Wavelength:Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) S/R = Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 98/2 50/50, 96/4 Standard Use PBS for polarizing splitters Ordering Examples for Custom Parts A 980nm polarizing beamsplitter is needed to combine the signal from two polarization maintaining fibers into one singlemode fiber. The two polarization maintaining fibers are to be terminated with FC/APC connectors, while the singlemode fiber is left unterminated. Standard return losses, insertion losses and jacket materials are acceptable. Part Number L = JD = LB = Description Fiber length, in meters Fiber jacket type 0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket XYZ = Connector codes for each port 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC LC = LC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors Backreflection level: 30, 40, 50, or 60 db 50, 60 db are standard for 1300 nm to 1550 nm only 40 db standard for other wavelengths 30 db is standard for multimode FOBS-12N-111-6/125-SPP-980-PBS-40-X3A3A-1-1 Miniature inline polarizing splitter/combiner for 980 nm, with 40 db return loss. The input fiber is 980 nm singlemode fiber with no connector while the two output fibers are both 980 nm PM fibers with angled NTT-FC/PC connectors. The fibers on all ports are 1 meter long and 900 micron loose tube cabled. 3

129 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) MOTOR DRIVEN TUNABLE FILTERS Features: Narrow Linewidth Polarization Insensitive Wide Wavelength Range Singlemode, Multimode, and Polarization Maintaining Fiber Versions High Resolution Built in Computer RS232 Interface GPIB/RS232 Converter Applications: Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Tunable Sources Spectral Analysis Quality Control and Measurement Product Development Fiber Optic Component Manufacturing Automated Testing Motor Driven Tunable Filter Product Description: Tunable filters consist of a collimating optical assembly, an adjustable narrow bandpass filter, and a focusing optical assembly to collect the light again. Tunable filters are available in three versions - a manually adjustable version, a motor driven version for OEM applications, and a digital version with a display and computer interface. The motor driven tunable filter is a pigtailed unit with a computer interface which has options for different communication standards. The device works on the principle that by adjusting the angle of incidence between the filter and the incident beam one controls the wavelength at which the filter transmits. The motor driven version is calibrated such that the user directly enters the wavelength to transmit via the computer interface. An RS232 interface with cable is standard. Filter linewidths are normally defined in terms of Full Width at Half Maximum (FWHM). The standard filter used in tunable filters has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type Figure 1. Motor Driven Tunable Filter cavity. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. Other filter profiles are available. For instance, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. For more information on custom filters please contact OZ Optics. OZ Optics tunable filters now utilize a new optical technique to control Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL). This new design reduces PDL to below 0.3dB, while at the same time making the spectral response polarization insensitive. This feature makes it ideal for today's DWDM system applications. Tunable filters using singlemode, multimode and Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers are offered. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. DTS0054 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 09/03 1

130 Standard Product Specifications: Computer Interface: Resolution: Tuning Range: Linewidth: PDL: Insertion Loss: Standard Wavelength Ranges: Power Handling: Response Time: Dimensions: Weight: Power Requirements: Repeatability: RS232. Other available options include IIC and SPI. As low as 0.1nm 50nm 1.1 ± 0.1nm over full tuning range is standard. As low as 0.3nm as an option. Typically less than 0.3dB Typically less than 2.0dB for complete device over full tuning range. S, C and L bands: nm, nm and nm Up to 200mW for standard package. 50nm change in less than 1 sec. 1nm change in less than 0.1 sec x 1.5 x 3.25 ( x 8.5cm), (not including fibers) 0.2lb (100g) Voltage: 5.0 volts for logic, 5 to 12 volts for motor Current: 57mA for logic supply, 160mA for motor with +12V Supply Typically better than ±0.2nm SAMPLE TEST DATA FOR TUNABLE FILTERS Wavelength (nm) PDL (db) Ordering Information For Standard Parts: Figure 2: Typical Transmission Curves Of 1.2nm C-band Tunable Filters Bar Code Part Number Description TF /1570-9/125-S-40-3S3S MC/RS232 Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss, super FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 interface and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter TF /1570-9/125-S-50-3U3U MC/RS232 Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 50dB return loss, ultra FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 interface and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter TF /1570-9/125-S-60-3A3A MC/RS232 Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 60dB return loss, angled FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 interface and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter TF /1620-9/125-S-40-3S3S MC/RS232 Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss, super FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 interface and 1.2nm FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter. 2

131 Motor Driven Tunable Filter: TF W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-LW-MC/I W = Wavelength range in nanometers: Example: 1520/1570 I = Computer Interface: RS232 for RS232 IIC for IIC SPI for SPI a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns: for 1300/1550 SM fiber use 9/125 for 1550 Panda Style PM fiber use 8/125 LW = Linewidth in nm. For a flat-top profile add the suffix F to the line width Example: -15F=15nm Flat Top Filter F = Fiber type: M=Multimode S=Singlemode P=Polarization Maintaining LB = 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or polarization maintaining units only (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength ranges only) 35dB for multimode units Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: Example 1: L = Fiber length in meters (each side) JD = Fiber Jacket type: 1=900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3=3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable A customer wants to select between channels in the C-band for a metro Coarse WDM (CWDM) system. Typical channel width is 15nm and a flat top, low ripple, polarization insensitive tunable filter is needed. Part Number TF /1570-9/125-S-50-3U3U F-MC/RS232 Example 2: Description Polarization insensitive motorized tunable filter for nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 9/125 SM fiber pigtails, 50dB return loss, ultra FC/PC connectors and built-in microcontroller with RS232 interface and 15nm passband flat top filter. A customer wants to reduce the out of band noise of a polarized light source and tune the transmitted wavelength using a 0.3nm linewidth tunable filter. The component required for this application is a polarization maintaining motorized tunable filter. Part Number Description X,Y = Connector code: 3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC 8=AT&T-ST SC=SC SCA=Angled SC LC=LC LCA=Angled LC MU=MU X=No Connector TF /1570-8/125-P-40-3S3S-3-1-MC/RS Polarization maintaining motorized tunable filter for nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss, super FC/PC connectors, built-in microcontroller with RS232 interface and 0.3nm FWHM Fabry Perot shape filter. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): Q: What is the filter linewidth? A: The standard filter is a 1.2nm FWHM Fabry-Perot filter. This can be customized to suit the customer's requirements. Q: How do you define your linewidths? A: Standard filters are specified by their Full Width Half Maximum (FWHM). This is the transmitted line width at -3dB from the peak transmission. For custom filters linewidths such as the passband at -0.3dB and -25dB can be specified. Q: What is the largest tuning range available? A: The standard tuning range is 50nm. However the filter can be set to operate over a 100nm tuning range with some effects on the linewidth and insertion loss in the lower wavelength (high angle of incidence) region. Q: What is a Fabry-Perot filter? Are there other types available? A: A Fabry-Perot filter has a smooth, rounded transmission spectrum that is the result of a single Fabry Perot type cavity. A Fabry Perot cavity is simply made up of two reflectors separated by a fixed spacer of some thickness. By adjusting the spacer thickness one can adjust the pass bandwidth of the filter. Other shapes of filters are available, flat top bandpass filters are made by stacking multiple cavities together. By increasing the number of cavities one can increase the roll-off slope therefore improving the out-of-band rejection level. For more information on custom filters available please contact OZ Optics. 4

132 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) OPTICAL DELAY LINES Features: Low loss Sub-picosecond resolution Wide wavelength range Over 300 psec delay range Polarization insensitive Singlemode and polarization maintaining fiber versions Electrically controlled versions available Applications: PMD compensation in high speed communications networks Interferometric sensors Coherent telecommunications Spectrum analyzers Delay Line With Lead Screw (ODL-100) Product Description: Fiber Optic Delay Lines (ODL) consist of an input and output fiber collimator to project the light into free space and collect it again into a fiber. The distance the light travels in free space is precisely controlled, either by controlling the separation between the input and output optics, or by reflecting the light off a movable reflector. In either case, by varying the distance the light travels, one can control the delay time through the device. Delay lines are offered using singlemode, multimode or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. Delay Line With Micrometer (ODL-200) Delay lines are offered in both manual or electrically controlled versions. Manual delay lines utilize either a lead screw or a micrometer to adjust the spacing. Electrically controlled versions utilize a servo motor with encoders to monitor the motion. With this device submicron resolution (<0.003 ps) is achieved. The delay line is easily controlled by a computer via an RS-232 interface or manually using some simple TTL input signals. These devices are calibrated to provide the delay in picoseconds. Home and end position sensors prevent accidental damage to the device. Basic Delay Line With Servo Motor (ODL-300) Electrically Controlled Delay Line (ODL-650) Reflector Style Delay Line With Lead Screw (ODL-600) DTS0055 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 05/02 1

133 Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: A customer is building a polarization mode dispersion compensator using a polarization maintaining electrically controlled delay line and computer interface. The delays in their system are 50 picoseconds or less. His system is sensitive to both insertion losses and return losses, so a low return loss device is needed. Bar Code Part Number Description ODL /125-P-60-3A3A-1-1-MC/RS232 Electrically Controlled Reflector Style Variable Fiber Optic Delay Line for 1550nm, with 60dB return loss. Pigtails are 1 meter long, 8/125 PM fibers, protected with 0.9mm OD hytrel tubing, and with FC/APC connectors, RS232 Interface Standard Product Specifications: Model ODL-100 ODL-200 ODL-300 ODL-600 ODL-650 Travel Mechanism Manual Lead Screw Manual Micrometer Servo Motor Manual Lead Screw, mirror Servo-motor, Mirror Travel Range (mm) x2=50mm 25x2=50mm Resolution (microns) per turn 10 per division 1.4 per encoder pulse 635 per turn 1 per encoder pulse Delay Range (psec) Delay Resolution (psec) 1 1 psec per turn psec per division psec per encoder pulse 2 psec per turn psec per encoder pulse Max. Insertion Loss (db) 2,3 <1.5 <1.0 <1.5 <1.0 <1.0 Loss Variation over travel range (typical)(db) 3 Size (LxWxH) (mm) 230x30x60 145x60x55 242x30x60 102x51x25 102x51x25 Return Loss (db) -35 for multimode fiber versions, -40, -50, -60 for singlemode fiber versions Speed (mm/sec) N/A N/A 2.9 N/A 1 Input Supply Voltage N/A N/A 6V to 8V N/A 6V to 8V Input Supply Current N/A N/A 400mA N/A 180mA 1 Theoretical, based on thread pitch and motor/encoder resolution. The MC/RS232 versions of the ODL-300 and ODL-650 can generate two counts per encoder pulse, effectively doubling the resolution. 2 Includes variation of insertion loss over the entire travel range. 3 For 1550nm wavelengths singlemode or PM fibers, at room temperature Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What Delay Range (in psec or mm) do you need? 2. What Resolution (in psec or mm) do you need? 3. Do you need a readout of the position? 4. Do you need electrical control? 5. Do you need computer control? What Interface will you use? 6. Do you intend to make your own drive circuit? 7. What wavelength will you be using? 8. What fiber type are you using? Singlemode, Multimode or Polarization Maintaining? 9. What is the worst acceptable return loss? 10. What kind of fiber connectors are you using? 5

134 ODL-A-11-W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L(-I) A = Version: 100 = Standard Style, with lead screw 200 = Standard Style, with micrometer 300 = Standard Style, with DC servo motor 600 = Reflector Style, with lead screw 650 = Reflector Style, with Servo motor I = Interface (ODL-300 & 650 models only) MC/RS232 for Intelligent RS232 Interface with built-in manual TTL control lines PC for direct connections to the motor, encoder and limit switches (no driver). W = Wavelength:Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns, 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber sizes 8/125 for 1550nm PM fiber sizes See Tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other fiber sizes F = Fiber type: M=Multimode S=Singlemode P=Polarization maintaining LB = Backreflection level: 35, 40, 50, or 60dB 60dB is available for 1300 and 1550nm only Multimode devices are only available with 35dB Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: A customer building an interferometer needs a manual delay line for 1300nm, using singlemode fiber. He needs pigtails 1 meter long on one side, and 10 meters long on the other side, and does not need connectors. Because he is fusion splicing, he prefers uncabled fiber. While he does not require to read the exact delay, he does need as long a travel range as possible. Return losses do need to be as low as possible, to prevent additional interference effects. Part Number ODL /125-S-60-XX-1-1,10 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): L = Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace the L with 1,7 JD = Fiber Jacket type: 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables for other jacket sizes X,Y = Input & Output Connector Codes: X = No connector 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC LCA = Angled LC MU = MU Description Variable Fiber Optic Delay Line for 1300nm, with manual lead screw and 60dB return loss. Pigtails are 1 meter long on the input, 10 meters long on the output, 0.9mm OD tight buffered 9/125 SM fibers, no connectors. Q: How do I convert travel in mm to delays in picoseconds? A: The delay is equal to the distance divided by the speed of light in air. 1mm corresponds to 3.33psec of delay. Note that in the ODL-600 and ODL-650 models, the light travels the distance twice, so the delay is twice the motion of the optics. Q: Is the minimum delay zero picoseconds? A: No, there is a minimum delay, due to the minimum separation between the optics, and the length of the attached fibers. A one meter long fiber produces a 4.9nsec delay. The minimum separation of the optics induces between 30psec and 150psec delay, depending on the model. The delay range specified in the tables is for relative delay. Q: Are the units calibrated? A: The ODL-200 models have a micrometer, to give the direct readout of the motion, in mm. The ODL-300 with controller and ODL-650 also givea readout of the delay in picoseconds. The other models do not have any calibration. Note that these are relative readouts, not absolute (see the previous question). Q: What are the advantages and disadvantages of the inline version versus the reflector style? A: Generally the inline version gives the largest travel ranges versus the reflector style, and thus can produce the greatest delays. However the reflector style unit has the advantage that the fibers themselves do not move. This makes the reflector style the best choice for commercial applications as opposed to lab use. Q: Do I need special software to run the ODL-300 or ODL-650 delay lines? A: Both units are operated with simple text commands that can be sent via terminal programs such as Windows Hyperterminal. Active X control and Labview driver, as well as a direct Windows interface program are also provided. Q: What voltages and currents do the motor driven delay lines use? A: The ODL-300 requires an input voltage between 6 to 8 Volts, and can draw up to 400mA of current when the motor is turning. The ODL- 650 also requires 6 to 8 Volts, and can draw up to 180mA of current when operating. If necessary, the ODL-650 can be set up to work with a 5V supply voltage. However, that will limit the speed. If necessary, OZ Optics can provide a 12V version of the ODL-650 style delay line, which will accept supply voltages from 6V to 12.25V. This option will provide slightly greater speed. However it will consume more current than the standard model, and would have to be custom built. 6

135 Application Notes: Example Application: Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) is an important issue in the quest to build high speed (10GBs, 40GBs, and higher) communication networks. An input signal travelling along a single mode fiber normally has some distortion, due to polarization mode dispersion. The signal effectively has been split into two arbitrary, yet orthogonal polarizations, and one polarization is leading the other. A delay line is a crucial element in building compensators for PMD. The figure below shows how to use a delay line to compensate for polarization modes dispersion. The light from the singlemode input is split into two using a polarizing beam splitter. A polarization controller installed just before the splitter is used to convert the arbitrary polarizations that the signal has been split into S and P polarization. The faster S polarization is routed through the delay line while the slower P polarization is sent straight into the combiner. The combined signals then reach the receiver. A control system monitors the quality of the signal at the receiver, and dynamically adjusts the polarization and the delay to get the two signals to match up again. Thus the PMD is the system can be corrected in real time. Figure 6: PMD Compensation System Using a Variable Delay Line Mounting: The base of the delay lines have mounting holes for attachment to a rack or printed circuit board. For best results, the mounting surface should be rigid and free of vibration. Do not over-tighten the mounting screws and use screws that thread in no more than 2mm. Tightening the mounting screws too much will warp the base and potentially increase losses either temporarily or permanently Electrical Connections: The ODL-650 unit has a Hirose DF11-16P-2DS16-pin connector. The pin designations are given below: Pin Name Function Comment 1 GND Common Ground 2 GND Common Ground 3 Select Select TTL interface For TTL interface, Input Active Low 4 Vin Input DC supply voltage; (Min +6V Max +8V) For ODL-300 Max 400mA For ODL-650 Max 180mA 5 Reverse Move the motor in reveres For TTL interface, Input Active Low 6 Rx RS232- Receive input line 7 Forward Move the motor forward For TTL interface, Input Active low 8 Tx RS232- Transmit output line 9 N/A Do not connect Factory use 10 N/A Do not connect Factory use 11 Reset Hardware Reset line Active Low, Min 100mS 12 N/A Do not connect Factory use 13 End End limit switch TTL output, active low 14 N/A Do not connect Factory use 15 Home Home limit switch TTL output, active low 16 N/A Do not connect Factory use (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) (15) (2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) (16) Hirose 16-pin connector When you first connect the wire harness to the 16-pin port, make sure that the power is off. Before turning the power on, make sure that your connections have the correct voltage levels and polarity (given above). If you have ordered an RS-232 interface, the harness comes terminated with a DB9 connector that plugs directly into your computer's serial port. For special applications, the harness is left without a connector and must be terminated by the user for the communications type of their choice. 7

136 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) OPTICAL FIBER AMPLIFIERS FOR CATV APPLICATIONS Features Total output power from 25 mw to 5 W Low noise figure Up to 16 output ports Low CSO and CTB RS232, RS485, 10Base-T, and USB network interfaces High performance-to-cost ratio Custom design flexibility Applications Analog and digital HFC/CATV networks SONET/SDH systems Access Networks Free space communications Preliminary OEM Module Version of Optical Fiber Amplifier The OFAC series of high performance, low noise and high output power amplifiers are specially designed for CATV network systems, where signal distortion must be minimized. These amplifiers feature a low noise figure, and feature very low Composite Second Order (CSO) and Composite Triple Beat (CTB) distortion levels while providing output powers from 25 mw up to 5 Watts. Amplifiers can be provided in either single or multiple output versions, with up to 16 output ports. They can be used in both single wavelength and DWDM systems, thus providing the perfect opportunity to build flexible CATV network systems. OFAC amplifiers have a flexible architecture and can be customized to meet special requirements for electrical connections, packaging and optical characteristics. The amplifiers can be supplied in either a 19" rack-mount case, an OEM module format or in a gain block. Contact an OZ Optics sales representative for more details. Typical Performance Parameters Unit Value Total Output Power dbm 14 to 37 Input Power dbm -4 to +6 Standard Number of Output Ports 1,2,4,8,12 or 16 Port to Port Variation db +/-0.4 Maximum Operating Wavelength nm Standard 1 Fiber core/cladding diameters µm 9/125 Noise Figure (Pin = 0 dbm) db Typically <4.5 Input Pump Leakage dbm -30 (Maximum) Return Loss db 55 (Minimum) Operating Voltage V 100 to 120V or 200 to 240V, 50 or 60 Hz Operating Temperature Range C -10 to +50 Standard -10 to +65 Extended Storage Temperature Range C -40 to +80 Humidity % 0 to 95 Non-condensing 1Other wavelength ranges available upon request DTS0112 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 26-May-05 1

137 Packaging All OFAC amplifiers can be supplied in either a 19" rack-mount case, an OEM module format or in a gain block. Ordering information: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In certain cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. Questionnaire: 1. What gain do you require? 2. How flat do you require the spectrum of the amplifier to be? 3. Do you require that the amplifier be remotely controllable? If yes, what sort of interface do you prefer? 4. What is your operating wavelength range? 5. What style of fiber connectors do you use? 6. Do you need more than one output? 7. What sort of enclosure do you prefer? Description Optical Fiber Amplifier for CATV Part Number OFAC-N-B-P-W-S-F-X-O-I N P W S Number of Output Ports. Specify 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, or 16. The input signal will be amplified and split amongst the output ports. Maximum Output Power in dbm: Specify a value between 14 and 37, corresponding to 14 and 37 dbm respectively Wavelength range: 1540/1565 for 1540 to 1565 nm (Custom wavelength ranges are available. Contact OZ Optics with your specific requirements) Packaging style: 2 = Rack mountable 3 = OEM module 4 = Gain Block - No electronics provided, user must provide pump driver 9 = Custom I O X F Control interface: R = RS232 U = USB X = Not Applicable - ie. gain block version or basic version Options: A = Automatic gain control with microprocessor B = Basic version M = Microprocessor controlled. Receptacle style: 3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC E = E2000/PC EA = E2000/APC See table 6 of the standard table for other connector types Flatness: N = Non-flattened F = Flattened Standard Accessories: Bar Code Part Name Description 2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord 2736 POWER CORD - UK UK power cord 2

138 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features OPTICAL FIBER AMPLIFIERS FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS Total output power from 50 mw to 40 W 1 µm and 2 µm operating wavelengths Excellent beam quality RS232, RS485, 10Base-T, and USB network interfaces High performance-to-cost ratio Custom design flexibility Applications IR spectroscopy Medicine IR imaging Lidar Pollution control Research & Development Preliminary OEM Module Version of Optical Fiber Amplifier The OZ Optics optical fiber amplifier product line now includes the OFAS series of special optical amplifiers, designed to meet growing customer needs in IR spectroscopy, medicine, IR imaging, and other applications. These new optical fiber amplifiers provide output powers from 40 mw up to 40 W, at 1 micron and 2 micron wavelengths, with excellent beam quality. These amplifiers have a flexible architecture that can be customized to meet special demands with regards to electrical connections, packaging and optical characteristics. Contact an OZ Optics sales representative for more details. Bench Top Unit Version of Optical Fiber Amplifier Typical Performance Parameters Unit Value Operating Wavelength nm or Standard 1 Total Output Power dbm 17 to 25 or 30 to 46 at 1.06 µm 17 to 20 or 30 to 37 at 2.00 µm Input Power dbm -10 to +8 standard Operating Temperature Range C -10 to +50 Standard -10 to +65 Extended Storage Temperature Range C -40 to +80 Humidity % 0 to 95 Non-condensing 1Other wavelength ranges available upon request DTS0113 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 26-May-05 1

139 Packaging All OFAS amplifiers can be supplied in either a bench-top unit, a 19" rack-mount case, an OEM module format, or in a gain block. Ordering information: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In certain cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and/or a minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. Questionnaire: 1. What is your operating wavelength range? 2. What gain do you require? 3. How flat do you require the spectrum of the amplifier to be? 4. What sort of amplifier do you need (booster, pre-amplifier, In-line amplifier or Mid-Span amplifier)? 5. Do you require that the amplifier be remotely controllable? If yes, what sort of interface do you prefer? 6. What style of fiber connectors do you use? 7. What sort of enclosure do you prefer? Description Optical Fiber Amplifier for Special Applications Part Number OFAS-1-B-P-W-a/b-S-N-X-O-I P W a/b S Maximum output power in dbm: Specify a value between 17 and 46, depending on wavelength Wavelength range: 1050/1120 = 1050 to 1120 nm 1900/2100 = 1900 to 2100 nm (Custom wavelength ranges are available. Contact OZ Optics with your specific requirements) Fiber size: core/cladding diameters, in microns Packaging style: 2 = Rack mountable 3 = OEM module 4 = Gain Block - No electronics provided, user must provide pump driver 9 = Custom I O X Control interface: R = RS232 U = USB X = Not Applicable - ie. gain block version or basic version Options: A = Automatic gain control with microprocessor B = Basic version M = Microprocessor controlled. Receptacle style: 3 = Standard flat, Super, or Ultra FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC E = E2000/PC EA = E2000/APC See table 6 of the standard table for other connector types Standard Accessories: Bar Code Part Name Description 2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord 2736 POWER CORD - UK UK power cord 2

140 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Product Description The OZ-FR-110 and OZ-FR-120 are compact, cost-effective portable singlemode fiber fault-event data loggers. They are light, easy to use, and hence ideal for fiber cable troubleshooting, repairing, and restoration. Just like an OTDR, the fiber ranger injects the laser pulse into the fiber under test and picks up scattered and reflected optical signals. However, the structure of the fiber ranger is highly simplified to make it a low cost, high performance fiber optical test instrument. Although the fiber ranger neither displays the trace of the fiber nor gives any information about the fiber and event losses, it can identify types and locations of both based on a set of predetermined threshold values, and goes throughout the entire length of the fiber under test. OPTICAL FIBER RANGER Features Portable, compact, and low cost Backlit LCD display Membrane keypad ideal for fieldwork LED indicators for battery charging, and LD lasing status RS-232 port for data transmission Built-in Ni-MH rechargeable batteries Applications Fiber length measurements Fiber break point locating Fiber event identification Acceptance testing Fiber link supervision Fiber identification Figure 1: Handheld Optical Fiber Ranger DTS0100 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 23-Sept-04 1

141 Standard Product Specifications Model OZ-FR OZ-FR-120 Wavelength 1310±20nm 1550±20nm 1310±20nm Fiber Under Test 9/125 um singlemode fiber Optical Connector FC/PC SC Detection InGaAs InGaAs Max. Detection Range Reflection Event 80 km 100 km 20 km Non-Reflection Event 40 km 50 km 10 km Reflection Event Dead Zone 50 m 5 m Non-reflection Event Dead Zone (3dB) 200 m 20 m Distance Accuracy (Reflective Event Detection) Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight ±(2 m+ 3 x 10-5 x Distance) (Fiber refractive index error not included) 196 x 100 x 40 mm (7.72 x 3.94 x 1.57 in.) not including bumper size 600 g (1.32 lbs.) Temperature Operating: 0 to 40 C (32 to 104 F) Storage: -20 to 60 C (-4 to 140 F) Humidity Memory 0 to 95% (non-condensing) Up to 550 measurements Power Consumption Available Number of Tests for Fully Charged Battery: 10,000 Power Supply OZ-FR-110: AC adapter or a 7.2 V NiMH Battery; OZ-FR-120: 4 AA Alkaline Batteries Notes: Measurements are made at 23 ± 2 C. 2

142 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) OPTICAL POWER METER WITH SMART DETECTOR HEAD Features High-speed response (over 1000 readouts/s) Wavelengths: 440 to 900 nm for visible (VIS) and 800 to 1700 nm for infrared (IR) NIST traceable Built-in attenuator for 20 or 30 db attenuation; automatically detects when the attenuator is engaged Selectable sampling rate (from 7Hz to 1800Hz) Optional POM-110 hand-held display unit for controlling one or two detector heads Analog voltage output (optional) Interchangeable optical receptacles Mounting holes on sides and bottom Low power consumption (<60 ma at 5 V) Windows software drivers (Active-X Controls) for Visual Basic (1) and LabVIEW (2) Built-in RS-232 and I²C (3) interfaces USB version offered Selectable RS-232 baud rate (from 9600 to 115,200 bps) Wide dynamic range Can be used for free space applications Applications Automatic fiber optical alignment and collimation systems Multi-channel optical power measurements General optical power measurements such as IL measurement Multi-channel test set Network installation and maintenance Product Description The Smart Detector Head incorporates the features of a full-function optical power meter (except display) in a miniature housing. This makes it ideal for applications that require multiple detectors in a small space. By using a simple RS232 interface, the device can be used alone or in parallel with other devices to measure or monitor optical power. The Smart Detector Head has a fast response speed, wide dynamic range, and an optional analog output, making it well suited to a variety of applications. Using very simple commands, the Smart Detector Head can easily be adapted to custom requirements, such as optical alignment and collimation systems. The Smart Detector Head can provide readings in any convenient format including watts, dbm, db, or relative (P/Pref). More than one Smart Detector Head can be connected to a computer, with the number of units being limited only by the number of available serial ports. Multiple units can also be configured using I2C (3) interface. When used with a PC, a power supply provides power to the Smart Detector Head via an adaptor cable, which also connects the PC to the Smart Detector Head. The Smart Detector Head has a manually activated built-in selectable attenuator that can be inserted into the light path without disturbing the rest of the setup. The Smart Detector Head automatically senses the presence of the attenuator and corrects the light measurements accordingly. The Smart Detector Head can report the date of calibration, along with the serial number of the unit. Configuration information, including wavelength, reference power, and the units of measurement, is retained in internal, non-volatile memory when the unit is turned off. The Smart Detector Head can accommodate a variety of standard, interchangeable screw-in receptacles. Smart Detector Head Optical Power Meter And Interchangeable Receptacles Smart Detector Head Driven By Hand-Held Unit Smart Detector Head Driven By PC Smart Detector Head With Special Options Attachment RS-232 To GPIB Interface DTS0057 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 17-Feb

143 Ordering Information for Custom Parts: Smart Detector Head: W = Wavelength: IR = 800 to 1700 nm VIS = 440 to 900 nm SDH-W-Z Z = Other options: -ND=20 = Standard version with 20 db attenuator -ND=30 = High power version with 30 db attenuator -A-ND=20 = Standard version with 20 db attenuator and analog voltage output -A-ND=30 = High power version with 30 db attenuator and analog voltage output -NF = without attenuator filter Optical connector receptacle: SDHR-X X = Receptacle code: 2.5U = Universal receptacle for 2.5 mm diameter ferrules 3 = Standard flat, super, or ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) Q: Is the hand-held display unit POM-110 necessary for operating the Smart Detector Heads? A: No. The Smart Detector Heads can be driven by a PC. Q: What software comes with the Smart Detector Head? A: Windows: interface software Active-X Control for Visual Basic and LabVIEW driver. Q: I need to format the measurement data into a report. How can I do this? A: Remote control of the Smart Detector Head via a computer allows direct output of the readings to a text file. The data can then be imported into a spreadsheet program to draft the report. Q: Is analog output a standard feature? A: No. It is an option. Application Notes The Smart Detector Head provides optical power measurements with high resolution, high speed, and wide dynamic range. The SDH features high optical power measurement, programmable sampling rate, optional analog voltage output, and low power consumption. Several units can be used simultaneously to create a multi-channel measurement system. A PC can be used as a virtual instrument, with the Visual Basic and LabVIEW drivers, to make the SDH a reliable, flexible, and effective device for automatic fiber optical alignment and collimation, fiber optic assembling and testing, quality control and measurement, network installation, component and system troubleshooting, and general optical power measurement applications. Automatic fiber optical alignment In the manufacture of fiber optic components, it is often necessary to attach an optical fiber to a semiconductor device such as a laser diode, a semiconductor optical amplifier, an optical switch, or any of the other numerous types of opto-electronic devices. Coupling the light into the optical fiber is a very real problem in these applications. When the alignment tolerances are very tight, typically in the sub µm regime, auto alignment systems are required to achieve maximum coupling efficiency, and a power meter is needed to measure the optical power level. OZ Optics Smart Detector Head can communicate with a computer control system through an RS-232 or I²C interface. Optionally, a USB interface may be used. The high-speed sampling rate, of up to 1800 Hz, high resolution of 0.01 db, high dynamic range of 85 db, and analog voltage signal output make the SDH a good choice for rapid and accurate alignment. High-power measurement Except for preamplifiers, which are designed to generate a few mw at most, all optical amplifiers generate power levels that exceed the measurement range of conventional power meters. Today, the highest powers from EDFA exceed 1 W. When the output power is a key parameter, the question is: How can such large power levels be measured with good accuracy and good reliability? 6

144 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: Controls Output Power to ±0.1dB 35dB dynamic range Millisecond Response Speed Single and Multi-channel Versions Singlemode and PM Fiber Versions OEM, Rack Mountable, and Stand Alone Versions Applications: Power Stabilization in DWDM Networks Signal Conditioning in Test Equipment Optical Power Regulators Stand Alone Optical Power Regulator Product Description: OZ Optics has successfully combined its expertise in variable attenuators with its optical power monitor technology to develop an optical power regulator. This product allows one to maintain the output optical power from a fiber optic system at a constant level, countering changes caused by PDL, reduced amplifier gain, or other sources. Preliminary The optical power regulator uses the output from an optical power monitor as feedback to control an attenuator. An analog feedback circuit uses the power monitor signal to control the attenuator behavior. Simple controls allow the user to enable or disable the feedback circuit, monitor the signal intensity, and control the output power through the fiber. The system can maintain output power levels constant to better than ±0.1 db, with millisecond response speed. Optical power regulators are used wherever one has an unstable output from and optical fiber and one needs a more stable signal. They are ideal for power stabilization in DWDM networks, where changes in power can produce transmission errors. The complete unit is available either as a miniature module that can be integrated into other devices, a stand alone module for testing, or as a rack mountable unit for optical networks. Contact OZ Optics for further information. Standard Product Specifications: Minimum Insertion Loss 1dB Typically Attenuation Range 50dB Input power range -30dBm to +25dBm Wavelength Dependent Response ±0.25dB (over the wavelength range of nm) 1 Polarization Dependence ±0.1dB 1 Results given for an optical power regulator for 1550nm. Responses for regulators for other wavelengths will vary. DTS0058 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 03/21/03 1

145 Questionnaire 1. Do you need a stand alone unit, a rackmountable unit, or a miniature OEM unit? 2. What is the operating wavelength? 3. What type of fiber are you using (singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining (PM)? What are the core and cladding sizes? 4. What type of connectors are you using? 5. Is there a minimum return loss specification? Ordering Information: Optical Power Regulator OPR-A-W-a/b-F-XY-LB A model Type: 100 = Stand Alone Unit 200 = Rack Mountable Unit 300 = OEM unit LB = Backreflection level. 50dB for singlemode and polarization maintaining fibers, W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers: Example: 1300/1550 for standard telecom wavelength range a/b = Fiber Core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber. See standard tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes X = Connector code : 3S= Super NTT-FC/PC 3U= Ultra NTT- FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT-FC-PC 8= AT&T-ST SC= SC SCA = Angled SC See standard tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes F = Fiber Type: S=Singlemode P=Polarization Maintaining Ordering Examples for Custom Parts A customer needs a stand alone optical power regulator to control the power from his 980nm pump laser in a fiber amplifier unit. The customer is using singlemode fiber for that wavelength, which has a 6 micron core and a 125 micron cladding. He requires a unit with FC/APC connectors on both ends. The OZ Optics part number is as follows: OPR /125-S-3A3A-50 Application Notes Figure 1 show the basic concept behind the optical power regulator. Light from the source is sent through an electrically controlled variable optical attenuator. An optical power monitor is connected to the attenuator output. The monitor taps a small amount of light from the fiber and measures the signal intensity. This signal is fed into the feedback circuitry to control the attenuator. The user sets the desired output power from an external control knob. The feedback circuit can be enabled or disabled though an external switch. An analog output voltage allows external monitoring. Figure 1: Operating Principle of the Optical Power Regulator 2

146 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) OPTICAL TIME-DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER Product Description OZ-OTDR is a compact, cost-effective portable Optical Timedomain Reflectometer (OTDR), designed for full-range fiber fault detection. It delivers the same features as a desktop model. Designed specifically with fieldwork in mind it is ideal for optical fiber installation/maintenance, field construction, and other on-site fault-locations analysis. Its outputs are formatted to ease planning and documentation efforts and to minimize time spent on-site. The OTDR encompasses two parts: a plug-in module (OZ-MMO) which performs all OTDR functions, and a Mainframe Interface (OZ-MFI) console which provides power, data interfaces, an LCD display, a touch-screen input, and a built-in thermal printer. On the OZ-MMO, a short laser pulse is injected into the fiber under test and an avalanche photodiode (APD) picks up any scattered and reflected optical signals. This process is repeated again and again and an integration process is also invoked to suppress the noise. The OZ-MFI Console (OZ-MFI-001) is a miniature based computer that is powered by four rechargeable Lithium Ion batteries or AC. The application program (AP) execution sequence is done automatically using the touchscreen commands, and the digitized waveform is displayed in 3 seconds. The AP consists of two windows. The Event Handling window (default) allows for parameter setting, measurement data storage and event analysis processing. The Event Mapping window provides mapping of a measured trace to a predefined landmark table, and subsequently the actual fault location, instead of pure distance, can be shown. Applications On-line monitoring Fiber length measurements Fiber break point location Acceptance testing Fiber attenuation measurements Splicing loss detection Features Fault event analysis software Real-time display Touch LCD, high resolution screen Mapping function with actual position display Rugged, handheld and easy to use RS-232 output port for a PC interface Powered by either rechargeable Lithium Ion battery or AC Emulation program for data analysis PC Figure 1: Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer Figure 2: Typical Operating Displays DTS0099 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 23-Sept-04 1

147 Standard Product Specifications: OZ-MFI-001 Processor Memory Storage Display Pointing Device Printer Dimensions (L x W x H) Weight Battery Life Power supply Am486DX5 133MHz 16 MB DRAM 1. Compact Flash Card 32 Mbytes " Floppy disk 10.4" TFT VGA (VRAM 1MB /256 Color) Touch screen Built-in 320 x 240 x 60 mm 3.6 kg 3 hours Lithium Ion Battery (10.8 VDC) & AC charge adaptor (100~240 V. 50~60 Hz) Standard Product Specifications: OZ-MMO Modules Model OZ-MMO-320 OZ-MMO-321 Wavelength 1310/1550 ± 20 nm 1550/1625 ± 20 nm Dynamic Range (db) Fiber Under Test Optical Connector Pulse Width (ns) Event Dead Zone 9/125 µm singlemode fiber FC/PC 10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, 3000, 10000, 20000, Auto Effective 35/33 33/31 SNR=1 38/36 36/34 5 m Attenuation Dead Zone Sampling Resolution 40 m 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 m Max. Sampling Points 128,000 Distance Accuracy Linearity Return Loss Accuracy Max. Display Range ±(2 m + 3 x 10-5 x distance + marker resolution) (Fiber refractive index error not included) ± 0.05 db/db or 0.1 db (whichever is greater) ± 4 db 240 km (150 mile) Notes: Measurements are made at 23 ± 2 C. All brands and product names are trademarks of their respective holders. Order Information OZ-FPL-320 OZ-MFI-001 x 1+ OZ-MMO-320 x 1+ all accessories x 1 OZ-FPL-321 OZ-MFI-001 x 1+ OZ-MMO-321 x 1+ all accessories x 1 2

148 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) PRELIMINARY DATA SHEET POLARIZATION DEPENDENT LOSS EMULATOR Features: Fixed or manually controllable Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL) Low insertion loss Broad wavelength range Wide range of connectors available Rugged and compact design Low cost Applications: PDL Compensation Reference PDL source Test Equipment PDL calibration Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator Product Description: OZ Optics produces a Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) Emulator. The emulator produces a specific amount of polarization dependent loss by transmitting the light through a tiltable optical window. The orthogonal polarizations will have different transmission and reflection properties through the window, according to Fresnel's laws of reflection. This produces the PDL effect. Emulators are available with either a fixed PDL (between 0.05 and 1dB) or a variable PDL(between 0.05 and 0.5dB). The PDL emulator is used to simulate the PDL behavior of a passive component within an optical link. This includes devices like variable optical attenuators, optical modulators, array waveguides, fiber Bragg gratings, optical switches or fused couplers. One can thus examine the effects of PDL in a system, and work out a PDL budget for an optical link. OZ Optics also produces a polarization dependent loss meter, and polarized stable sources, and polarization controllers, to further help study the effect of polarization in optical systems. Please refer to the related data sheets for detailed information. Ordering Information For Standard Parts: Bar Code Part Number Description PDLE /125-S-3U3U nm, manually variable 0.5dB Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator with 1m long, singlemode fiber with 3 mm OD jacket, terminated with Ultra FC/PC connectors PDL /1650-9/125-S Polarization Dependent Loss meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacles for wavelengths from 1250nm to 1650nm 2836 FOSS-01-3S-9/ S-1 Fiber Optic Stable Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelength, 1 mw output, for 9/125 core/cladding singlemode fiber with super FC/PC receptacle. Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: A research center wants to introduce varying amounts of PDL into a WDM fiber optic network link and evaluate the induced bit error rate. They need to order the following parts: Bar Code Part Number Description PDLE /125-S-3U3U nm, manually variable 0.5dB Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator with 1m long, singlemode fiber with 3 mm OD jacket, terminated with Ultra FC/PC connectors PDL /1650-9/125-S Polarization Dependent Loss meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacle for wavelengths from 1250nm to 1650nm DTS0065 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 04/02 1

149 Standard Product Specifications 1 : Part number Wavelength range 2 Fiber Type Connector Type PDL Dynamic Range 3 Insertion Loss Optical Return Loss PDLE /125-S-3U3U nm to 1590 nm (for uniform PDL) 9/125µm single mode fiber with 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC Jacket Ultra Polished Physical Contact NTT-FC connector 0.05 db to 0.5 db < 2 db > 50 db Operating temperature 0 to 40 C Storage temperature Max input Power 4-10 to +60 C with < 80% none-condensing relative humidity 200 mw 1 Reference condition: 23 C measured with 1mw, 1550 nm fiber optic stable source after 30 minutes warm-up period 2 Broader wavelength range can be provided upon request 3 Fixed PDL value between 0.05 and 1dB can be ordered 4 Higher power handling can be provided upon request Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. Do you want a fixed PDL emulator or a variable one? 2. What is the PDL level you require? 3. What is your operating wavelength range? 4. What type of connectors are you using? 5. How long should the fibers be? 6. What is the fiber core/cladding diameters and fiber jacket OD? Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator: PDLE-1A-W-a/b-S-XY-JD-L-V A = 0 for fixed PDL value 1 for manually variable PDL value W = Wavelength in nm: 980,1064, 1310,1480,1550,1625 a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns. 6/125 for 980, 1064nm wavelengths 9/125 for 1310, 1480, 1550 or 1625nm wavelengths X,Y = Input & Output Connector Codes 3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT- FC/PC SC=SC SCA=Angled SC 8= AT&T-ST MU= MU type connector LC= LC type connector X=Unterminated V = PDL values in db, between 0.05dB to 1dB for fixed type 0.5, for variable type with range from 0.05dB to 0.5dB L = Fiber length in meters JD = Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable Ordering Examples for Custom Parts: A test equipment manufacturer needs a 0.25dB fixed PDL Emulator for 1550nm to use as a reference. As they intend to splice the device into their system, they want 2 meter long leads, no connectors, and 0.9mm cable. Part number is as follows: PDLE /125-S-XX Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): Q: Is the variable emulator calibrated? A: The current manual design has a scale but is not calibrated. Calibrated versions will be available shortly. Q: Does the insertion loss listed in the specifications include the PDL? A: Yes, it does. 2

150 Features: 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Fast PDL measurement (< 1sec) Insensitive to external power drift Very low variation in internal loss (<0.003dB) Wide wavelength range operability Swept wavelength capability High resolution Statistical measurement analysis Replaceable detector receptacles Built in graphical interface with color touch screen display Optional high power versions Low cost Large PDL dynamic range Applications: Optical passive component qualification and testing Characterization of PDL dependency versus wavelength Fiber Bragg Grating qualification Polarization Dependent Gain (PDG) measurement of EDFA Quality Control Product Description: POLARIZATION DEPENDENT LOSS METER Polarization Dependent Loss Meter With Source And Device Under Test OZ Optics produces a Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) meter that integrates a sophisticated optoelectronic design with a user friendly interface. The meter is designed to be insensitive to external optical power drift and generates very low insertion loss fluctuations during a measurement cycle. OZ Optics' PDL meter can be used to measure any pigtailed optical passive components acurately and repeatably, including fiber array wave guides, variable optical attenuators, isolators, couplers, switches and other optical devices. The meter offers the capability of quickly characterizing PDL versus wavelength over a specified wavelength range. This is useful for testing a variety of optical components such as fiber Bragg Gratings. The meter is capable of acquiring and statistically analyzing multiple PDL measurements during a user-adjustable period of time. The meter includes a built-in computer using the Windows TM CE operating system and a color touch screen. The built-in graphical display makes data analysis easy. The unit can be remotely operated via the serial interface port (RS232, RS485) or via a parallel printer port. An optional GPIB to RS232 converter is also available. OZ Optics provides fixed and variable polarization dependent loss emulators. These emulators produce a precise level of polarization dependent loss, from 0.05 to 1dB. These devices can be used as references for calibration if required. OZ Optics also offers polarized fiber optic sources, singlemode patchcords and polarization maintaining patchcords to complete your test setup. See the related data sheets for details. TM Windows is a trade mark of Microsoft Corporation Ordering Information For Standard Parts: Bar Code Part Number Description PDL /1650-9/125-S Polarization Dependent Loss meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacles, adapted for wavelengths from 1250nm to 1650nm 2836 FOSS-01-3S-9/ S-1 Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 1550 nm wavelength, 1 mw output, for 9/125 core/cladding singlemode fiber using Super FC/PC receptacle FOSS-01-3S-9/ S-1 Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source with 1310 nm wavelength, 1 mw output, for 9/125 core/cladding singlemode fiber using super FC/PC receptacle SMJ-3U3U-1300/1550-9/ Ultra FC/PC to Ultra FC/PC, 9/125um singlemode jumper 1300/1550nm fiber, 3mm OD PVC jacketed, 1 meter long PDLE /125-S-3U3U nm, 0.05 to 0.5dB manually variable Polarization Dependent Loss Emulator, with 1m long singlemode fibers, with 3mm OD jacket, terminated with Ultra FC/PC connectors GPIB-RS232 RS232 to GPIB Converter 4571 GPIB-CABLE-2 GPIB Cable, 2m Long 2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE Power cord for Europe 2736 POWER CORD - UK Power cord for UK plug DTS0066 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 04/02 1

151 Standard Product Specifications 1 : Part number Measurement Method Wavelength range Fiber Type PDL Dynamic Range Accuracy 2 Repeatability Insertion Loss Optical Return Loss Max input power 3 Scan time PDL /1650-9/125-S Random method as described in FOTP-157 (TIA/EIA ) 1250 nm to 1650 nm Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber to 30 db ±0.005dB + 5% of PDL ±0.003dB + 2% of PDL < 4 db < -50 db 1 mw < 1 s Operating temperature 10 to 40 C Storage temperature -10 to 60 C Dimensions (H-W-D) External Controls Weight Input voltage 4 Display 18 cm x 27 cm x 30 cm RS-232, RS-485 DB-9 type connector, or Parallel Printer Port 5 kg 100 to 240 V AC / 50 to 60 Hz Color touch screen Notes: 1 For 1550nm and 1310nm +/-40nm and at reference condition: 23 C ambient temperature after 30 minutes warm-up period 2 Measured at 1550nm and 1310nm with 0.5 mw pigtailed Fabry-Perot source up to 20dB. Lower accuracy will be obtained above 20dB 3 Higher input power available upon request. 4 Standard product comes with a North American power cord. Other power cords are available as accessories Ordering Example For Standard Parts: A North American Optical Passive component R&D facility wants to measure the PDL dependency versus wavelength of Fiber Bragg Gratings across the C-band. We assume they are using their own tunable optical source. They need to order these following parts: Bar Code Part Number Description PDL /1650-9/125-S Polarization Dependent Loss Meter with Ultra FC/PC receptacles for wavelengths from 1250nm to 1650nm 8136 SMJ-3U3U-1300/1550-9/ Ultra FC/PC to Ultra FC/PC, 9/125um singlemode jumper 1300/1550nm fiber, 3mm OD PVC jacketed, 1 meter long Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is the output power of your source? 2. What is the PDL range suitable for your application? 3. Do you plan to test PDL dependency versus wavelength? 4. What type of connector do you need? 5. What is the dynamic range you require? Polarization Dependent Loss Meter: PDL X-1250/1650-9/125-S X 1 = Receptacle Code for detector: 3= Standard, Super, Ultra NTT- FC/PC Receptacle 3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC SC=SC SCA=Angled SC 8= AT&T-ST 2.5U= Universal Receptacle MU= MU type connector LC= LC type connector Note: 1 Detector receptacle is replaceable. 2

152 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) POLARIZATION EXTINCTION RATIO MEASUREMENT TEST SETFOR V-GROOVE ASSEMBLIES AND PM PATCHCORDS Features: Measures up to 40dB extinction ratios Complete kit for extinction ratio measurement Simple operation Applications: Fiber optic component manufacturing Automated alignment Quality control and measurement Product development Component or system troubleshooting Polarization Extinction Ratio Measurement Test Set Product Description: OZ Optics has bundled its polarized sources, polarization extinction ratio meters and master reference patchcords into one complete test set for rapid testing of the polarization maintaining properties of optical components. We offer systems for testing devices terminated with connectors, and now systems for testing the polarization properties of V-Groove arrays. For standard components, the extinction ratio measurement system includes a polarized source with a rotatable polarizer, a polarization extinction ratio meter, a quick connect adaptor for the extinction ratio meter, and a reference polarization maintaining patchcord. For V-Groove arrays, OZ Optics offers an OEM version of the polarization measurement system. A manual operated type and semi-automated type. The test set includes the polarized source with rotatable polarizer, an OEM version of the extinction ratio meter with external optics, a V-Groove mount with a three axis position system, with one axis motorized for semi-automated type, a reference V-Groove array with a single PM fiber, and an application software package for semi-automated type. The user only has to supply a Windows based computer to operate the system as a semi-automated test bed. Although extinction ratio measurement test sets are supplied as complete units, one may later need to purchase additional accessories, such as receptacles or reference patchcords for other connector types. These products are readily available. For further information, please refer to the following data sheets: Sources and Accessories Meters and Accessories Reference Patchcords Polarized Fiber Optic Source Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter, Polarization Maintaining Patchcord, V-Groove Assemblies Polarizartion Extinction Ratio Measurement Test Set For V-Groove Assemblies DTS0068 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 01/17/03 1

153 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What wavelength are you using? 2. What is the minimum acceptable polarization extinction ratio for the source? 3. What should be the minimum extinction ratio rating of the polarization extinction ratio meter? 4. What type of connector are you using on the source side? 5. What type of connector are you using on the detector side? 6. Do you need a custom mount? 7. Do you need a manual system or semi-automated system? Polarization Extinction Ratio Measurement System: PER-KIT-XY-W-1(-ER=ZZ)¹ X = Source Connector Code: 3 = Standard Flat, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC MU = MU Consult factory for special connector and ferrule adaptors. ¹ ZZ: Extinction Ratio: None if 30dB is required. If an ER > 30dB is required, enter ER=35 or ER=40 respectively for ER=35dB or ER=40dB. W = Wavelength Range (in nm) Example: (1550 for 1550nm, 1310 for 1310nm, 980 for 980nm) MAN: = Add to part number for manual type V-Groove measurement system Y = Meter Connector Code: 3 = Standard Flat, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC MU = MU VGA = V-Groove array Consult factory for special connector and ferrule adaptors. ER-Measurement Test System for V-Groove (Manual Type) Application Notes: PM V-Groove Array ER Measurements OZ Optics ER Meters for PM V-Groove arrays provide fast and accurate extinction ratio measurements of V-Groove assemblies manufactured with PM fiber. The semi-automated system is computer controlled for hassle free control and measurements. The system consists of a polarized light source, 3 axis measurement micro-stage with one axis motorized, an extinction ratio display set and PC software to control the system. The stage and meter display are connected to a PC using RS-232 cables. The system is capable of measuring extinction ratios up to 40dB with an accuracy of 1.5. Operating The PM V-Groove Array ER Measurement Test Set The system works by first setting the software configurations for the appropriate V-Groove size and spacing. The V-Groove chip is then attached to the mounting stage and the opposite end of the fiber is attached to the polarized source. After adjusting the stage to roughly align the fiber to the meter, the software is started to take the ER measurement and automatically move the array to the next fiber position. Manual recording of the measured ER and angle is required at this point; optional software is available to log the measurements for later use. At the software prompt, the user must change the fiber on the polarized source so the next measurement can be taken. 4

154 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) POLARIZATION EXTINCTION RATIO METER Features: Measures up to 40dB extinction ratios (over specific wavelength ranges) Built in RS232 Communications Interface Wide wavelength range: 450 to 900 nm for visible; 850 to 1650 nm for IR 0.01dB resolution in ER and 0.3 resolution in angle Accuracy in ER is 1dB, in angle is 0.5 Measures up to 2 Watts CW input power Rugged and compact design Logging mode for continuous measurement Interchangeable connector adaptors CE Compliant LOW COST! Applications: Fiber optic component manufacturing Automated alignment Quality control and measurement Product development Component or system troubleshooting Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter Product Description: OZ Optics Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter allows one to quickly measure the output extinction ratio of light from a fiber. A rotating polarizer measures the extinction ratio and the orientation of the transmission axis with respect to the key on the connector. As an option, neutral density filters can be added to the Extinction Ratio Meter, to extend the maximum power range. These filters can be easily inserted and removed, without disturbing your setup. These filters allow power levels up to 2 Watts to be measured. The meter operates in several modes. In real time mode, the meter gives the extinction ratio and alignment. In logging mode, the meter gives the worst case extinction ratio over a given time span. This mode is ideal for QA measurements. In addition the meter can provide a relative power readout, proportional to the input power in db. This readout is updated at up to 650 times per second. The computer interface allows the unit to be used with computer control units, for alignment purposes. The combination of polarization and relative power functions allows the unit to be used for complete auto-alignment of polarization maintaining components. DTS0067 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 2-Sept-04 1

155 Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1) What is your application? 2) Will you be using the device at a specific wavelength? 3) What is the maximum extinction ratio that you will need to measure? 4) Do you require external control from a computer? 5) What type of computer interface do you require? 6) What is the maximum power level that you will be using? 7) What type of connector will you be using? X = Connector Code: 3 = Standard Flat, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC MU = MU 2.5U = Universal adaptor for 2.5 mm diameter ferrules 1.25U = Universal adaptor for 1.25 mm diameter ferrules Consult factory for special connector and ferrule adaptors. P = Attenuation Level: 10dB, 20dB, 30dB or 35dB Note: For attenuations over 20dB, specify the wavelength in nm Description Extinction Ratio Meter: Connector Adaptors: Attenuators: Part Number ER-100-W ER-2X-W ER-ND-P-W W = Wavelength Range (in nm) IR for nm VIS for nm Note: If an ER of 40dB is required then specify either 980/1060 or 1290/1650 for the wavelength, and add -ER=40 to the part number. ER>40 db is only achieved on IR models over 980 to 1060 nm, and 1290 to 1650 nm wavelength ranges. Reference Patchcords: PMJ-XY-W-a/b ER=30-G X,Y = Connector Code: 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC connector 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC connector 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC MU = MU Consult factory for special connector and ferrule adaptors. W = Wavelength (in nm): Example: (1550 for 1550 nm, 1300 for 1300 nm, 980 for 980 nm) a/b = Fiber core and cladding sizes, in microns: (6/125 for 980 nm PM fiber, 7/125 for 1300 nm PM fiber, 8/125 for 1550 nm PM fiber) Ordering Example for Custom Parts: A Canadian manufacturer of high power WDM for EDFA applications wants to do incoming extinction ratio qualification, at 980 nm, of any purchased optical components prior to using them in his systems. They need to order these following parts: Bar Code Part Number Description n/a HIPFOSS-02-3A BL-ER= nm, 10 mw Highly Stable Polarized Fiber Optic Source with an angled FC receptacle, rotatable polarizer, achieving over 40dB extinction ratio. BL= blocking style attenuator ER /1060-ER= nm, Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter. ER = 40dB. Receptacle is not included ER-23A-980/1060-ER= nm, Angled FC Removable Receptacle for ER Meter. ER = 40dB 8704 ER-ND-20-IR 20 db attenuator for ER Meter for wavelengths from 850 nm to 1650 nm n/a PMJ-3A3A-980-6/ ER=30-G Master patchcord, angled FC/PC to angled FC/PC, 6/125 um PM 980 nm fiber, 0.9 mm OD jacketed, 1 meter long with connectors aligned and locked to the slow axis, ER=30dB minimum 4

156 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) FEATURES: High Extinction Ratios Broad Wavelength Range High Power Handling up to 2 Watt Small, Rugged Packages Low Insertion Losses Large Volume Manufacturing Capacity Low Cost! POLARIZATION MAINTAINING AND POLARIZING SPLITTERS/COMBINERS APPLICATIONS Polarization Mode Dispersion Compensation EDFA Amplifiers Coherent Telecommunication Systems Fiber Optic Sensors SPECIFICATIONS Splitting Ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 for polarization maintaining splitters Insertion Loss: Typically 0.6dB Return Losses: -40, -50 and -60dB versions Cross Talk: Typically less than -40dB Wavelengths: nm Extinction Ratios: >20dB, 25dB and 30dB versions for polarizing splitters Miniature In-Line Style Miniature T-Branch Style Power Rating: Operating Temp: Up to 2W CW at 1550nm -20 C to +60 C PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OZ Optics beam splitters are used to divide and couple light into two or more fibers. Light from one or two input fibers is first collimated, then sent through a beamsplitting surface to divide it in two. The resultant output beams are then focused back into the output fibers. By utilizing OZ Optics' patented tilt alignment technique, both one-by-two and two-by-two splitters can be constructed with both low insertion losses and low backreflection levels. Furthermore, splitters can be built with different types of fiber on the input and output sides. For example, a polarizing splitter could be built using a normal singlemode fiber as an input, and two polarization preserving fibers as outputs. Polarizing beam splitters take an input beam of light and divide it into two orthogonal polarizations. The output is typically polarized to greater than 20 db extinction ratio from the splitter outputs. A polarizing beam splitter can also be used in the reverse direction to combine two polarized beams into a single output fiber. Broadband polarizing splitters are also available, operating at both 1300nm and 1550nm, with only a 0.3dB variation in the T 2 Standard Pigtail Style insertion losses over the wavelength range. Versions are also available for 400 to 700nm, and for 700 to 1100nm wavelengths. Non-polarizing splitters will split an input beam of light at a fixed splitting ratio independent of the input polarization state, and without modifying the light's polarization. These splitters are polarization insensitive over a wavelength range of ±30nm from the specified central wavelength. One-by-two and two-by-two polarization maintaining splitters are made in this fashion. All input and output ports will maintain polarization to greater than 20dB with this technique. Splitters that maintain 30dB extinction ratios and lower than 40dB cross talk are available on request. R 1 DTS0069 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. March-01 1

157 APPLICATIONS Because of the inherent flexibility of the OZ Optics splitter design, an almost limitless set of configurations are possible. The following set of examples show only a few of the possible applications. 1. Polarizing splitter / polarization combiner: A 1 2 splitter is required to split the light from a 1300nm singlemode fiber into two orthogonal polarizations, and then transmit the two signals along two PM fibers. This splitter could also be used in the reverse direction to combine the light from two PM fibers into one singlemode fiber. The two PM fibers are aligned such that for either output port the light is transmitted along the slow axis of the fiber. The output extinction ratios from the PM fibers must be at least 30dB, while the typical backreflection will be 25dB. The singlemode input fiber is terminated with a male FC connector, while the two output fibers are unterminated. All three fibers are cabled using 3mm O.D. kevlar cabling, and are one meter long. OZ Optics' part number:fobs-12p-111-9/125-spp-1300-pbs-25-3xx-3-1-er=30 3. Polarization Analyzer: The output from a 1300nm singlemode fiber is connected to the input of a connector receptacle style one-by-two splitter. The analyzer consists of a polarizing splitter, an input collimator, and two focusing lenses. The output from each port of the splitter is then connected to a multimode fiber, and the resultant output powers monitored. In this manner one can study the output polarization of light from the fiber. For 1300nm fibers, terminated with ST connectors, the part number for the analyzer with corresponding receptacles is: FOBS SMM-1300-PBS. 2. Polarization preserving splitter: A two-by-two 50/50 splitter is required to combine the light from two 1550nm PM fibers and split the combined light into two other PM fibers. The input and output fibers must all maintain polarization to at least 20 db, and the backreflection level should be around -60dB. All four fibers are one meter long, in 1mm O.D. tubing, and unterminated. OZ part number: FOBS-22P /125-PPPP /50-60-XXXX-1-1. An alternative setup for an analyzer is available with photodiodes attached directly to the output ports rather than using focusing optics and multimode fibers. Such a system can reduce costs and improve coupling efficiency. OZ Optics' part number: FOBS-12-8XX-SDD-1300-PBS. 2

158 4. Backreflection Monitor: A customer wishes to monitor fluorescence from a sample by analyzing the signal being backreflected along a fiber. The input signal is 488nm light transmitted along a singlemode fiber. The input goes into port T of a receptacle style beam splitter, and goes out through port 1 into a second singlemode fiber. Half of the light is coupled into a multimode fiber at port 2 in order to monitor the source power. Port R is then aligned to couple as much of the backreflected signal from port 1 as possible into a singlemode fiber, while simultaneously rejecting any light reflected from port 2. Ports T, R, and 1 have FC receptacles, while port 2 has an AT&T--ST connector. OZ Optics part number: FOBS SSSM /50 5. Collimated source to fiber splitter with variable splitting ratio: A customer wants to couple light from a polarized 488/514nm Ar-Ion laser with 1-32 TPI female receptacle into two PM fibers. Both fibers have FC connectors. By using a broadband polarizing splitter to divide the light from the laser, one can rotate the splitter to adjust the splitting ratio between the two fibers to any desired ratio. Achromat lenses are then used to couple the light with equal efficiency for the 488nm and 514nm Ar-Ion laser lines. OZ Optics part number:ulbs-133-pp-488/514-pbs- 3.5AC-1. A similar system is available for non-collimated sources, such as laser diodes. For these items a lens is used to initially collimate the source. Add BL to the part # if blocking attenuator is required for each output end. 6. Laser diode to fiber coupler with monitoring photodiode: A 90/10 beam splitter is used to split the signal from an 830nm laser diode. Ninety percent of the light is coupled into a 2 meter long, 3.0mm O.D. cabled PM fiber, terminated with an FC connector. The remaining ten percent is reflected to a monitoring photodiode. The typical backreflection level is 25dB. In this manner, one can independently monitor the output power emitted by the laser diode before it enters the fiber. OZ Optics part number: ULBS-12P-5/125-PD / X

159 One unique property of OZ Optics two-by-two splitters is their directionality. Normally OZ Optics splitters are designed to be bi-directional. The coupling efficiencies from ports 1 and 2 into port R are similar to those from port T into ports 1 and 2. In some cases however, it is desirable to couple light from only one port into port R. An example would be a backreflection monitoring system. Light is coupled from port T into ports 1 and 2. Port 1 is used as a sensor, while port 2 is used to monitor the source power. The splitter can be factory adjusted so that only light from port 1 is reflected back into port R, not port 2. ORDERING INFORMATION: One by Two Pigtail Style Splitter FOBS-12P-111-a/b-ABC-W-S/R-LB-XYZ-JD-L Package Size: P for standard pigtail style T for miniature T shape style N for miniature Inline style Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm singlemode fiber. See tables 1 to 5 for other standard fiber sizes Fiber Type: Wavelength: Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 Use PBS for polarizing splitters M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) Backreflection level:40, 50, or 60dB. 60dB version available for 1300nm and 1550nm only Fiber length, in meters Fiber Jacket 0.25 = 250 Micron OD acrylate jacket Type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other jacket sizes Connector Code: 3 = NTT-FC/PC 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC LC = LC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors Two by Two Pigtail Style Splitter FOBS-22P-111-a/b-ABCD-W-S/R-LB-XYZT-JD-L Package Size: P for standard pigtail style T for miniature T shape style N for miniature Inline style Fiber core/cladding sizes in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm singlemode fiber. See tables 1 to 5 for other standard fiber sizes Fiber Type: Wavelength: M = Multimode Splitting ratio: 50/50 to 95/5 Use PBS for polarizing splitters S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550nm) Backreflection level:40, 50, or 60dB. 60dB version available for 1300nm and 1550nm only Fiber length, in meters Fiber Jacket 0.25 = 250 Micron OD acrylate jacket Type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other jacket sizes Connector Code: 3 = NTT-FC/PC 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC LC = LC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors NOTE 1: For extinction ratios higher than 30dB, add the term -ER=30 to the end of the part number for 1300nm and 1550nm 1x2 splitter only. For other wavelengths, 2x2 splitters, and 1300nm nm broadband splitters, add - ER=25 to the end of the part number for extinction ratios higher than 25dB. NOTE 2: When ordering fiber splitters, please indicate how you wish to align the polarization axis of each PM fiber. The OZ Optics standard is to align all PM fibers such that output light is transmitted along the slow axis of the fiber. 4

160 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) POLARIZATION MAINTAINING FIBER PATCHCORDS AND CONNECTORS Features: High extinction ratios of 20dB to 30dB Low insertion losses, typically <0.3dB Excellent repeatability of ±0.2dB Custom angles are available FC/PC, SC, ST, LC, or MU terminations available Custom ferrule terminations available FC/PC terminations are offered with either a rotatable polarization axis, or prealigned fixed Compatible with industry standard connectors Designed to meet Telcordia specifications Applications: High speed (10Gbs/40Gbs) Telecommunications Interferometric Sensors Integrated Optics Fiber Amplifiers Coherent Telecommunications Product Description: Polarization Maintaining (PM) patchcords are based on a high precision butt-style connection technique. The PM axis orientation is maintained by using male connectors with a positioning key and a bulkhead female receptacle with a tightly toleranced keyway, ensuring good repeatability in extinction ratios and insertion losses. The polarization axis of a fiber is aligned with the connector key by rotating either the connector frame or the fiber itself until the polarization axis is in line with keyway of the connector. Once the fiber is correctly aligned, the alignment can be fixed with a drop of glue or epoxy. OZ Optics minimizes backlash and rotational errors in the PM axis alignment by using specially designed PM ferrules and connector housings. Patchcords are normally offered prealigned and referenced with the slow axis aligned to the connector key for optimum coupling efficiency and extinction ratios. Non-angled FC PM connectors are also available unaligned and unlocked (rotatable) for lab use. Unless otherwise specified, prealigned patchcords are oriented such that the slow axis of the fiber is aligned with the key of the connector and locked, as shown in figure 1. These patchcords maintain polarization to better than 20dB. Higher extinction ratios are available upon request. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. This includes patchcords with 80 micron cladding sizes. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. OZ Optics uses a 2.00mm housing key for its standard FC/PC PM connector design. This is known also as a type R keywidth. Also available are FC/PC connectors with a 2.14mm housing keys (Type N ). Sleeve through adaptors are available to connect same size keys or to convert from a 2.00mm key connector to a 2.14mm key connector. In addition to patchcords and sleeve through adaptors, OZ Optics provides male PM connectors and ferrules for fiber termination, and bulkhead receptacles to attach fibers to devices. We have ferrules for different fiber sizes, including 80 micron cladding sizes. OZ Optics can satisfy all your polarization maintaining fiber needs. 0.9mm Jacketed PM Patchcords 3mm Jacketed PM Patchcords PM Fiber Patchcords with FC/PC Compatible Connectors and Different Cable Sizes Figure 1: PM Axis Alignment aligned to the slow axis DTS0071 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 08/27/02 1

161 Ø8.5 M8P Ø2.498 ± Ø NOTCH KEY TIGHT TOLERANCE NOTCH Figure 2. PM FC Connector Construction LOCKING NUT PIN KEYWAY TIGHT TOLERANCE ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. Figure 3. FC Sleeve Thru Connector Dimensions Ø10.0 JD = 0.25 or mm OD Hytrel Tubing, (for strain relief) 0.25mm or 0.4mm coated fiber Ø10.0 JD = mm OD Jacketed or Loose Buffered Fiber Ø10.0 Ø8 JD = 3 or JD = 3A 3mm PVC or Armor Cable Ø10.0 Ø7 JD = 3AS 3mm OD Stainless Steel Armor Cable Ø10.0 Ø8 JD = 5A Figure 4. PM FC Connector Dimensions For Various Cable Sizes 5mm Reinforced Armor Cable Ø10.0 Ø7 JD = 5AS 5mm OD Stainless Steel Armor Cable Figure 5. Narrow Key Versus Wide Key Connectors Three holes120 apart on a 17.3mm bolt circle 3.7 Three holes120 apart on a 17.3mm bolt circle M8P0.75 Thread Ø2.4 M8P0.75 Thread Ø K 0.8 K K: 2.03/2.07mm for BC#19, HPLC-NTT/FC-PM 2.15/2.20mm for BC#21, HPLC-NTT/FC-SM ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm K: 2.03/2.07mm for BC#1812, HPLC-NTT/FC-PM-SL /2.20mm for BC#5200, HPLC-NTT/FC-SM-SL3.7 ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm Figure 6. Bulkhead FC/PC Receptacle Figure 7. Bulkhead Angled FC Receptacle 2

162 Standard Product Specifications: Design Wavelength 1550nm 1300nm 980nm 850nm 633nm 488nm Operating Wavelength Range Cutoff Wavelength <1450 <1280 <970 <800 <620 <470 Fiber Type PANDA structure standard. Other fiber types available on request Fiber Core/Cladding Size (microns) 8/125 7/125 6/125 5/125 4/ /125 Insertion Loss 1,3 Maximum 0.5dB 0.5dB 0.7dB 1dB 1.5dB 2dB Typical <0.2dB <0.3dB <0.4dB <0.5dB <1dB <1.5dB Backreflection 2,3-14 Typical with flat finish, -40 with Super PC finish, -50 with Ultra PC finish, and 60 for angle point contact (APC), and angle flat contact (AFC) finishes. Minimum Extinction Ratios (db) 4 20, 25,30 20, 25, 30 20, 25 20, Polarization Angle Tolerance 5,6 Temperature Range Length Tolerance ±3 degrees (standard grade), ±1.5 degrees (high grade) -20 C to +70 C Operating -40 C to +85 C Storage ±0.1m or 10% of length, whichever is larger (Tighter tolerances possible on request) 1 As measured using FC connectors, with Super PC Finish. For APC Connectors add 0.2dB. 2 As measured for 1300nm and 1550nm wavelengths. Return losses at other wavelengths are estimated only. 3 As measured when mating to a matching connector. 4 Defined as the extinction ratio of the patchcord itself. Does not include the effect of connecting two fibers together. 5 Normally defined as the angle of the optimum polarization as referenced against the connector key. For 488nm, the angle is defined as the angle between the fiber stress rods and the connector key instead. 6 For FC style connectors only. Angle tolerances are somewhat looser for other connector types. Ordering Information For Standard Parts: Patchcords: Table 1: Standard 488nm Patchcords Bar Code Part Number Description QPMJ-3S3S / meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on each end with super FC/PC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis QPMJ-3S3S /125-3A meter long, 3mm OD armor jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on each end with super FC/PC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis QPMJ-3S3A / meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on one end with a super FC/PC connector, on the other with an angled FC/APC connector. Both are prealigned and locked on the slow axis QPMJ-3S3AF / meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on one end with a super FC/PC connector, on the other with an angle flat FC/AFC connector. Both are prealigned and locked on the slow axis QPMJ-3A3A / meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on each end with angled FC/APC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis QPMJ-3A3A / meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on each end with angled FC/APC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis QPMJ-3A3A / meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on each end with angled FC/APC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis QPMJ-3AF3A /125-3A meter long, 3mm OD armor jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on one end with an angle flat FC/AFC connector, on the other with an angled FC/APC connector. Both are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis QPMJ-3AF3AF / meter long, 3mm OD jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on each end with angle flat FC/AFC connectors that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis QPMJ-3AF3AF /125-3A meter long, 3mm OD armor jacketed, 488nm 3.5/125 high powered PM fiber patchcord, terminated on each end with angle flat FC/AFC connectors, that are pre-aligned and locked on the slow axis. 3

163 Polarization Maintaining Patchcords: P = PM fiber type QP for pure fused silica core PM fibers (488nm only). P for standard doped core PM fibers X,Y = Connector Code (Side A, SideB) 3S = Super FC/PC (<-40dB RL) 3U = Ultra FC/PC (<-50dB RL) 3A = Angle FC/PC (<-60dB RL) 8 = ST SC= Super SC (<-40dB RL) SCU = Ultra SC (<-50dB RL) SCA = Angle SC (<-60dB RL) LC = LC LCA = Angle LC MU = MU X = No Connector See Table 6 of the standard tables data sheet for other connectors W = Wavelength, in nanometers (488, 633, 850, 980, 1300, or 1550) a/b = fiber core/cladding parameters 3.5/125 for 488nm PM fiber 4/125 for 633nm PM fiber 5/125 for 850nm PM fiber 6/125 for 980nm PM fiber 7/125 for 1360nm PM fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PM fiber PM FC Connectors (consists of housing and ferrule): X = Connector Code 3 = FC, flat endface, black boot 3S = FC, radiused endface, black boot 3U = FC, radiused endface, blue boot 3A = FC, conical tip flat endface, Green Boot b = Ferrule Hole Size in microns 2 Available hole sizes: 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 124, 125, 126, 127, 128 PMJ-XY-W-a/b-JD-L-A-(OPT) PMPC-2X-b-JD-(WK) 1 OPT = Add -ER=25 for minimum Extinction Ratio of 25dB Add -ER=30 for minimum Extinction Ratio of 30dB Add -WK for 2.14mm wide keys A = Alignment for PM terminations 0 = unaligned and rotatable 1 = Slow axis of the PM fiber aligned with respect to the key and locked. L = Overall assembly length in meters JD = Jacket Diameter 0.25 = 250 micron acrylate coating 0.40 = 400 micron acrylate coating 1 = 900 micron OD Hytrel loose tube buffered fiber 3 = 3mm OD loose tube Kevlar 3A = 3mm OD armored 3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel armored 5A = 5mm OD armored 5AS = 5mm OD stainless steel armored JD = Jacket Diameter 1 = 1mm OD jackets or smaller 3 = 3mm OD loose tube kevlar 3A = 3mm OD armored 3AS = 3mm OD stainless steel armored 5A = 5mm OD armored 5AS = 5mm OD stainless steel armored Notes: 1 Add -WK to the end of the part number for a 2.14mm wide key. 2 Hole Size Tolerance: +1/-0 microns. PM FC Ferrules: PMF-b-(JD)-(APC) F = Ferrule Finish F for flat endface finish S for radiused endface finish b = Ferrule Hole Size in microns 1 Available hole sizes: 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 124, 125, 126, 127, 128 Notes: 1 Hole Size Tolerance: +1/-0 microns. APC = Conical Tip for APC connectors APC for Conical Tip Leave blank for standard tips. JD = Jacket type design Add -LF-3.0 for flanges designed for 3mm loose tube Kevlar cable Leave blank for all other cable types 14

164 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) POLARIZATION MAINTAINING FUSED FIBER COUPLERS / SPLITTERS Applications Optical amplifiers Fiber lasers Power monitoring Fiber gyroscopes Coherent communications Key Features Low loss Broad bandwidth Good uniformity Small package High directivity Fused couplers are used to split optical signals between two (or more) fibers or to combine optical signals from two (or more) fibers into one fiber. They are constructed by fusing and tapering the fibers together. This method creates a simple, rugged, compact method of splitting or combining optical signals. Typical excess losses are as low as 0.2 db, while split ratio tolerances range from ±5% to ±0.5% at design wavelengths depending upon the splitting ratio. These devices are bidirectional and offer low backreflection and insertion losses. OZ Optics fused PM Splitters exhibit a broad operating wavelength range of up to ±20 nm for 1550 nm region devices. For operation within the standard bandwidth of a splitter, it is best to order a standard center wavelength for lowest price and quickest delivery. Fused PM splitters are also available on smaller core fibers for 1064 nm, 980 nm and other wavelengths. (Nonstandard center wavelengths may require minimum order quantities or set up charges. Please contact OZ Optics for assistance). A wide variety of options are available for fused PM splitters. Standard configurations are 1x2, 2x2, 1x3 (monolithic) and 1x4 (compact cascaded). A monolithic structure means that all fibers are fused together, while a cascaded device combines several 2x2 splitters to create a greater split count. NOTE OZ Optics may substitute a 2x2 in place of an ordered 1x2 based on availability. If a 1x2 is required, please inform your sales contact when placing your request for quote or order. OZ Optics can design and construct larger split counts or different split ratios upon request. OZ Optics has the capability to connectorize the fibers of fused splitters with all standard connectors such as FC, SC, ST, LC etc. and finishes (Super PC, Ultra PC, Angled PC [APC] etc.). As a component integrator, OZ Optics can construct additional components directly onto the coupler fibers. Examples include tunable filters, variable attenuators, or collimators. By building these devices directly onto the coupler fibers, OZ Optics saves the customer the added cost and insertion loss of intermediate connectors and adapters, or the time and cost of fusion splicing. Directly built devices are also the best way to maintain the highest possible Polarization Extinction Ratios. As with any device, there are drawbacks to using PM fused splitters Fused Splitter With 900 Micron Jacket Fused Splitter With 3 mm Cable Figure 1: Dimensions Of Fused Splitter With 250 and 900 Micron Jacketed Fibers Figure 2: Dimensions Of Fused Splitter With 3 mm Cabled Fibers Figure 3: PM Splitter Fiber Geometry DTS0092 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 25-Oct-04 1

165 Ordering Information For Custom Parts OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed and manufactured components to its valued customers. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in pricing compared to our standard parts. In particular, we may need additional detailed specifications or a drawing from the customer and extra time to prepare a comprehensive quotation. Lead times may also be longer for delivery. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) or setup charges, lot charges and/or a minimum order quantity may be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. Please contact OZ immediately if any part of your quote needs explanation. We strongly recommend you purchase our standard parts. Questionnaire For Custom Parts 1. What is your center wavelength and operating bandwidth? 2. What is the desired port configuration (i.e., 2x2, 1x3) 3. What split ratio is required? Are other ratios acceptable for initial trial? 4. What, if any, connectors are required for each port? 5. What fiber length is required? 6. Are there package size restrictions (important for 1x4 splitters) 7. Do you need additional components mounted to the input or output fiber ends? 8. What are your extinction ratio requirements on the through and tap ports? Description Part Number One-by-Two Fused Splitter/Coupler FUSED-12-W-a/b-S/R-XYZ-JD-L-PM Two-by-Two Fused Splitter/Coupler FUSED-22-W-a/b-S/R-TXYZ-JD-L-PM W = Wavelength in nm (Standard 1310, 1480 and 1550 nm) L = Fiber length in meters on all ports (standard is 1 meter) a/b = Fiber core/cladding (7/125 for 1310 nm, 8/125 for 1480 & 1550 nm) JD = Jacket Diameter in mm (1 is standard for 900um jacketing) S/R = Split Ratio in % (50/50, 90/10 and 95/5 are standard) TXYZ = Input and Output Male Connectors (T,X are inputs,y,z are outputs) X = No connector 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC/PC LCA = Angled LC See table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors. Ordering Example For Custom Parts A customer wants a 1x2 fused coupler for 1480nm, with a 95/5 split ratio, to use as a tap to monitor the signal intensity through his system. He requires angled FC/APC connectors on the input port and the main output port, while on the 5% port he does not want a connector. He wants 0.5 meter long leads on all three ports, with 900 micron cabling. Part Number FUSED /125-95/5-3A3AX PM Description Fused PM splitter with 0.5 meter long 900 micron OD jacketed 1480 nm 8/125 PM fiber pigtails and 1x2 95/5 split ratio, with Angled NTT-FC/PC connectors on the input and through ports, and no connector on the tap port. 3

166 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) POLARIZATION ROTATORS/CONTROLLERS/ANALYZERS Features User friendly lab package or compact package for inside systems Singlemode, multimode, and polarization maintaining (PM) fiber versions available Removable/replaceable optics (interchangeable) Wide range of available wavelengths High Polarization Extinction Ratio Convert any polarization state to any other polarization state Compatible with standard detector housings Applications Laser to fiber coupling Polarization dependent component or PM fiber testing Fiber amplifiers Coherent communications Polarization ER measurements PM fiber axis conversion Standard Receptacle Package - 1 Element Product Description OZ Optics supplies a complete line of polarization rotators, controllers and analyzers to manipulate and control the state of polarization of an input beam of light and couple the adjusted light into an output fiber or detector. These systems typically consist of an input with fiber pigtail or connector receptacle, from 1 to 3 polarization optic components and an output coupler with fiber pigtail, or connector receptacle. The FPR product line uses bulk waveplates and polarizing glass to accomplish the polarization control. Each polarization optic stage can be removed without loss of coupling. These stages may be replaced or interchanged as the application requires. Separate stages with polarization optics mounted in a rotary platform may be purchased to allow using only one fiber optic assembly for multiple applications. Small Receptacle Package - 1 Element Standard Pigtailed Package - 3 Element Small Pigtailed Package - 2 Element DTS0072 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 14-Jan

167 Ordering Information OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In some cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, or minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire 1. What is the operating wavelength for your system? 2. What type of fiber are you using on the input and output? 3. What combination of polarizers, halfwave plate, and quarterwave plates do you need? 4. Which of the following statements apply? a. I need a miniature device. A readout of the angle is not required. b. I need to record the alignment of the optical elements. Size is not required. 5. Do you need a device with receptacles, or a unit with the fibers? 6. Is return loss an issue with your application? 7. What connectors are you using on the fiber ends? 8. What is the intensity of your signal? 9. What is the input signal polarization, and the desired output polarization? Receptacle Style Fiber to Fiber Polarization Rotator: Size: 1 = Standard housing 2 = Miniature housing Pigtail Style Fiber to Fiber Polarization Rotator: FPR-0A-XY-W-I-O-R Input and Output Receptacle Codes: 3 = Super, Ultra, or Standard FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST Output Fiber type: M = Multimode SC = SC SCA = Angled SC Input Fiber type: S = Singlemode See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheets for other P = Polarization receptacles maintaining Only available in standard housing. Wavelength: Specify in nanometers Size: 1 = Standard housing 2 = Miniature housing Wavelength: Specify in nanometers Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber See Tables 1-5 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes (I) Input Fiber type: M = Multimode (O) Output Fiber type: S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining Polarization Optics Installed 1 = Plate Polarizer 1G = Glan-Thompson polarizer 2 = Half wave plate 3 = Quarter wave plate FPR-1A-11-W-a/b-I-O-R-LB-XY-JD-L Backreflection level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB 60dB for 1300 and 1550 nm only Polarization Optics Installed 1 = Plate polarizer 2 = Half wave plate 3 = Quarter wave plate Fiber Length, in meters, on each side of the device Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7 Fiber Jacket Type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 of the Standard Tables data sheets for other jacket types Input and Output Connector Codes: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 of the Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors Add -ER=25, -ER=30 to the part number for 25dB and 30dB extinction ratios. Use 1 & 2 & 3 for multiple polarization optics. Replacement Polarization Optics with Rotary Platform: Replacement Polarization Optics without Rotary Platform: Size: 1 = Standard rotary platform 2 = Small rotary platform Wavelength: Specify in nanometers ROT-0A-W-R ROT-W-R Polarization Optics Installed 1 = Plate polarizer 2 = Half wave plate 3 = Quarter wave plate 4

168 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: High polarization extinction ratio (up to 40 db) Stable output Wide range of available wavelengths Rugged and compact design Wide range of connector receptacles available Optional high power versions Optional adjustable output power Applications: Extinction ratio measurements Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) measurements Product manufacturing and quality control Product Description: POLARIZED FIBER OPTIC SOURCE Receptacle Style Polarized Fiber Optic Source With Rotatable Polarizer OZ Optics produces Polarized Fiber Optic Sources (PFOSS) in a variety of wavelengths. Sources are available in three versions. A receptacle version is available with the polarization axis aligned with the keyway on the receptacle. A second receptacle style version is available with a rotatable polarizer, allowing one to adjust the polarization axis to any desired angle. Finally, a pigtail style version has a polarization maintaining fiber attached, with the output polarization aligned with the slow axis of the fiber (see the Fiber Optic Laser Diode Source data sheet for details). As an option, OZ Optics can include a blocking style optical attenuator to manually change the output. Unlike electrical systems, this method of power control does not affect the spectral properties of the laser diode output. This ensures more repeatable results. While the PFOSS design is quite stable for standard measurements, sometimes reflections or temperature changes can affect the output power and wavelength for applications where stability is critical. OZ Optics recommends using angled connectors and receptacles for optimum stability. Highly Stable Polarized Fiber Optic Laser Sources (HIPFOSS), using Peltier coolers and isolators are also available. See the Highly Stable Polarized Source data sheet for details. Figure 1: Receptacle Style Polarized Fiber Optic Source With Rotatable Polarizer DTS0073 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 04/02 1

169 Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: A European fiber optic manufacturer wants to test the quality of their polarization maintaining jumpers at 1550nm and 1310nm. They need to order the following parts: Bar Code Part Number Description PFOSS ER= nm, 1 mw Polarized Fiber Optic Source with a Super/Ultra FC/PC receptacle and rotatable polarizer achieving up to 40 db extinction ratio 8695 PFOSS ER= nm, 1 mw Polarized Fiber Optics Source with a Super/Ultra FC/PC receptacle and rotatable polarizer achieving up to 40 db extinction ratio ER /1650-ER=40 Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter. ER= 40dB for 1290 nm to 1650 nm and ER = 30dB for 850 nm to 1290 nm ER /1650-ER-40 Super/Ultra FC removable receptacle for ER meter for wavelengths from 1280 nm to 1650 nm. ER= PMJ-3U3U / ER=30-G Master Patchcord, Ultra FC/PC to Ultra FC/PC, 8/125um PM 1550nm fiber, 0.9mm OD jacketed, 1 meter long with connectors aligned and locked to the slow axis ER=30dB minimum 2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord (order one cord for each source, and for the ER meter (Total = 3 pieces) Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What wavelength do you need? 2. What connector type are you using? 3. How much optical power do you need launched into your fiber? 4. What should be the minimum polarization extinction ratio of the source? 5. Do you want a fixed or rotatable polarizer? Receptacle Style PFOSS: A = Source type: 1 for fixed polarization 2 for Rotable Polarization X = Connector code : 3= Standard, Super or Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 3A= Angled NTT- FC/PC SC=SC SCA=Angled SC 8=AT&T-ST MU=MU type connector LC=LC type connector 1.25U=Universal Receptacle for 1.25mm OD connector ferrules (LC, MU) 2.5U=Universal Receptacle for 2.5mm OD connector ferrules (ST, FC, SC) Notes: Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: PFOSS-0A-X-W-P (-ER=YY) YY = Extinction ratio. Add this only for ER>30dB. Specify 35 or 40dB. If not specified, the extinction ratio is greater than or equal to 30dB. ER=35dB or 40dB is only available for 980nm, 1064nm, nm. P = Output power, in mw 1mW is standard 1. For Highly Stable Polarized Sources (HIPFOSS) which include an isolator and Peltier cooler circuit please refer to the Highly Stable Polarized Source data sheet 2. Add -BL to the part number to have blocking style attenuator added to the PFOSS 3. Add -ISOL to the part number for an isolator. For wavelengths less than 1290nm, order a HIPFOSS instead W = Wavelength in nm: 635, 650, 685, 780, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310,1480,1550,1625 A European manufacturer of fiber optic circulators wants to test the extinction ratio of their polarization maintaining jumpers at 980nm prior to pigtailing them to their integrated waveguides. They need to order the following parts: Bar Code Part Number Description N/A PFOSS-02-3A ER= nm, 2 mw Polarized Fiber Optic Source with an angled FC receptacle, rotatable polarizer, achieving over 40dB extinction ratio. N/A ER ER= nm, Fiber Optic Polarization Extinction Ratio Meter. ER = 40dB N/A ER-23A-980-ER=40 980nm, Angled FC Removable Receptacle for ER Meter. ER = 40dB N/A PMJ-3A3A-980-6/ ER=30-G Master patchcord, Angle FC/PC to Angle FC/PC, 6/125um PM 980nm fiber, 0.9 mm OD jacketed, 1 meter long with connectors aligned and locked to the slow axis ER=30dB minimum 2737 POWER CORD - EUROPE European power cord. Order one for the source and one for the meter 3

170 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) POLARIZERS FIBER OPTIC Features Rugged & compact housing SM, MM, PM and fiber combinations available Miniature sizes available Wide range of available wavelengths High extinction ratio Low loss Low back reflection Low cost Applications Fiber amplifiers System polarization extinction ratio conditioning Measuring polarization extinction ratio Sensors Integrated optics Interferometric sensors Product Description Fiber Optic Polarizers are designed to polarize the output from a light source or fiber and launch it into an output fiber. These polarizers typically consist of input and output collimators with a plate polarizer in between. Broadband polarizers are used, so the power extinction ratio is maintained for up to several hundreds of nanometers. The same polarizer, for example, may be used for 1300 nm to 1600 nm. The power extinction ratio is the ratio between maximum and minimum output power as the input polarization state is changed. This is different from the output polarization extinction ratio, which is a measure of the ratio between the power in the two axes of polarization maintaining fiber. This value is dependent upon the extinction ratio of the polarizer, the alignment of the output fiber axes to the polarizer and the extinction ratio of the output fiber. When an output extinction ratio is specified, it is the polarization extinction ratio. This value is only applicable when the output fiber is polarization maintaining fiber. The power extinction ratio will always equal exceed the polarization extinction ratio. OZ Optics offers fiber optic polarizers in three sizes. The 20 mm diameter standard size can be used for prototyping and bench top work. The 5.5 mm diameter miniature size is for OEM applications and the smallest size (4 mm diameter) is for low cost systems where reduced output extinction ratio is acceptable. Pigtail Style Polarizer Miniature (5.5 mm OD) Pigtail Style Polarizer Low Cost Miniature (4 mm OD) Polarizer DTS0018 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 1

171 Ordering Information Pigtail Style: Polarizer size: 1 for Standard 20 mm size 2 for miniature 5.5 mm OD size 3 for low cost 4 mm OD size Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 1550 for 1550 nm) Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550 nm SM fiber See Tables 1 to 5 for other standard fiber sizes Input Fiber: Output Fiber: M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining Backreflection level: 25, 40, 50, or 60dB 60dB version available for 1300 and 1550 nm wavelengths only FOP-A1-11-W-a/b-I-O-LB-XY-JD-L Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device. Example: To order 1 meter of fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace L with 1,7 Fiber Jacket Type: 1 = 900 Micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable See Table 7 for other jacket sizes Connector Code: 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC See Table 6 for other connectors NOTE: For extinction ratios greater than 25dB or 30dB, add the term -ER=25 or -ER=30 to the end of the part number. Ordering Example For Custom Parts A customer has a tunable laser for nm, pigtailed with singlemode fiber with a Super PC finish FC connector on it. She wants to polarize the signal as much as possible, and transmit it through a polarization maintaining fiber, achieving over 30dB extinction ratios. The output fiber also needs to have a Super PC finish FC connector on the end. Return losses and insertion losses are not critical. Bar Code Part Number Description XXXX FOP /1570-9/125-S-P- 40-3S3S-3-1-ER=30 Fiber optic polarizer for 1520 nm to 1570 nm, with 60dB return loss, 30dB extinction ratio, and with 1 meter long, 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cabled Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber on the input, 8/125 PM fiber on the output, with Super FC/PC connectors on both ends. Application Notes Upgrading System Output Extinction Ratio When several PM fiber pigtailed components are connected, there is the possibility that the accumulated extinction ratio will degrade. Each time two PM fibers are joined, any offset of their stress axes can cause the extinction ratio to get a little lower. For example, two 30dB fibers offset by 3 degrees can have a net extinction ratio of only 25dB. Add a couple more interfaces with similar angles and the value gets even worse. In order to have the final output extinction ratio be high, one can insert a pigtailed polarizer as the least component. This can drastically improve the output extinction ratio of the system with only a minor impact on system loss. For example, upgrading from a 15dB ER signal to a 25dB ER signal would only incur 0.125dB loss (plus device loss). A small price to pay for a 10dB ER gain. Basic equation is Log (1 - (inv log original ER - inv log new ER)) Ex 15dB upgraded to 25dB is 0.125dB loss (plus device loss) Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) Q. Why is output power so low? A. Check orientation and/or state of input polarization. If input fiber is PM, check to make sure light is launched along correct axis. Q. Why is output extinction ratio low? A. Check you are using it in correct direction. Polarizer alignment is optimized to the output fiber for best output extinction ratio. The input fiber is oriented for transmission. These two placements are very similar, but may be slightly different. Q. Why is output power fluctuation? A. Check stability of input fiber and polarization states. If there are large backreflections coming from further down the fiber optic system, an isolator may be required to protect the source or defeat an etalon effect. 4

172 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) REFLECTORS FIBER OPTIC (FIXED OR VARIABLE) Fiber optic reflectors are used to reflect the light emerging from a fiber back in the reverse direction. They are used to build fiber interferometers, or with fiber fused splitters to measure backreflection within fiber optic components. They can also be used to measure the sensitivity of sources to backreflection from other devices, by providing reference reflection levels. This is very useful for deriving backreflection specifications for transmitters. Fiber optic reflectors consist of a fiber optic collimator and a mirror. The fiber output is first collimated, then it strikes the mirror and is reflected back into the collimator. The angle between the collimator and the mirror is adjusted using OZ Optics Optics' patented tilt adjustment technique, until as much light as possible is reflected back into the fiber. Using this technique, reflectors with typical losses of only 0.6 db can be constructed. A variable reflector is available that includes a blocking screw, to obtain variable reflection levels. This is achieved by partially blocking the collimated beam between the lens and the mirror. Both connector receptacle style and pigtail style reflectors are available. Connector receptacle style reflectors come with a female connector receptacle to allow the fibers to be easily changed. Pigtail style reflectors come with a fiber of your choice permanently attached to the collimating lens. This type of reflector is recommended for optimum coupling efficiency and stability. The other end of the fiber can be terminated with your choice of connector. OZ Optics also sells fibers with coated ends. Gold coatings are used to provide excellent broadband reflection for infrared wavelengths. Other coating materials are available for other wavelengths. The ends can have either 100% reflecting, or partial reflecting/partial transmitting coatings. Contact OZ Optics for further information. Reflectors are available for wavelengths from 400nm to 1600nm. Reflectors that operate at both 1300 and 1550nm are available, with only a slight difference in insertion losses at both wavelengths. Broadband reflectors using achromatic lenses to collimate light at different wavelengths are available. Partially reflecting mirrors are also available, to partly transmit the light. The transmitted light can be coupled into an output fiber as an option, thus forming an in-line reflector. Contact OZ Optics for further details. Laser diodes or lasers with long coherence lengths can cause etalon effects in fiber optic reflectors. DTS0020 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 22-Feb-05

173 ORDERING INFORMATION: Part Number Description FORF-1X-W-F Connector receptacle style fiber optic total reflector. FORF-XY-W-F-R Connector receptacle style partial reflector with output fiber focuser. FORF-11P-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L Pigtail style fiber optic total reflector. FORF-21P-W-a/b-F-LB-R-XY-JD-L Pigtail style partial reflector with output fiber focuser. Consult Factory for partial reflectors without output fiber. FORF-31P-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L Gold tipped fiber total reflector. Where: mirror. W is the operating wavelength in nm. (If the reflector is to work over a range of wavelengths, then give both the shortest and longest wavelength to be coupled into the fiber.); X,Y are the connector receptacle types for connector style reflectors. For pigtail style reflectors, it refers to the male connector on the fiber ends (3 for NTT-FC, 3S for Super FC, 3A for angled FC, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC connectors, etc.); a/b are the fiber core and cladding diameters, respectively, in microns; F is the type of fiber being used (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fiber); R is the percent reflectance for a partially reflecting mirror; JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3.0 for 3 mm OD loose tube kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A for 5mm armored cable); L is the fiber length in meters. LB is the desired backreflection level (25dB, 40dB, 50dB, or 60dB) from reflective surfaces other than the Note: Add the term "-BL" to the end of the part number to add a blocking screw to achieve variable reflection. Example: A customer requires a pigtail style fiber reflector for 1300nm, with a blocking screw for variable reflection. The fiber is 9/125 singlemode fiber, one meter long, cabled, and terminated with an angled FC connector. OZ Optics part number: FORF-11P /125-S-60-3A-3-1-BL.

174 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) RGB (RED/GREEN/BLUE) COMBINER AND DELIVERY SYSTEMS Features: Modular design for easy installation and maintenance Two, three, and four wavelength versions Singlemode, multimode and polarization maintaining fiber versions. High power versions A variety of wavelengths available Low noise, stable output. High power handling Applications: White light displays Confocal microscopy Laser spectroscopy Fluorescence microscopy Color Holography Preliminary RGB Delivery System Product Description: A common application today is the combination of visible laser light of different wavelengths into a single fiber. Such systems are used in a variety of applications where one wants to produce full color images. By combining red, green and blue light and varying the intensities of the signals, one can reproduce practically any color desired. In order to achieve this, wavelength division multiplexers (WDMs) are used to combine light of different wavelengths into a single fiber. The light from each fiber is first collimated. The collimated beams are then combined using a dichroic filter, with typically the longer wavelength transmitted from port T, the shorter wavelength reflected from port R. The combined beams are then focused into the output fiber at Port 1. OZ Optics uses this technique to build WDMs for combining visible wavelengths. Our RGB multiplexers combine light at red, green and blue wavelengths into singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber. OZ Optics also offers source to fiber wavelength division multiplexers, where the sources are mounted directly onto the device. This improves the overall system efficiency, and reduces costs. Complementing our line of RGB WDM s are our OZ-1000 and OZ-2000 Turnkey OEM sources. They are temperature stabilized fiber coupled, laser diode sources. The compact housings contain both the laser diode and the temperature control, and are powered by a single 5 volt DC supply. The sources have an operating temperature range of C, and hold the temperature variation of the laser diode to within 0.1 C. This maintains the wavelength variation to better than 0.1nm and also reduces the tendency of the laser diode to mode hop. The output power from each source can be adjusted using a 0 to 5 volt control voltage. Standard sources can be modulated at low frequencies (a few khz), and devices can be configured at the factory for modulation capability up to 100 khz, if requested. This is ideal for generating full color displays. Special versions are available from OZ Optics to cover even higher modulation frequencies, up to 50 MHz. Contact OZ Optics with your requirements. Used together, the OZ sources and RGB multiplexors provide a complete method to deliver full color output from a singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber. The light from the output fiber can be collimated using an optional achromatic collimator to give near ideal Gaussian beams ranging from 0.6mm to 10mm in diameter. Alternatively the achromatic focusers can be supplied to focus the light to spots only a few microns in diameter. Sources and combiners can be provided either as individual components or as complete integrated systems. See the figure on page 2 showing the layout for such OZ Sources for UV Blue, Green, Red and IR RGB Wavelength Division Multiplexor a system. Integrated systems provide the greatest throughput and final output power possible. This is because it eliminates the fiber-to-fiber connections normaly present when connecting sources and combiners together. Such connections introduce as much as 1.5dB additional losses at 405nm wavelengths, because the fiber core sizes are so small (as small as 3 microns at 405nm). At this size even a one micron offset will cause significant losses. Thus an integrated system can deliver 25% more power than connected components. DTS0105 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 10-Jun

175 For those who wish to use their own laser sources, OZ Optics also provides a full line of laser to fiber couplers and laser diode to fiber couplers. Systems can be custom built to provide optimum coupling to your source. We work extensively with various laser manufactures, designing optics and adaptors to fit their lasers. OZ Optics also offers a complete line of fiber optic collimators and focusers, to take the output from a fiber and deliver it precisely to where it is required. We stock a broad array of achromat lenses, perfect for RGB applications. Further details on these products can be found in our catalog and on our website under Laser To Fiber Delivery Systems. Contact a sales representative for additional details. For more detailed information on both wavelength division multiplexers and sources, please refer to our detailed product data sheets Wavelength Division Multiplexers, and Turnkey, Ultra Stable, OEM Laser Diode Sources - OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 Series. Units are in inches Figure 1: Pigtail Style OZ-1000 Dimensions Figure 2: Standard Wave Division Multiplexor Dimensions Figure 3: Integrated RGB System, With Optional Collimator 2

176 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases nonrecurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1) What wavelengths are you interested in? 2) What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, Multimode or PM? 3) What power levels are being used in your system? 4) What coupling efficiency do you require? 5) Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source? 6) What return losses are acceptable in your system? 7) What connector type are you using? 8) How do you intend to use this product? 9) How long should the fibers be? 10) Do you wish OZ Optics to provide the sources? 11) Do you need a collimated output beam? 12) If a collimated beam is required, what is the desired beam diameter? 13) If a focused spot is required, what is the desired spot size and working distance? Note concerning part numbers: Depending on the configuration of the desired design, the fiber types, lengths, and connectors may be different on each channel. Therefore it is important to correctly identify each port in the proper order. When specifying wavelengths, list them from shortest to longest. When identifying fiber types, start from the shortest wavelength to the longest wavelength, and identify the combined port last. This rule is also used when specifying the connector types and fiber lengths. Description Wavelength Division Multiplexer: Part Number WDM-1NP-111-Wi/Wo-a/b-ABC-LB-XYZ-JD-L N = Wi/Wo = a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm Corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber See tables 1 to 5 of the Standard Tables for other sizes ABC, Number of wavelengths to combine (2, 3, 4, etc.) Operating Wavelengths in nanometers Fiber types: on each port M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining L = Fiber length, in meters JD = X,Y,Z = Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable Connector type on each end 3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC 8=AT&T-ST SC=SC SCA=Angled SC LC=LC LCA=Angled LC MU=MU X=No Connector LB =Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM fibers only. (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength ranges only) 35dB for multimode fibers 5

177 Description: Pigtail Style Source Part Number OZ-N000-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-P N = 1000 for electrical & optical connections in same front panel 2000 for electrical connection on rear panel & optical connection on front panel W = Wavelength 1 : 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, a/b = Fiber size: core/cladding diameters (in µm): (see tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data sheet) F = Fiber type: M = Multimode Fiber S = Singlemode Fiber P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber LB = Backreflection level 2 : 35 = 35dB return loss (MM only) 40 = 40dB return loss (SM & PM) 60 = 60dB return loss (SM & PM /1550nm only) P = Output power available from the fiber end, in mw 3 L = Fiber length (in meters) JD = Jacket Diameter: 1 = 900µm jacketed fiber 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar jacketed fiber 3A = 3mm OD black armored cable 3AS = 3mm OD Stainless Steel armored cable 5A = 5mm OD black armored cable 5AS = 5mm OD Stainless Steel armored cable X = Connector type: 3 = FC/PC 3S = Super FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/APC 5 = SMA905 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC or ultra SC SCA = Angled SC Description: Receptacle Style Source Part Number OZ-N000-X-a/b-W-F-P N = 1000 for electrical & optical connections in same front panel 2000 for electrical connection on rear panel & optical connection on front panel X = Connector Receptacle: 2.5U = 2.5mm universal receptacle (for FC, ST, or SC). 3S = Super FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/APC 5 = SMA905 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC P = Output power 3 : Output power available from the receptacle, in mw F = Fiber type: M = Multimode Fiber S = Singlemode Fiber P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber W = Wavelength 1 : 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, 1625 a/b = Fiber size: core/cladding diameters (in µm): (see tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data sheet) 1 These are standard center wavelength values. The tolerance may vary depending on both wavelength and the laser diode manufacturers tolerances. (Typical tolerances vary from ±5nm to as high as ±30nm). 2 The backreflection specification refers to the reflected signal strength relative to the output power seen by the laser diode from internal reflections. It does not include external sources of reflection, including those from the connector at the end of the fiber. To minimize external reflections, OZ Optics recommends using angle polished FC/APC or SC/APC connectors. Backreflection values are limited by the wavelength and fiber type selected. Other backreflection levels may be possible. Please contact OZ for further information. 3 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diodes available, not all output powers are available at every wavelength for every fiber type. For wavelengths below 750nm, we recommend pigtail style to eliminate connection loss at the receptacle interface. Options: Add "-ISOL" if an optical isolator is required (Please note that this option is only available for the 1300 to 1625nm wavelength range). Add "-BL" if OZ Optics is to provide a manual blocking screw to control the output power. 6

178 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: Up to 48 channel V-Groove arrays High accuracy V-Grooves using etched silicon High capacity using automated batch processing Compatible with 125/250 micron diameter singlemode, multimode and polarization maintaining fibers 0.5 micron channel spacing accuracy Designed to meet Telcordia requirements SILICON V-GROOVE CHIPS Applications: Pigtailing of integrated optical devices Connection to planar waveguide devices Attachment to an array of active devices Connection of MEMS devices and miniaturized fiber optic components Construction of DWDM and multi-channel devices Product Description: OZ Optics Silicon V-Groove chips assist in developing next generation photonic devices. The array components allow precise alignment of either ribbonized or individual fibers in a linear array. Utilizing OZ Optics silicon V-Grooves with a Pyrex lid allows UV or heat curing of the fibers into the array and attachment to another device. The side wall design incorporated in the rear of the V-Groove chip enhances the overall assembly s strength and rigidity, and reduces breakages. OZ Optics now offers metalized silicon V-Groove chips. These chips allow direct soldering of metalized fibers into V-Groove assemblies, providing a high strength bond that doesn't use epoxies. Contact OZ for more information. Silicon V-Groove Chips 8 Channel V-Groove Chip 10.40±0.03mm (VL) Width ± 0.03mm (VW) 5.3mm W ±0.05mm 0.28mm 0.195±0.005mm 0.138±0.005mm ±0.01mm (VT) Edge Distance ±0.025mm (ED) Figure 1: Detail Drawing For 1-12 Fiber V-Groove Chips (N x 0.250) ±0.0005mm 0.250±0.0005mm (S) All Etched Positional Chip Tolerances are ±0.0005mm V-Groove Detail Pyrex Lid 250um Coating 125um Fiber Cladding Silicon V-Groove Assembled V-Groove, Showing Fiber Layout DTS0077 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 06/02 1

179 Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: A customer needs to build an 8 fiber V-Groove assembly using an 8 fiber ribbon. The following parts will be required: Bar Code Part Number Description VGC SW 8 channel silicon V-Groove chip with 250 micron fiber spacing 9686 VGC-LID ,2,4 or 8 channel Pyrex V-Groove lid Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 50 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. How many fiber positions does your application require? 2. What spacing between fibers does your application require? 3. If you are going to use ribbon, is it standard 8 or 12 fiber count? 4. If you are using individual fibers, what is the coating diameter? 5. Do you need a lid for final assembly? Gold Plated V-Groove Chip V-Groove Chips: N = Number of V-Grooves S = V-Groove spacing (microns) VL = Length (mm) VW = Width (mm) VT = Thickness (mm) VGC-N-S-VL-VW-VT-SW V-Groove Lids: VL = Length (mm) VW = Width (mm) VT = Thickness (mm) VGC-LID-VL-VW-VT Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: A customer needs to purchase a custom V-Groove chip and matching Pyrex lid. The required specifications are that the V-Groove chip have 10 V-Grooves with 325 micron spacing, be 7mm wide, 15mm long and 1mm thick, the V-Groove length is to be standard (5.3mm). Part Number VGC SW VGC-LID Description 10 Channel silicon V-Groove Chip with 325 µm fiber spacing Custom Pyrex V-Groove Lid Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): Q: What are the standard materials used? A: Silicon for the V-Groove, Pyrex for the lid. Q: Is the fiber core above or below the surface of the silicon V-Groove chip? A: Nominally the center of the core is seated approximately 30 microns below the surface of the chip. Q: What types of adhesives can be used to adhere the fibers into the V-Grooves? A: UV cured or thermally cured epoxies have been successfully used to mount the fibers into the V-Grooves. The matching Pyrex lids are necessary when using UV cured adhesives. Q: Are two V-Groove chips used to sandwich the fibers in place? A: No, the OZ Optics V-Groove chips are designed to be used with a flat lid, which provides a stable 3 point contact for positioning the fiber. Q: Can individual fibers be assembled into the V-Groove chips? A: Yes, the design allow for either individual or ribbonized fibers to be used. This also allows for mixing of different fiber types in the assembled chip. Q: Are the V-Groove channel spacing tolerances cumulative? A: No, the absolute tolerance from any one V-Groove to the reference V-Groove on a chip is ± 0.5 micron. 3

180 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) SMART PATCHCORDS TM AND WIRELESS FIBER TM FOR POWER AND WAVELENGTH MONITORING Features: Local or remote monitoring via RS232, USB, or wireless communication Inexpensive, miniature package Low insertion losses, return losses. High power handling Versions for wavelengths from 600 nm to 1700 nm available Polarization Maintaining (PM) and specialty fiber versions available Applications: Network and channel monitoring in FTTH networks Channel balancing for Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) systems Dynamic optical amplifier gain monitoring Power monitoring Optical power control devices Polarization stabilization Polarization mode dispersion compensation Real time in-line test and measurement Fiber optic sensors Preliminary Product Description: Smart patchcords utilize a new technology to monitor the properties of optical signals traveling through fibers. This includes power monitoring, wavelength sensing, and polarization measurement. The technology allows sensors to be integrated into networks and test equipment to provide real-time remote monitoring without interrupting the optical signal. Applications include channel monitoring in optical networks, polarization stabilization, and environmental sensing. Using a novel technique to tap signals for measurements, the monitors are very compact, and resemble a patchcord in construction.competing monitoring systems typically use fused couplers to tap a fixed amount of light into another fiber and on to a measuring module. This method is bulky and must be done using discrete components. In contrast, our technique directs a controlled amount of light from the fiber core to the surface where it can be directly monitored. This is all done without bending, shaping, or otherwise harming the fiber. As a result sensors can be directly incorporated into optical assemblies, without affecting functionality. The manufacturing process allows full automation, sharply reducing costs. Sensors can be made into standard singlemode fiber, polarization maintaining (PM) fibers, or specialty fibers, for any design wavelength. The monitor electronics can be configured to give either an analog electrical output or a digital output via an RS-232 or USB port. Multiple sensor modules can be integrated into a single patchcord, allowing different properties to be measured simultaneously. The sensors are directional in nature, measuring light traveling in one direction through the fiber, but not in the reverse direction. This directionality is ideal for monitoring signals in one direction independently of signals traveling along the other direction. Bi-directional versions can be provided on request. We welcome custom applications and new ideas. Contact OZ Optics for additional information. The latest member of the Smart Patchcord family is the Wireless Fiber. This is a Smart Patchcord with a built-in miniature radio transceiver. This allows the Smart Patchcord to communicate with a host computer, which can be a laptop, PDA, or even a smart cell phone. This makes it possible in many instances for a technician to identify a problem fiber before he even enters a building, resulting in a tremendous reduction in troubleshooting time. Several versions of the wireless link are offered, with ranges from 10 meters to over 1 kilometer. When a smart cell phone is used, measurements can be instantly sent to a central location for logging, or for comparison with previous measurements to monitor degradation of a link. By allowing easy monitoring of optical signal power levels without disrupting the signal, unnecessary maintenance and down time can be virtually eliminated. Smart Patchcord with Analog Output Module Wireless Fiber With Smart Phone Wireless Fiber With Laptop Computer DTS0096 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 20-May-05 1

181 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases nonrecurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 25 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is your operating wavelength range? 2. Are you using standard singlemode, polarization maintaining, or a speciality fiber? What type? 3. What is the expected optical power through the fiber? 4. Do you need a single channel, or multiple channel device? 5. Do you need to measure optical power, spectral intensity, or polarization? 6. What sort of measurement resolution or accuracy do you need? 7. What dynamic range do you need? 8. Do you need the ends of the fiber connectorized? What type of connector do you need? 9. How long should each end of the fiber be? 10. Do you need the fiber cabled? What cable size do you need? 11. What kind of communication link do you need? 12. If you need a wirelesss link, what communication range do you need? Description Part Number Smart Patchcord OCM-1N-W-a/b-F-XY-JD-L-M-E N = Number of fibers (1 channel is standard) W = Wavelength in nm: 1550 for 1450 to 1650 nn operating range 1300 for 1280 to 1440 nm operating range (For single channel monitoring, specify the exact wavelength) Contact OZ Optics for other wavelengths a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns: 9/125 for 1300 or 1550 nm SMF 7/125 for 1300 nm PMF 8/125 for 1550 nm PMF. See Tables 1 to 5 of the OZ Optics Standard Tables for other fiber sizes F = Fiber type: S = Singlemode P = Polarization maintaining E = Electrical Output A = analog output RS232 = digital output U = USB W = wireless (radio) M = Measurement module D = Optical Power (Detector) P = Polarization C = Single Channel Monitor L = Fiber length, in meters, on each side of the device. JD = Fiber jacket type: 0.25 = 250 micron acrylate coating 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable XY = Input and output connector codes 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC SCU = Ultra SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC E = E2000/PC EA = Angled E2000/APC X = No Connector (See table 6 of the Standard Tables for other connector types) Ordering Examples For Custom Parts: A network station needs to actively monitor the signal strength of the 1545 nm channel in a course optical WDM network. The monitoring unit will be spliced into the network, and an analog current proportional to the optical signal strength is sufficient to keep track of the signal. Part Number OCM /125-S-XX-1-1-C-A Description Single channel smart patchcord for monitoring 1545 nm wavelength signals only in an optical system. The fiber on either side of the monitor is 1 meter long, 1 mm jacketed, with no connectors on either end. The module generates an analog signal proportional to the intensity of the 1545 nm light. 3

182 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: Improved coupling to and from waveguides, laser diodes and photodiodes Singlemode, Multimode or Polarization Maintaining Fibers AR coated endfaces available Can be made based on either spot size or taper shape Metalized fiber versions available Hermetically sealable versions available Other custom configurations available Applications: Active component pigtailing DWDM devices Waveguide packaging MEMS device connections Miniaturized fiber optic components Coupling to circular or elliptical beam outputs Product Description: Tapered and lensed fibers offer a convenient way to improve coupling between optical fibers and waveguide devices, laser diodes or photo diodes. By laser shaping the fiber end, the light can be transformed to improve mode matching and coupling efficiency with the waveguide device, laser diode chip or photodiode chip. The manufacturing process allows for improved coupling to either circular or oval input spots (this must be specified in advance). OZ Optics tapered and lensed fibers are manufactured by laser shaping the endface to create the optimal light output/input for specific applications. This method provides the best coupling efficiencies and mode matching abilities in a taper. An alternative technique is to instead polish the end face of the fiber to a specific radius and taper angle, forming a lens. Oval spots can also be formed using the polishing technique, normally by shaping the fiber to form a chisel shape. The characteristics of fiber tapers depend greatly upon the application. For laser diode and waveguide coupling applications, beam quality is paramount. The focused spot characteristics must TAPERED AND LENSED FIBERS Tapered / Lensed Fiber match the waveguide characteristics as closely as possible to ensure good coupling. In contrast, fiber to photodiode coupling does not require a high quality beam. One only has to ensure that the focused spot size is smaller than the photodetector. Thus tapered fibers for photodiodes are offered at lower cost. Singlemode, Multimode or Panda Type Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers can be tapered. For multimode fibers, only polished versions, with a polish radius and taper angle can be produced. While they can improve coupling efficiencies when used with laser diodes or VCSELs, they do not focus to an actual spot like singlemode and PM fiber versions do. PM fibers offer a means to control the polarization of optical signals throughout the system, thus controlling Polarization Dependent Losses (PDL) and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD). This control is crucial in developing high speed 10 Gb/s, and next generation 40 Gb/s and faster systems. In general, OZ Optics uses PM fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. Custom configurations can be designed if required. Tapered fibers can be incorporated into other OZ Optics assemblies including Hermetic Patchcords and V-Groove assemblies, thus aiding in the development of photonic devices that meet Telcordia requirements. Contact OZ Optics for more information. Stripped Fiber Ø125 micron Taper Angle θ Radius of Curvature R Spot Diameter "SD" Figure 1: Laser Shaped Lensed Fiber (End Detail) Fiber with Acrylate Coating Ø250 micron or Ø400 micron Working Distance "WD" Strip Length "SL" Figure 2: Polished Lensed Fiber (End Detail) DTS0080 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 29-Nov-04 1

183 Description Part Number Tapered Lensed Fiber: F = Fiber Type M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining X = Connector Code 3S = Super FC 3U = Ultra FC 3A = Angled FC 8 = ST SC = Super SC SCU = Ultra SC SCA = Angled SC MU = Super MU LC = Super LC LCA = Angled LC X = No Connector W = Wavelength, in nanometers 1300/1550 for Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber TFMJ-X-W-a/b-JD-SL-SD-WD-L(-AR)(-PD) 1 AR = AR Coating for tapered end Add -AR if anti-reflective coating is required L = Overall Length, in meters WD = Working Distance, in microns 3-50 microns available SD = Spot Diameter, in microns (1/e 2 ) microns available SL = Strip Length, in millimeters JD = Jacket Diameter 0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating = 400 micron OD acrylate coating 2 1 = 900um Hytrel loose tube buffered fiber a/b = Fiber core/cladding 9/125 for Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber 6/125 for 980nm PANDA type PM fiber 7/125 for 1300nm PANDA type PM fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA type PM fiber Notes: 1 Add -PD for low cost tapers for photodiode packaging 2 Singlemode fiber normally has a 250 micron coating. PM fiber has 400 or 250 micron coating. Description Polished Lensed Fiber: F = Fiber Type M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining X = Connector Code 3S = Super FC 3U = Ultra FC 3A = Angled FC 8 = ST SC = Super SC SCU = Ultra SC SCA = Angled SC MU = Super MU LC = Super LC LCA = Angled LC X = No Connector W = Wavelength, in nanometers 1300/1550 for Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber Part Number TFMJ-X-W-a/b-JD-SL-R-q -L-POL(-AR)(-PD) 1 AR = AR Coating for tapered end Add -AR if anti-reflective coating is required L = Overall Length, in meters q = Taper angle in degrees R = Radius of tip, in microns SL = Strip Length, in millimeters JD = Jacket Diameter 0.25 = 250 micron OD acrylate coating = 400 micron OD acrylate coating 2 1 = 900um Hytrel loose tube buffered fiber a/b = Fiber core/cladding 9/125 for Corning SMF-28 Singlemode fiber 6/125 for 980nm PANDA type PM fiber 7/125 for 1300nm PANDA type PM fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA type PM fiber Notes: 1 Add -PD for low cost tapers for photodiode packaging 2 Singlemode fiber normally has a 250 micron coating. PM fiber has 400 or 250 micron coating. 4

184 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) TURNKEY, ULTRA STABLE, OEM LASER DIODE SOURCE OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 SERIES Features: Output power to >100mW Output power stability to <0.025dB Wavelength variation to within <0.1nm Temperature controlled to 0.1 C Wavelengths from 400nm to 1625nm available Power control via external analog voltage External modulation up to 50MHz available C operating temperature range Safety interlock Over-temperature lockout Singlemode, multimode, or polarization preserving fiber Available with fiber pigtail or connector receptacle Optional collimator or focuser on the pigtail output Guaranteed lifetime -18 months or 5000 hours Receptacle Style OZ-2000 Applications: Insertion loss measurement and attenuation measurement High power or remote fiber delivery system Optical component manufacturing and testing Materials evaluation and testing Semiconductor surface testing Life science illumination Laser scanning microscopy Red/Green/Blue (RGB) illumination systems. Product Description: The OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 are temperature stabilized fiber coupled, laser diode delivery systems. The compact housings contain both the laser diode and the temperature control, and are powered by a single 5 volt DC supply. Both designs have an operating temperature range of C, and hold the temperature variation of the laser diode to within 0.1 C. This maintains the wavelength variation to better than 0.1nm and also reduces the tendency of the laser diode to mode hop. The electrical interface on the OZ is located on the front face of the unit with the optical interface, while on the OZ it is on the rear of the unit The units are equipped with an adjustable output power feature. The output power can be adjusted by simply changing the DC voltage on the Power Control Input. The voltage range is 0-5 volts, with 0 volts corresponding to maximum power, and 5 volts minimum power. The standard parts can be modulated at low frequencies (a few KHz), and devices can be configured at the factory for modulation capability up to 100 KHz, if requested. Special versions are available from OZ Optics to cover even higher modulation frequencies, up to 50 MHz. Contact OZ Optics with your requirements. A manual blocking-style attenuator can be added as an option to adjust the power. This reduces the tendency of the laser diode to change wavelength when varying power by allowing the user to keep the laser diode current constant. An interlock feature is also standard. This enables the user to shut the unit down if a safety issue or other error condition arises. This feature can also be used as a TTL on/off control. The standard OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 operates with the laser at a fixed temperature. OZ Optics can also provide units with a variable laser temperature, which can be used to tune the wavelength of the laser over a typical range of 2 nm. Contact OZ Optics for further information, or view the datasheet titled Intelligent Tunable Laser Diode Source. Pigtail Style OZ-2000 Receptacle And Pigtail Style OZ-1000 & OZ-2000 Family RGB Delivery System using OZ-2000 Sources With RGB Combiner DTS0081 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 02-Dec

185 Questionnaire 1. What wavelength do you need? 2. How much output power do you need? 3. Do you want a built-in fiber, or a receptacle to attach your own fiber? 4. What size and type of fiber do you require? 5. How long a fiber do you need? 6. What kind of fiber connectors are you using? 7. Do you need a collimated output beam? 8. If a collimated beam is required, what is the desired beam diameter? 9. If a focused spot is required, what is the desired spot size and working distance? 10. Do you want a built-in isolator? Description: Pigtail Style Source Part Number OZ-N000-W-a/b-F-LB-X-JD-L-P N = 1000 for electrical & optical connections in same front panel 2000 for electrical connection on rear panel & optical connection on front panel W = Wavelength 1 : 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, a/b = Fiber size: core/cladding diameters (in µm): (see tables 1 to 5 in the Standard Tables data sheet) F = Fiber type: LB = Backreflection level 2 : 35 = 35dB return loss (MM only) 40 = 40dB return loss (SM & PM) 60 = 60dB return loss (SM & PM /1550nm only) Description: Receptacle Style Source M = Multimode Fiber S = Singlemode Fiber P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber N = 1000 for electrical & optical connections in same front panel 2000 for electrical connection on rear panel & optical connection on front panel X = Connector Receptacle: 2.5U = 2.5mm universal receptacle (for FC, ST, or SC). 3S = Super FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/APC 5 = SMA905 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC Part Number OZ-N000-X-a/b-W-F-P P = Output power available from the fiber end, in mw 3 L = Fiber length (in meters) JD = Jacket Diameter: 1 = 900µm jacketed fiber 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar jacketed fiber 3A = 3mm OD black armored cable 3AS = 3mm OD Stainless Steel armored cable 5A = 5mm OD black armored cable 5AS = 5mm OD Stainless Steel armored cable X = Connector type: 3 = FC/PC 3S = Super FC/PC 3A = Angled FC/APC 5 = SMA905 8 = AT&T-ST SC = SC or ultra SC SCA = Angled SC P = Output power 3 : Output power available from the receptacle F = Fiber type: M = Multimode Fiber S = Singlemode Fiber P = Polarization Maintaining Fiber W = Wavelength 1 : 405, 440, 635, 650, 670, 685, 750, 780, 810, 830, 850, 980, 1064, 1310, 1480, 1550, 1625 a/b = Fiber size: core/cladding diameters (in µm): (see tables 1 to 5 in the standard tables data sheet) 1 These are standard center wavelength values. The tolerance may vary depending on both wavelength and the laser diode manufacturers tolerances. (Typical tolerances vary from ±5nm to as high as ±30nm). 2 The backreflection specification refers to the reflected signal strength relative to the output power seen by the laser diode from internal reflections. It does not include external sources of reflection, including those from the connector at the end of the fiber. To minimize external reflections, OZ Optics recommends using angle polished FC/APC or SC/APC connectors. Backreflection values are limited by the wavelength and fiber type selected. Other backreflection levels may be possible. Please contact OZ for further information. 3 Note that due to variations in the optical characteristics of the laser diodes available, not all output powers are available at every wavelength for every fiber type. For wavelengths below 750nm, we recommend pigtail style to eliminate connection loss at the receptacle interface. Options: Add "-ISOL" if an optical isolator is required (Please note that this option is only available for the 1300 to 1625nm wavelength range). Add "-BL" if OZ Optics is to provide a manual blocking screw to control the output power. 5

186 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) U-BRACKET ASSEMBLY FIBER OPTIC Fiber optic U-bracket assemblies are designed to transmit light from an optical fiber, across an air gap, and back into a second fiber with low losses. The U-bracket is prealigned at the factory for minimum insertion losses, making it very easy to use. A variety of bulk optical devices, including polarizers, isolators, filters, and waveplates, can be simply inserted into the U-bracket, allowing the user to quickly and easily test or prototype systems incorporating fiber and bulk optics. The U-Bracket assembly consists of three parts: an input fiber collimator, the U-bracket itself, and an output fiber focuser. Utilizing OZ Optics' patented tilt adjustment technique, losses of only 0.6 db are achieved across a 60mm gap for pigtailed singlemode fibers, with backreflection levels of -25dB, -40dB or -60 db available. Connector style assemblies are also available for a variety of connectors, including NTT-FC, AT&T-ST, bare fiber adapters, etc. Typical insertion losses are 1.0 db across a 60mm gap for connectorized versions, with backreflection levels typically -20 db. U-Brackets are available in different sizes, with different gap spacings according to the customer's needs. Many different custom designs can be made for your application. For instance, source to fiber versions are available, where light from either a laser, a laser diode, or an LED is transmitted across the air gap and into the output fiber. Another option is to have a photo detector attached to the output end of the U-bracket, to measure the transmitted light. Another device available is a black box with a removable filter holder, to quickly insert and remove a filter from the optical path. Contact OZ for further information. DTS0022 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05

187 ORDERING INFORMATION: Part Number UB-0A-XY-W-I-O-D UB-1A-11-W-a/b-I-O-D-LB-XY-JD-L UB-INSERT UB-250-XY-W-F UB W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L Description U-Bracket assembly with female connector receptacles. Pigtail style U-Bracket assembly with low backreflection. 0.5 OD Filter holder insert for small U-bracket UB-12, UB-02 style assemblies. Black box assembly with female receptacles, and a removable filter. Pigtail style black box assembly with low backreflection, and a removable filter. Where: A is the size of the U-Bracket; 1 for large body (H=2.82", W=2.5", A=0.32", B=1.57", T=0.32"), 2 for small body (H= 1.68", W=1.0", A=0.38", B=1.03", T=0.25" ). Custom size U-Bracket Assemblies are available on request. X,Y are the input and output connector receptacle types for connector style U-Brackets. For pigtail style U- Brackets they refer to the male connectors on the fiber ends (3 for NTT-FC, 5 for SMA 905, 8 for AT&T-ST, SC for SC connectors, X for unterminated fibers, etc.), W is the operating wavelength in nm, a,b are the fiber core and cladding sizes, respectively, in microns, I,O,F are the input and output fiber types (S for singlemode, M for multimode, P for polarization maintaining fibers), D is the length of the U-Bracket body in inches. (Standard sizes include D=1.85", D=3.03 for large body U-Brackets, D=1.15" or 1.80" for small body U-Brackets), LB is the desired backreflection level (25dB, 40dB, or 60dB for pigtail style systems), JD is the fiber jacket type (1 for uncabled fiber, 3 for 3mm OD loose tube Kevlar, 3A for 3mm OD armored cable, and 5A for 5mm armored cable.), L is the fiber length in meters. Example: A customer wants to use a pigtail style U-Bracket for 1300nm fiber, with 40dB backreflection. The input side is polarization maintaining fiber, while the output side is singlemode fiber. Both fibers are one meter long, cabled with 3.0mm Kevlar cable, and terminated with male NTT-FC connectors. The small body size U-bracket with the 1.15 inch body length is to be used. OZ Optics' part number: UB /125-P-S FILTER HOLDER INSERT DIMENSIONS

188 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) UNIVERSAL CONNECTORS AND HYBRID PATCHCORDS Features: Allows Patchcords With Different Connector Types To Be Mated Connectors With Different Ferrule Sizes Supported Minimizes Losses Between Fibers With Different Core Sizes And Numerical Apertures Male To Female (Hybrid) Connector Versions Rugged And Compact Design Low Insertion Losses Low Return Losses Low Cost Applications: Patch panel interconnects Fiber Distribution Hubs Test And Measurement Stations Optical Delivery Systems Product Description: Universal connectors are designed to allow one to mate two patchcords that have different connectors on their ends. This is essential when working with components and equipment from different suppliers, which in turn use different connectors. Universal connectors come in three major variations. The simplest are butt joint style universal connectors. These connectors have different female receptacles on either side. The patchcords are simply plugged into either side, and the fiber ends butt together in the middle. These connectors offer an inexpensive and reliable way to connect matching singlemode, multimode, or polarization maintaining patchcords with differing fiber terminations. They can connect patchcords with either matching PC finishes or matching APC finishes. These adaptors are available in FC to SC, FC to ST, ST to SC, ST to SMA905 and ST to SMA 906 formats. We now also offer connectors with a universal ferrule adaptor design, for connectors that have 2.5mm diameter ferrules, or 1.25mm diameter ferrules. These receptacles are best suited for temporary measurements, and give added flexibility. Hybrid patchcords are also offered. These connectors have a female receptacle on one side, and a male connector on the other side. A small length of fiber lies within the device to transmit the light. These connectors allow one to convert an output from male connector type to another in as short a time as possible. Male-to-male hybrid patchcords are also available. Lens style universal connectors are ideal for connecting fibers that have different optical characteristics. They consist of a an input receptacle, a collimating lens, a focusing lens and the output receptacle. Light from the input fiber is first collimated, then focused back into the output fiber. The alignment is precisely controlled using OZ Optics patentened alignment technique. Lens style universal connectors are normally prealigned for standard applications, such as for standard 9/125 singlemode fibers for telecom applications. However they are tilt adjustable, to enable one to compensate for any offsets between the fiber cores and the connector housings. This is very useful when working with fibers that have concentricity problems, or unusual shapes, such as D shaped polarization maintaing fibers. Lens style universal connectors are also ideal for connecting fibers that have different optical characteristics. An example would be connecting a singlemode fiber with a high numerical aperture and small core size to one with a lower numerical aperture and large core size. By selecting different focal length lenses for the input and output sides, the focused spot size can be changed to best match the characteristics of the output fiber. The device will work in both directions with low losses. Similarly one can design universal connectors to couple light from low NA, large core multimode fibers into high NA small core multimode mode fibers. Please note that universal connectors will not couple light efficiently from a multimode fiber into a singlemode fiber. High losses are unavoidable in this situation, since multimode fibers have both larger numerical apertures and larger core sizes. Butt Joint Style Universal Connectors Hybrid Patchcords Lens Style Universal Connector Ø0.173 Ø0.088 THRU C BORE Ø0.156 x DEEP 2 PLCS M8X0.75 THREAD Figure 1: Typical Dimmensions For Butt Joint Style Universal Connector DTS0082 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 09-May-02 1

189 Description Hybrid patchcord with a male connector input and female receptacle output Part Number AA a/b- XY a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber, See standard tables for other standard fiber sizes X = Y = Input connector code: Output female receptacle code 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 5 = SMA = SMA = AT & T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC Description Part Number Hybrid patchcord with a male connectors a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber, See standard tables for other standard fiber sizes AA-200-1X-a/b- Y X = Y = Input connector code: Output connector code 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 5 = SMA = SMA = AT & T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC Description Lens style universal connector Part Number AA-300- XY -W-F X, Y = Input and output receptacle or connector code: 3 = NTT-FC/PC, Super NTT-FC/PC, Ultra NTT- PC/PC or Angled NTT-FC/PC 5 = SMA = AT & T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC F = Fiber type: W = Wavelength: S = Singlemode Fiber M = Multimode Fiber Specify in nanometers: Example: 1300/1550 for telecommunication wavelengths Description Butt joint style universal connectors Part Number AA-200-XY XY Input and output connector codes: 3 = NTT-FC/PC, Super NTT-FC/PC, ULTRA NTT-FC/PC 5 = SMA = SMA = AT&T-ST SC = SC 1.25U = 1.25mm Universal adaptor 2.5U = 2.5mm universal adaptor. 3

190 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) USB-BASED OPTICAL TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER Product Description OZ-UFO-320 and OZ-UFO-321 are compact, cost-effective, plug-and-play Optical Time-domain Reflectometer (OTDR) units, designed for full-range fiber fault detection. With fieldwork in mind it is ideal for optical fiber installation, maintenance, field construction, and other on-site fault-locations analysis. The OTDR unit is designed to operate with a laptop or any other computer running on Windows 98, 2000 or above. A USB cable connects the computer and the OTDR unit. The application program (AP) sends commands from the computer to the OTDR unit and gets data back, both through the USB port. The USB port and a rechargeable Lithium Ion battery power the unit. Applications Fiber link supervision Fiber identification Remote fiber test systems Fiber length measurements Fiber break point locating Acceptance testing Fiber attenuation measurements Splicing loss detection Features Plug-and-play unit via USB port Full function OTDR application program compatible with Windows 98, Windows 2000, or above Rugged, portable and easy to use Automatic fiber length detection and fault event analysis Mapping function with actual position display Powered by USB port and rechargeable Lithium Ion battery Figure 1: USB-Based OTDR Module Figure 2: USB-Based OTDR Connected To Laptop Computer Figure 3: Typical Windows Display Figure 4: Typical Event Map Display DTS0098 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 23-Sept-04 1

191 Standard Product Specifications Model OZ-UFO-320 OZ-UFO-321 Wavelength 1310/1550 ± 20 nm 1550/1625 ± 20 nm Dynamic Range (db) Fiber Under Test Optical Connector Pulse Width Event Dead Zone 9/125 µm singlemode fiber FC/PC 10, 30, 100, 300, 1000, 3000, 10000, ns, Auto Effective 35/33 33/31 SNR=1 38/36 36/34 5 m Attenuation Dead Zone Sampling Resolution 40 m 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 m Max. Sampling Points 128,000 Distance Accuracy Linearity Return Loss Accuracy Max. Display Range Dimensions Weight ±(2 m + 3 x10-5 x distance + marker resolution) (Fiber refractive index error not included) ± 0.05 db/db or 0.1 db (whichever greater) ± 4 db 240 km (150 miles) 220 x 130 x 55 mm without bumper 950 g Power consumption Operating: 3.6 watt Idle: 2 watt Power Supply Lithium Ion Battery & AC /DC Adapter ( 100 ~ 240V; 50 ~ 60Hz) Notes: Measurements are made at 23 ± 2 C. 2

192 Features: 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) VARIABLE ATTENUATORS BLOCKING RECEPTACLE STYLE Compact, rugged housing High resolution Wide wavelength range Wide variety of connectors available Polarization insensitive Wide wavelength range LOW COST! Applications: CATV, LAN and Telecommunications use Receiver padding Test and measurement Optical power equalization Product Description: Variable attenuators consist of two baseplates with lenses. The two baseplates are aligned for optimum coupling efficiency using a patented alignment technique. A threaded radial screw is used to block the collimated beam between the two lenses. Rotating the screw changes its position within the collimated beam, thus varying the power level coupled into the receiver fiber. Because the attenuator works by directly blocking the beam, it is polarization insensitive. Receptacle Style Variable Attenuator Because of limitations in receptacle tolerances, receptacle style attenuators are not recommended for singlemode or polarization maintaining applications requiring low losses and good repeatability. Instead, please refer to the data sheet titled Pigtail Style Inline Variable Attenuators, Beam Blocking Style. Figure 1. DTS0074 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 1

193 Ordering Information for Standard Parts: Bar Code Part Number Description 187 BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 633nm for multimode applications with female FC receptacles on both sides BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 700nm for multimode applications with female FC receptacles on both sides BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 1550nm for multimode applications with female FC receptacles on both sides. 188 BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 633nm for multimode applications with female SMA 905 receptacle on both ends BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 820nm for multimode applications with female SMA 905 receptacles on both sides BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 1300nm for multimode applications with female SMA 905 receptacle on both ends BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 690nm for multimode applications with female SMA 905 receptacle on input end and ST receptacle on output end BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 800nm for multimode applications with female ST receptacles on both sides BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 904nm for multimode applications with female ST receptacles on both sides BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 1300nm for multimode applications with female ST receptacles on both sides. Standard Product Specifications: Insertion Loss: Backreflection: Attenuation Range: Available Wavelengths: Vibration: Typically 2dB for multimode attenuators 15dB for receptacle style attenuators (BB-200 style), 2 to 80 db with 0.01dB resolution up to 10dB, 0.1dB resolution up to 30 db nm Less than ±0.05dB change between 10Hz-55Hz Ordering Examples for Standard Parts: A customer needs a variable attenuator with female ST receptacles for 1300nm wavelength for a multimode application. In this case OZ Part number, barcode and description will be: Bar Code Part Number Description 2169 BB M Receptacle style variable attenuator at 1300nm for multimode applications with female ST receptacles on both sides Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases nonrecurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is the application? 2. What wavelengths do you plan on using? 3. What power level do you need to handle? 4. What size multimode fiber do you plan on using? Receptacle style attenuator: Female Receptacle Code: 3 = NTT-FC/PC, Super, and Ultra NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT&T-ST 5 = SMA 905 SC = SC BB-200-XY-W-M Fiber type: S=Singlemode M=Multimode P=Polarization Maintaining Wavelength: Specify in nanometers (Example: 633 for 633nm) 2

194 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) VARIABLE FIBER OPTIC ATTENUATOR REFLECTIVE STYLE Features: Neutral density filter or high power versions are available Rugged and compact Wide wavelength range Singlemode, and multimode fiber versions Low PDL and wavelength dependence Mode independent attenuation in multimode applications with neutral density filter version Wide attenuation range Low backreflection Low Cost Applications: Optical power equalization and power control for WDMs and multi-channel optically amplified networks Telecommunications CATV LAN Test and measurement Receiver padding. Reflective Style Variable Fiber Optic Attenuator Product Description: OZ Optics offers a complete line of low cost, compact PC board mountable reflective style variable attenuators with low backreflection. These attenuators can be used for C, L and S wavelength bands, with minimal changes in insertion loss. Reflector style housings are ideal for applications where the input and output fibers must be attached to the same side of the attenuator. Mounting holes provide easy attachment to PC boards and patch panels. The reflector style attenuators contain either a variable neutral density filter or a blocking plate depending on the attenuator version selected. The blocking style is ideal for high power (over 50mW) applications, while the neutral density filter provides more uniform attenuation in multimode applications. The attenuation is controlled by a turn screw on the side of the attenuator, which controls the position of the filter or plate. Figure 1. Mechanical Dimensions (inches) DTS0075 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 1

195 Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: 1. A customer needs a reflective style attenuator with neutral density filter for 1300/1550nm with 40dB backreflection or better. He wants the fibers to be standard 9/125 micron, 3mm OD cabled, single mode fiber. The fibers should be 1 meter long and terminated with Super polished FC connectors, on both ends. Our standard part number will be: Bar Code Part Number Description 3346 BB /1550-9/125-S-40-3S3S-3-1-ND Reflector style variable attenuator at 1300/1550nm with 1m long, 3mm OD jacketed single mode fiber with FC/Super PC connectors on both ends, 40dB return loss. ND: Neutral density 2. A customer needs a high power version reflective style attenuator for 1550nm with 50dB backreflection or better. He wants the fibers to be standard 9/125 micron, 3mm OD cabled, single mode fiber. The fibers should be 1 meter long and terminated with Ultra polished SC connectors, on both ends. Our standard part number will be: Bar Code Part Number Description BB /1550-9/125-S-50-SCUSCU-3-1-HP Reflector style variable attenuator at 1300/1550nm with 1m long, 3mm OD jacketed single mode fiber with SC/Ultra PC connectors on both ends, 50dB return loss. HP: High power, up to 2 watts. Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 50 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What wavelengths are you operating at? 2. How much power will be transmitted through the attenuator? 3. What type of fiber do you wish to use? 4. What is fiber length and jacket OD? 5. What is the worst acceptable return loss? 6. Do you need a variable or fixed attenuation? 7. What connectors do you need at each end of fiber? 8. What environmental requirements do you need to meet? 9. Are there any special performance requirements that you need to meet? Reflector Style Attenuator: BB W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-V W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers: Example: 1300/1550 for 1300 to 1550nm wavelength range a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber, See the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes. F = Fiber type: M=Multimode S=Singlemode P=Polarization Maintaining (PM) LB = Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode fibers, 35dB for MM fibers Note 1: For low insertion loss add "-LL" to the end of the part number. LL = 0.8dB with units that have 60dB return loss, LL = 1dB for other attenuators. Ordering Example For Custom Parts: Example 1: A customer wants to order a reflective style, beam blocker version, single mode attenuator at 1300nm, with 2m and 900 micron cabled fiber on both sides with FC super PC polished connectors and 40dB back reflection with low loss. The part number should be: BB /1550-9/125-S-40-3S3S-1-2-HP-LL V = Version ND = Neutral Density Version HP = Beam Blocking Style L = Fiber length in meters, on each side of the device. If they are different, specify the input and output lengths separated by a comma. Example: To order 1 meter of the fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace the L with 1,7. Total fiber length is input fiber length plus output fiber length JD = Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable X,Y = Connector code: X = No connector 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT & T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC/PC LCA = Angled LC/PC See the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors. Example 2: A customer wants to order reflective style, neutral density version attenuator at 850nm with 62.5/125µ multimode fiber, 3m at input, 2m at output, 3mm OD cabled with SC/PC connector on input end, Super FC connector on output end, 35dB back reflection. The part number should be: BB /125-M-35-SC3S-3-3,2-ND 3

196 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) VARIABLE FIBER OPTIC ATTENUATORS NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTER VERSION PIGTAIL STYLE Features: Rugged and compact size Wide wavelength range Singlemode, polarization maintaining and multimode fiber versions Low Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) Low wavelength dependence Mode insensitive attenuation Low backreflection Designed to meet Telcordia requirements Low cost Applications: Optical power equalization and power control for WDMs and multi-channel optically amplified networks Telecommunications CATV LAN Test and measurement Receiver padding Optical sensors Neutral Density Style Variable Attenuator Product Description: OZ Optics offers a complete line of low cost, compact PC board mountable, pigtail style variable attenuators with low backreflection. These attenuators are designed to meet Telcordia requirements. These attenuators can be used for 1300nm and 1550nm, as well as for C ( nm), L ( nm) and S ( nm) bands, with minimal changes in the insertion loss. Mounting holes provide easy attachment to PC boards and patch panels. The mounting hole patterns and attenuator sizes can be modified to meet our customer requirements on OEM orders. The attenuators consist of two baseplates. Each baseplate contains a fiber followed by a collimating lens. The attenuator is prealigned for optimum coupling efficiency using a patented tilt alignment technique. A variable neutral density filter is used to provide more uniform attenuation in multimode applications than the blocking screw technique. The attenuation is controlled by a turn screw on the side of the attenuator, which controls the position of the filter. Figure 1: Neutral Density Style Attenuator Dimensions (inches) Variable attenuators based on the neutral density filter are ideal for multimode fiber applications where one may be concerned about model noise. The term multimode means there is more than one path for light to travel inside a single fiber. These paths are known as modes. It does not mean the unit consists of multiple fibers in a bundle. When coherent laser light is coupled into multimode fiber, the output shows speckles. Bending the fiber causes the speckle pattern to change. If the losses in a system depend on which modes are excited, then changing the modes excited in the fiber changes the output power. This is known as modal noise. If the source being used is an LED, then one does not see speckles, and modal noise is not an issue. However, for laser sources, modal noise is an issue. When blocking style attenuators are used with multimode fiber, some modes are blocked, while others are transmitted. This can produce 1dB or greater modal noise fluctuations with coherent sources. A variable attenuator using a neutral density filter is not as strongly affected by modal noise. However, neutral density filter attenuators offer lower attenuation range (around 40dB) and can only handle about 50mW of power. While generally used for multimode applications, OZ Optics can also produce singlemode and polarization maintaining versions. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. DTS0064 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 19-Feb-05 1

197 Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 10 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Customs Parts: 1. What is your operating wavelength? 2. What type of fiber do you wish to use? 3. What is the worst acceptable return loss? 4. What connectors, if any, do you need? 5. What should the fiber length and jacket diameter be? 6. How much power will be transmitted through the attenuator? 7. Would a beam blocking attenuator be better suited for your purposes? 8. Do you need a variable or fixed attenuation? 9. What environmental requirements do you need to meet? 10. Are there any special performance requirements that you need to meet? Neutral Density Style Attenuator: BB W-a/b-F-LB-XY-JD-L-ND W = Wavelength: Specify in nanometers: Example: 1300/1550 for 1300 and 1550nm wavelength ranges a/b = Fiber core/cladding sizes, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm SM fiber. 50/125, 62.5/125 are standard multimode sizes. See the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other standard fiber sizes F = Fiber type: S = Singlemode M = Multimode P = Polarization Maintaining (PM) LB = Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode and PM fibers, 35dB for multimode fibers Note 1: For low loss attenuators add "LL" to the end of the part number. LL = 0.6dB with units that have 60dB return loss, LL = 1dB for rest of the attenuators. Note 2: Add -ER=25 or -ER=30 for extinction ratios of 25 or 30dB respectively. If not specified, the extinction ratio for PM versions will be > 20dB. L = Fiber length in meters, on each side of the device. Example: To order 1 meter of the fiber at the input and 7 meters at the output, replace the L with 1, 7 JD = Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 micron OD hytrel jacket 3 = 3mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable. See the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other jacket sizes X,Y = Input & output connector codes: X = No connector 3S = Super NTT-FC/PC 3U = Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A = Angled NTT-FC/PC 8 = AT & T-ST SC = SC SCA = Angled SC LC = LC/PC See the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other connectors Ordering Examples for Custom Parts: Example 1: A customer wants to order a multimode attenuator with a neutral density filter at 1300nm, with 2m long and 900 microns cabled, 50/125 micron fiber with FC/Super PC polished connectors on both ends and 35dB back reflection with low loss. The fiber is to be a total length of 4 meters, 900 microns cabled, and with the attenuators in the middle (ie. 2 meters on each end) The part number should be: BB / /125-M-35-3S3S-1-2-ND-LL Example 2: A customer wants to order a pigtailed variable attenuator at 850nm in a rectangular housing with 62.5/125 multimode fiber, 3m long at input, 2m long at output, 3mm OD cabled with neutral density filter, with no connectors and 35dB back reflection. The part number should be: BB /125-M-35-XX-3-3,2-ND 3

198 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: Up to 48 fiber V-Groove arrays Singlemode, multimode or polarization maintaining fibers Ribbon or individual fibers Assemblies with bare fiber or 900µm jacketing, and with or without connectors 900µm jacketed breakouts available, up to 2 meters in length Custom configurations possible for OEM applications Designed to meet Telcordia specifications Applications: Arrayed Waveguide (AWG) devices Planar Lightwave Chips (PLC) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexers (DWDM) MEMS devices Miniaturized or integrated fiber optic components Product Description: V-GROOVE ASSEMBLIES OZ Optics V-Groove array assemblies assist in developing next generation photonic devices. The arrays are manufactured using precision silicon wafer V-Groove technology in conjunction with a Pyrex lid, enabling sub-micron alignment accuracy with UV cure attachment capabilities. 8 Channel PM Fiber Pigtailed V-Groove Array OZ Optics V-Groove array assemblies are available with singlemode, multimode or PANDA type Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers. Customization can even include different types of fibers assembled into a single array. PM fibers offer a means to control the polarization of optical signals throughout the system thus minimizing Polarization Dependant Losses (PDL) and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) effects. This control is crucial in developing high speed 10 Gb/s, next generation 40 Gb/s, and faster systems. In general, OZ Optics uses polarization maintaining fibers based on the PANDA fiber structure when building polarization maintaining components and patchcords. However, OZ Optics can construct devices using other PM fiber structures. We do carry some alternative fiber types in stock, so please contact our sales department for availability. If necessary, we are willing to use customer supplied fibers to build devices. 32 Channel V-Groove Assembly Standard PANDA style PM arrays are manufactured with the polarization axis (stress rods) aligned vertical to the V-Groove base within 1. High grade assemblies with one to eight channels can be provided with the stress rods aligned to within 0.5. Arrays can also be provided with the fibers aligned parallel to the base, alternating axes or at custom angles. When supplied with a breakout and connectors, the alignment of the connector is also to the slow axis, within 3 for standard connectors or available to within 1.5 for high grade connectors. V-Groove array assemblies can be manufactured with a hermetic feedthrough attached. This enables the development of multichannel photonic devices capable of meeting Telcordia requirements. Fiber breakouts can also be added, to convert ribbonized fibers into separated fibers, capable of being connectorized. Single Channel V-Groove Assembly Hermetic V-Groove Assembly PM Fiber V-Groove Assembly Endface V-Groove Assembly With 900 Micron OD Breakout And Connectors DTS0083 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 09/03/02 1

199 General Specifications: Polish angle: 0, 8 ± 0.3 Custom angles available up to 15 Insertion loss: <0.5 db per fiber Fiber spacing: 250µm fiber to fiber 500µm gap between each 8 fiber ribbon (for 16 fiber count and higher) Other spacings available upon request V-Groove spacing accuracy: ±0.5 micron absolute (See application notes) Fiber types: Singlemode SMF-28 ribbon fiber (9/125) Multimode ribbon fiber (50/125 or 62.5/125) Polarization maintaining (PANDA Type) fiber (individual) Others custom fibers available (individual) Breakout: Box dimensions 18mm x 50mm Breakout length up to 2 meters Breakout tube is white (singlemode or multimode) or blue (PM) 900 micron Hytrel Connectors available SC, FC, ST, LC and MU Terminations PM Fiber Pigtailed V-Groove Assembly Specifications: Polarization extinction ratio 1 PM fiber orientation Angle alignment accuracy of stress rods Note 1 : 25dB versions can be made for one or two channels One to eight channels: >20dB 1. Twelve or more channels: >17dB Standard alignment is with the stress rods vertical. Other alignment angles are available. Each fiber can be individually aligned and monitored to ensure good extinction ratios ± 1 ( Standard Grade) or ± 0.5 (Premium Grade, one to eight channels only) Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 50 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. How many fibers do you need? 2. What fiber spacing is needed for your application? (250µm standard) 3. Do you need the endface polished at an angle?(8 angle standard) 4. What type of fiber do you need (singlemode, multimode, PANDA type polarization maintaining) 5. Do you need connectors for the assembly? N = Number of V-Grooves 1,2,4,8,12,16,24,32,or 48 S = V-Groove Spacing (in microns) 127, 250, 400 or is standard A = Angle of Polish 0, 8 degrees standard VGA-N-S-A-D-VL-VW-VT-F-W-a/b-X-JD-L-B B = Breakout length (in meters) 2 meter maximum, 0.5 meter is typical L = Overall Length (in meters) Standard length is 1-2 meters D = Direction of angle A,B,C,D (see Figure 2) X for flat polish (0 ) VL = Length (in millimeters) 10.3 is standard VW = Width (in millimeters) See standard specifications for standard chip dimensions VT = Thickness (in millimeters) 2.03 is standard F = Fiber Type S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining M = Multimode W = Wavelength of operation a/b = Fiber Core/Cladding Diameter 9/125 for Corning SMF-28 SM fiber 6/125 for Corning Flexcore 1060 SM fiber 7/125 for 1300nm PANDA PM fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA PM fiber JD = Jacket Diameter 0.25 = bare fiber, 250µm coated and ribbon fiber 0.40 = PM fiber with 400µm coating (500µm spacing only) 1 = 900µm jacketed (Hytrel) X = Connector Code Note: Standard Assemblies have the same connectors on all fibers 3S = Super FC/PC (<-40dB RL) 3U = Ultra FC/PC (<-50dB RL) 3A = Angled FC/PC (<-60dB RL) 8 = ST SC = SC (<-40dB RL) SCU = Ultra SC (<-50dB RL) SCA = Angled SC (<-60dB RL) LC = LC LCA = Angled LC MU = MU X = No Connector 5

200 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) VISIBLE FIBER OPTIC FAULT LOCATOR Features: High visibility (up to 6 km with a 1mW, 635nm source) Higher output up to 30 mw, 635 nm power versions available Continuous light or pulse modulation Power supply options include alkaline batteries or AC/DC adaptor Carrying pouch with belt clip for pocket size version 1.25mm and 2.5 mm ID universal connector receptacles available Pocket size, pen size and bench top versions available Low battery indicator for pocket size version Low cost,compact, rugged, and lightweight 532 nm green fault locator available Optional built-in attenuator for controlling power output User selectable auto turn off mode Pocket Size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator (AA Battery Version) Applications: Singlemode and multimode fiber testing Fiber identifier applications Locating breaks and bends in fibers and connectors Identifying fibers and tracing optical signals by using modulated signals Optimizing splices Product Description: The Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator launches 635 nm visible laser diode light into the fiber. When light encounters a break or sharp bend, it scatters, and the scattered light can be observed emerging from the cable. Fault locators can locate breaks in short patchcords, which an OTDR cannot detect due to their operating dead zone. A fault locator is also much less expensive than an OTDR. However, they are not recommended for use with dark-colored or armored cables. Pocket Size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator (9V Battery Version) Fault locators are available in three sizes: bench top, pocket size and pen size. The pocket size fault locators can be operated in either continuous wave (CW) mode or in pulse modulation mode. Pulse modulation aids in locating faults under high ambient light conditions and improves battery life. 2 Hz modulation is easy to detect by the naked eye, while 270 Hz and 2 khz pulse modulation modes are used for fiber identification by detectors. The pocket size fault locator comes with a carrying pouch and belt clip. Pen size fault locators are CW only. High power versions are available as bench top units. These are CW only. Another use for fault locators is to check connector quality. Often a connector may appear to be perfect, even when viewed with a microscope, but inside the connector ferrule itself, poor gluing or dirt may create a microbend in the fiber. This microbend will produce excess insertion losses or return losses, and may result in premature failure of the connector. If one launches visible light through the fiber, so that it emerges from the connector in question, one can readily see the distortion as a series of rings superimposed on a normal output (See Figure 1). Bending or twisting the fiber may affect the overall intensity pattern, but not the ring pattern itself. One of the key advantages of OZ Optics' pocket size and bench top model fault locators is that they use singlemode fiber for 633nm, which has a four micron diameter core instead of a nine micron diameter core. This reduces any potential misalignment errors between the connector on the fault locator and the connector on the fiber. It also ensures that the light launched into the cable being tested matches the fundamental mode as much as possible. The light coming out of the other end will tend to look circular and Gaussian, rather than showing several modes. This makes it easier to identify microbends in connectors. Pen Size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator Bench Top High Power Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator (up to 10mW) DTS0084 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 18-Feb-05 1

201 Ordering Examples For Standard Parts: 1. A customer needs a visible fiber optic fault locator with 1 mw output power, 2.5 mm ID universal receptacle, modulation function, and AC/DC adaptor for North America. Bar Code Part Number Description 3970 FODL-22.5U Pocket-size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator with 635 nm wavelength, 1 mw output, and 2.5 mm ID universal receptacle AC-9VDC-NA Universal 110/220 VAC to 9VDC power supply adaptor for North America. 2. A customer needs a visible fiber optic fault locator with 0.5 mw output power, and 2.5 mm ID universal receptacle. Modulation function is not needed. Bar Code Part Number Description FODL-02.5U Pen Size Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator with635 nm wavelength, 0.5 mw output, and 2.5 mm ID universal receptacle. Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well-informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1. What is the maximum output power level that you require? 2. Do you prefer pen size, pocket size or a bench top model? 3. What type of receptacle is required on the fault locator? Visible Fiber Optic Fault Locator: FODL-AX-W-P A = Size: 0 = Pen size 2 = Pocket size (9 volt battery version) 3 = Bench Top Mode 4 = Pocket size (AA battery version) X = Receptacle Code¹: 3S = Standard, Super and Ultra NTT-FC/PC receptacle 3A = Angled NTT- FC/PC² SC = SC² SCA = Angled SC² 8 = AT&T-ST² 2.5U = Universal receptacle for 2.5mm diameter ferrules ( FC, ST, SC, etc.) 1.25U = Universal receptacle for 1.25mm diameter ferrules ( LC, MU, etc.) P = Output Power Level (in mw, coupled into a 9/125µm fiber): Up to 0.4mW for Class I devices 0.8-1mW for Class II (standard)³. Caution: Eye protection must be worn while using fault locators with powers above 1mW W = Wavelength, in nm: 532 = 532 nm 635 = 635 nm Notes: ¹ See Table 6 of the OZ Standard Tables data sheet for other receptacles. ² Not available in pen size model ³ Contact OZ Optics for non-standard power values. Figure 1: Using a Fault Locator To Find Connector Microbends 4

202 219 Westbrook Rd, Ottawa, ON, Canada, K0A 1L0 Toll Free: Tel:(613) Fax:(613) Features: PM fiber versions Miniature inline Versions Visible wavelength (Red/Green/Blue) versions High power handling Low Insertion Losses Low return loss Wide wavelength range High power handling Coarse and dense WDM versions LOW COST! WAVELENGTH DIVISION MULTIPLEXERS Applications: Drop/Add Filters for Telecommunications Fiber Lasers Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifiers Confocal Microscopy Laser Spectroscopy Imaging systems 980nm Pumping Product Description: Wavelength division multiplexers (WDMs) are used to combine light of different wavelengths into a single fiber. The light from each fiber is first collimated. The collimated beams are then combined using a dichroic filter, with typically the longer wavelength transmitted from port T, the shorter wavelength reflected from port R. The combined beams are then focused into the output fiber at Port 1. OZ Optics manufacturers wave division multiplexors for both telecom and nontelecom applications. Of special interest are our WDMs for combining visible wavelengths. Our RGB multiplexors combine light at red, green and blue wavelengths into singlemode or polarization maintaining fiber. This makes them ideal for applications such as confocal microscopy, white light imaging, full colour holograpy and others. One advantage of OZ Optics WDM's is that different fiber types can be used on the input and output ends of the device. This is especially useful in fiber amplifier applications, when the Erbium doped fibers have a different core diameter and numerical aperture. WDM's with 1dB typical insertion losses have been made this way. OZ Optics also offers source to fiber wavelength division multiplexers, where the sources are mounted directly onto the device. This improves the overall system efficiency, and reduces costs. Our miniature size WDMs are ideal for telecommunication applications such as drop/add filters for either coarse WDM (CWDM) or dense DWM applications. They are also used for combining 980 to 1080nm pump light with 1550nm signals in erbium doped fiber amplifiers (EDFAs). Laser diode power combiners come in a small, rugged package and are available either with female receptacles to accept different connectors or pigtail style, with the fiber directly attached. Pigtail style combiners are recommended for optimum stability, minimum insertion losses, and low backreflection. Receptacle style systems are best suited for applications where the output coupler is used with a multimode fiber. If a receptacle style combiner is used with a singlemode fiber, then the user may experience low coupling efficiency. OZ Optics also manufactures polarization maintaining WDM's. The device typically maintains polarization to better than 20dB for 1300 and 1550nm applications. Higher extinction ratios are available on request. OZ Optics specializes in manufacturing custom designed WDM's. Contact OZ Optics for further information. Miniature Inline Wavelength Division Multiplexor Standard Wavelength Division Multiplexer RGB Wavelength Division Multiplexor Laser Diode Power Combiner DTS0089 OZ Optics reserves the right to change any specifications without prior notice. 02-Dec

203 Standard Product Specifications: Parameter Units Condition Value WDM Type WDM-12P WDM-13P WDM-12N CWDM-12N DWDM-12N WDM-11P Description Standard Pigtail Style Miniature Inline Style Laser Diode Combiner Available Wavelengths nm Return Losses Insertion Losses (Typical) 2 Insertion Losses (Maximum) 2 Insertion Losses (60dB Return Loss Option) db db db nm nm 40, 50, or 60 40, 50, or 60 40, 50, or nm nm nm nm Not applicable 3 Not applicable 3 db nm 0.7 max 0.7 max Not applicable nm Polarization Extinction Ratio db nm nm 20, 25, or or Power Handling mw SM or PM fiber, 1550nm Operating Temperature C -20 to Applies to WDM-12N parts only. For CWDM and DWDM parts, available wavelenths range from 180 to 1650nm. 2 For components whose wavelengths are separated by more than 20nm and less than 200nm 3 For laser diode power combiners, actual insertion losses depend on the laser diodes selected for the application. 4 Higher power versions (up to 5 Watts into singlemode fiber, higher into multimode fiber), are available on request. Port R 1.93 [49] 1.38 [35] 0.91 [23] Port T Port 1 Ø 0.12 [3.1] Ø 0.19 [4.75] Ø 0.22 [5.5] Units are in inches Units are in inches [mm] Figure 1: Miniature Inline WDM Dimensions Figure 2: Standard Wave Division Multiplexor Dimensions 2-56 x 0.10 DEEP TAPPED MOUNTING HOLES 2PLCS Ø1.31 Ø x 0.10 DEEP TAPPED MOUNTING HOLES 2PLCS Ø1.31 Units are in inches 0.53 Ø DICHROIC MIRROR Figure 3:Laser Diode Power Combiner Dimensions 2

204 Ordering Information For Standard Parts: Bar Code Part Number Description WDM-12P /1550-7/125-PPP-60-3U3U3U-3-1 Wavelength division multiplexer for 1300 & 1550nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 7/125 PM fiber pigtails, 60dB return loss and ultra FC/PC connectors WDM-12P /1550-8/125-PPP-60-3A3A3A-3-1 Wavelength division multiplexer for 1480 & 1550nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, 60dB return loss and angled FC/PC connectors WDM-12P /1550-8/125-PPP-40-3A3A3A-3-1 Wavelength division multiplexer for 980 & 1550nm with 1 meter long, 3mm OD jacketed 8/125 PM fiber pigtails, 40dB return loss and angled FC/PC connectors. Ordering Information For Custom Parts: OZ Optics welcomes the opportunity to provide custom designed products to meet your application needs. As with most manufacturers, customized products do take additional effort so please expect some differences in the pricing compared to our standard parts list. In particular, we will need additional time to prepare a comprehensive quotation, and lead times will be longer than normal. In most cases non-recurring engineering (NRE) charges, lot charges, and a 1 piece minimum order will be necessary. These points will be carefully explained in your quotation, so your decision will be as well informed as possible. We strongly recommend buying our standard products. Questionnaire For Custom Parts: 1) What wavelength range are you interested in? 2) What type of fiber is being used? Singlemode, Multimode or PM? 3) What power levels are being used in your system? 4) What coupling efficiency do you require? 5) Are you using a polarized or randomly polarized light source? 6) What return losses are acceptable in your system? 7) What connector type are you using? 8) How do you intend to use this product? Note concerning part numbers: Depending on the configuration of the desired design, the fiber types, lengths, and connectors may be different on each channel. Therefore it is important to correctly identify each port in the proper order. When specifying wavelengths, list them from shortest to longest. When identifying fiber types, start from the shortest wavelength to the longest wavelength, and identify the combined port last. This rule is also used when specifying the connector types and fiber lengths Description Wavelength Division Multiplexer: Part Number WDM-1NA-111-Wi/Wo-a/b-ABC-LB-XYZ-JD-L N = A = Wi/Wo = a/b = Fiber core/cladding size, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber See tables 1 to 5 ofthe Standard Tables for other Sizes ABC, Number of wavelengths to combine (2, 3, 4, ect) Package style P for standard pigtail style N for miniature inline style Operating Wavelengths in nanometers Fiber types: on each port M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining L = Fiber length, in meters JD = X,Y,Z = Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable Connector type on each end 3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC 8=AT&T-ST SC=SC SCA=Angled SC LC=LC LCA=Angled LC MU=MU X=No Connector LB=Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM fibers only. (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength ranges only) 35dB for multimode fibers 3

205 Pigtail Style Laser Diode Combiner: WDM-11P-a/b-F-Wi/Wo-LB-X-JD-L a/b= Fiber core/cladding size, in microns 9/125 for 1300/1550nm corning SMF-28 singlemode fiber 8/125 for 1550nm PANDA style PM fiber See tables 1 to 5 ofthe Standard Tables for other Sizes F Fiber types: on the output port M = Multimode S = Singlemode P = Polarization Maintaining Wi/Wo = Operating Wavelengths in nanometers LB=Backreflection level: 40, 50 or 60dB for singlemode or PM fibers only. (60dB for 1290 to 1620nm wavelength ranges only) 35dB for multimode fibers L = Fiber length, in meters JD = X,Y,Z = Fiber jacket type: 1 = 900 µm OD Hytrel jacket 3 = 3 mm OD Kevlar reinforced PVC cable Connector type on each end 3S=Super NTT-FC/PC 3U=Ultra NTT-FC/PC 3A=Angled NTT-FC/PC SC=SC SCA=Angled SC LC=LC X=No Connector See table 6 of the standard tables for other connector types Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs): Q: What wavelength ranges are available? A: OZ Optics offers a variety of WDMs working from 400nm to 1650nm. Custom designs are available for combining and splitting most combinations of wavelengths in this region. Q: Can I use different fibers on each port? A: Yes, OZ Optics WDM design offers the flexibility of having different fiber types on each of the ports. Q: Can I use high power with these WDMs? A: Yes, OZ Optics standard design can handle up to 200mW, for higher power applications a custom design can be done to handle up to 2W. Q: What is the standard package size? Can I get a smaller package? A: The standard packages for WDMs use a 0.8 or 1.6 inch cube design. These packages are ideal for low cost proto-type applications. For OEM applications OZ Optics will work with you to design a package that meets your size requirements. Q: Do you offer WDM s that can combine more than two wavelengths? A: Yes. Systems that combine 3 and 4 different wavelengths have also been made. Application Notes: Wavelength Division Multiplexers (WDM) are used to combine and split (multiplex and demultiplex) signals in different systems ranging from telecommunications to imaging systems. The basic principle of WDM is based on thin film filters that transmit light in a certain spectral range and reflect light in another spectral range. Figure 3 below demonstrates the basic principle of splitting and combining two different wavelengths. Figure 3: The WDM plate is designed to transmit λ, and reflect λ 2 thereby multiplexing the two inputs into the common port. Due to the inherent bi-directional nature of the filter, this component will also work in the opposite direction in order to de-multiplex the two wavelengths. 4

206 Exceptionally-Low-Loss LiNbO 3 Optical Devices & ICs Technology Originally Developed for High-Performance Aerospace Systems Electro-Optic Modulators & Switches & Polarization Controllers info@skphotonics.com (λ=1310, 1060, 980, 850, 800 nm, etc.) 3.48 x 0.35 x 0.35 (88.4 x 8.9 x 8.9 mm 3 ) Digital & RF Analog Modulators X-cut: or Z-cut zero-chirp 1x x 0.35 x 0.35 (88.4 x 8.9 x 8.9 mm 3 ) 2.56 x 0.35 x (65 x 8.9 x 4.95 mm 3 ) Z-cut: ( Pre-chirp: α = ): Vπ ~ 5 1GHz X-cut: ( Zero-chirp: α = 0.0 ): Vπ ~ 5 1GHz 4.0 x 0.35 x 0.24 (101.6 x 8.9 x 6.1 mm 3 ) Polarization Tracking, Scrambling, PMD/PDL Compensation High-speed (ns) 1xN, NxN Switches Single-Polarization (SP) or Polarization-Independent (PI) Short -λ Gb/s Modulators Low-Loss < 4 db, (< 3 db option, and < 2 db custom) Bandwidth >12.5 GHz, (>20 GHz version) Phase & Intensity (& Ultra-High Extinction Ratio version) Very-Low-Loss Phase Modulators Low-Loss < 3 db, (< 2 db option) Low Vπ ~ 5 1GHz, (~ 4 V option, & < 3V custom) Bandwidth > 12.5 GHz, (>25 GHz version) Gb/s (Z-cut & X-cut ) Modulators Z-cut: Pre-chirp: Low-Loss < 3 db, (< 2 db option) BW >12.5 GHz, (>18 GHz version); Vπ ~ 4 V@1GHz X-cut: Zero-chirp: Low-Loss < 4 db, (< 3 db option) BW >12.5 GHz, (>18 GHz version); Vπ ~ 5 V@1GHz Other versions: 1x2 Dual-Output Integrated PD 40 Gb/s (Z-cut & X-cut ) Modulators Z-cut: Pre-chirp BW >30 GHz; Vπ ~ 5.5 V (Lower-Vπ version available) < 4.5 db, (< 3 db, <2 db option) Integrated PD X-cut: Zero-chirp Lower Vπ Version Ultra-High Extinction Ratio Extended Temperature Range BW >30 GHz; Vπ ~ 5.5 V (Lower-Vπ version available) < 4.5 db, (< 3 db option) Integrated PD Small-Form-Factor 10 + Gb/s Modulators Insertion-Loss < 4.5dB, (< 3 db or < 2 db option) Bandwidth > 10 GHz, (> 16 GHz option) Lower Drive-Voltage version: Vπ ~4V High-speed Polarization Controllers Insertion Loss < 3 db, (< 2 db option) Response Time <<100 ns Multiple Integrated Device Stages: 3, 4, 6, 8, etc.. Available for λ = 1550, 1310, 1060 nm,. etc. + Custom Electro-optic IC Modules 1x2 (2x2) Ultra-high-speed SP Switch/Modulator >10GHz (>18GHz option), <<100ps, Vπ ~ 5V 8x8 switch 8x8: Strictly Non-blocking; Double Crosstalk-suppression 1x2 (2x2) PI switch, ns 32-channel (8-λ, 4x4) Pol. independent λ-cross connect 1x2 (2x2) SP switch, ns x8 SP switch